AM4376BZDND100 - Texas Instruments - Datasheet.Technology

Product

Folder

Sample &

Buy

Technical

Documents

Tools &

Software

Support &

Community

Reference

Design

An IMPORTANT NOTICE at the end of this data sheet addresses availability, warranty, changes, use in safety-critical applications,

intellectual property matters and other important disclaimers. PRODUCTION DATA.

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

AM437x Sitara™ Processors

1 Device Overview

1.1 Features

• Highlights

– Sitara™ ARM®Cortex®-A9 32-Bit RISC

Processor With Processing Speed up to

1000 MHz

• NEON™ SIMD Coprocessor and Vector

Floating Point (VFPv3) Coprocessor

• 32KB of Both L1 Instruction and Data Cache

• 256KB of L2 Cache or L3 RAM

– 32-Bit LPDDR2, DDR3, and DDR3L Support

– General-Purpose Memory Support (NAND,

NOR, SRAM) Supporting up to 16-Bit ECC

– SGX530 Graphics Engine

– Display Subsystem

– Programmable Real-Time Unit Subsystem and

Industrial Communication Subsystem (PRU-

ICSS)

– Real-Time Clock (RTC)

– Up to Two USB 2.0 High-Speed Dual-Role

(Host or Device) Ports With Integrated PHY

– 10, 100, and 1000 Ethernet Switch Supporting

up to Two Ports

– Serial Interfaces:

• Two Controller Area Network (CAN) Ports

• Six UARTs, Two McASPs, Five McSPIs,

Three I2C Ports, One QSPI, and One HDQ

or 1-Wire

– Security

• Crypto Hardware Accelerators (AES, SHA,

RNG, DES, and 3DES)

• Secure Boot (Avaliable Only on AM437x

High-Security [AM437xHS] Devices)

– Two 12-Bit Successive Approximation Register

(SAR) ADCs

– Up to Three 32-Bit Enhanced Capture (eCAP)

Modules

– Up to Three Enhanced Quadrature Encoder

Pulse (eQEP) Modules

– Up to Six Enhanced High-Resolution PWM

(eHRPWM) Modules

• MPU Subsystem

– ARM Cortex-A9 32-Bit RISC Microprocessor

With Processing Speed up to 1000 MHz

– 32KB of Both L1 Instruction and Data Cache

– 256KB of L2 Cache (Option to Configure as L3

RAM)

– 256KB of On-Chip Boot ROM

– 64KB of On-Chip RAM

– Secure Control Module (SCM) (Avaliable Only

on AM437xHS Devices)

– Emulation and Debug

• JTAG

• Embedded Trace Buffer

– Interrupt Controller

• On-Chip Memory (Shared L3 RAM)

– 256KB of General-Purpose On-Chip Memory

Controller (OCMC) RAM

– Accessible to All Masters

– Supports Retention for Fast Wakeup

– Up to 512KB of Total Internal RAM

(256KB of ARM Memory Configured as L3 RAM

+ 256KB of OCMC RAM)

• External Memory Interfaces (EMIFs)

– DDR Controllers:

• LPDDR2: 266-MHz Clock (LPDDR2-533

Data Rate)

• DDR3 and DDR3L: 400-MHz Clock (DDR-

800 Data Rate)

• 32-Bit Data Bus

• 2GB of Total Addressable Space

• Supports One x32, Two x16, or Four x8

Memory Device Configurations

• General-Purpose Memory Controller (GPMC)

– Flexible 8- and 16-Bit Asynchronous Memory

Interface With up to Seven Chip Selects (NAND,

NOR, Muxed-NOR, and SRAM)

– Uses BCH Code to Support 4-, 8-, or 16-Bit

ECC

– Uses Hamming Code to Support 1-Bit ECC

• Error Locator Module (ELM)

– Used With the GPMC to Locate Addresses of

Data Errors From Syndrome Polynomials

Generated Using a BCH Algorithm

– Supports 4-, 8-, and 16-Bit Per 512-Byte Block

Error Location Based on BCH Algorithms

• Programmable Real-Time Unit Subsystem and

Industrial Communication Subsystem (PRU-ICSS)

– Supports Protocols such as EtherCAT®,

PROFIBUS®, PROFINET®, and EtherNet/IP™,

EnDat 2.2, and More

– Two Programmable Real-Time Units (PRUs)

Subsystems With Two PRU Cores Each

• Each Core is a 32-Bit Load and Store RISC

Processor Capable of Running at 200 MHz

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

• 12KB (PRU-ICSS1), 4KB (PRU-ICSS0) of

Instruction RAM With Single-Error Detection

(Parity)

• 8KB (PRU-ICSS1), 4KB (PRU-ICSS0) of

Data RAM With Single-Error Detection

(Parity)

• Single-Cycle 32-Bit Multiplier With 64-Bit

Accumulator

• Enhanced GPIO Module Provides Shift-In

and Shift-Out Support and Parallel Latch on

External Signal

– 12KB (PRU-ICSS1 Only) of Shared RAM With

Single-Error Detection (Parity)

– Three 120-Byte Register Banks Accessible by

Each PRU

– Interrupt Controller Module (INTC) for Handling

System Input Events

– Local Interconnect Bus for Connecting Internal

and External Masters to the Resources Inside

the PRU-ICSS

– Peripherals Inside the PRU-ICSS

• One UART Port With Flow Control Pins,

Supports up to 12 Mbps

• One eCAP Module

• Two MII Ethernet Ports that Support

Industrial Ethernet, such as EtherCAT

• One MDIO Port

– Industrial Communication is Supported by Two

PRU-ICSS Subsystems

• Power, Reset, and Clock Management (PRCM)

Module

– Controls the Entry and Exit of Deep-Sleep

Modes

– Responsible for Sleep Sequencing, Power

Domain Switch-Off Sequencing, Wake-Up

Sequencing, and Power Domain Switch-On

Sequencing

– Clocks

• Integrated High-Frequency Oscillator Used

to Generate a Reference Clock (19.2, 24, 25,

and 26 MHz) for Various System and

Peripheral Clocks

• Supports Individual Clock Enable and

Disable Control for Subsystems and

Peripherals to Facilitate Reduced Power

Consumption

• Five ADPLLs to Generate System Clocks

(MPU Subsystem, DDR Interface, USB, and

Peripherals [MMC and SD, UART, SPI, I2C],

L3, L4, Ethernet, GFX [SGX530], and LCD

Pixel Clock)

– Power

• Two Nonswitchable Power Domains (RTC

and Wake-Up Logic [WAKE-UP])

• Three Switchable Power Domains (MPU

Subsystem, SGX530 [GFX], Peripherals and

Infrastructure [PER])

• Dynamic Voltage Frequency Scaling (DVFS)

• Real-Time Clock (RTC)

– Real-Time Date (Day, Month, Year, and Day of

Week) and Time (Hours, Minutes, and Seconds)

Information

– Internal 32.768-kHz Oscillator, RTC Logic, and

1.1-V Internal LDO

– Independent Power-On-Reset

(RTC_PWRONRSTn) Input

– Dedicated Input Pin (RTC_WAKEUP) for

External Wake Events

– Programmable Alarm Can Generate Internal

Interrupts to the PRCM for Wakeup or Cortex-

A9 for Event Notification

– Programmable Alarm Can Be Used With

External Output (RTC_PMIC_EN) to Enable the

Power-Management IC to Restore Non-RTC

Power Domains

• Peripherals

– Up to Two USB 2.0 High-Speed Dual-Role

(Host or Device) Ports With Integrated PHY

– Up to Two Industrial Gigabit Ethernet MACs

(10, 100, and 1000 Mbps)

• Integrated Switch

• Each MAC Supports MII, RMII, and RGMII

and MDIO Interfaces

• Ethernet MACs and Switch Can Operate

Independent of Other Functions

• IEEE 1588v2 Precision Time Protocol (PTP)

– Up to Two CAN Ports

• Supports CAN Version 2 Parts A and B

– Up to Two Multichannel Audio Serial Ports

(McASPs)

• Transmit and Receive Clocks up to 50 MHz

• Up to Four Serial Data Pins Per McASP Port

With Independent TX and RX Clocks

• Supports Time Division Multiplexing (TDM),

Inter-IC Sound (I2S), and Similar Formats

• Supports Digital Audio Interface

Transmission (SPDIF, IEC60958-1, and

AES-3 Formats)

• FIFO Buffers for Transmit and Receive

(256 Bytes)

– Up to Six UARTs

• All UARTs Support IrDA and CIR Modes

• All UARTs Support RTS and CTS Flow

Control

• UART1 Supports Full Modem Control

– Up to Five Master and Slave McSPIs

• McSPI0–McSPI2 Support up to Four Chip

Selects

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

• McSPI3 and McSPI4 Support up to Two

Chip Selects

• Up to 48 MHz

– One Quad-SPI

• Supports eXecute In Place (XIP) from Serial

NOR FLASH

– One Dallas 1-Wire®and HDQ Serial Interface

– Up to Three MMC, SD, and SDIO Ports

• 1-, 4-, and 8-Bit MMC, SD, and SDIO Modes

• 1.8- or 3.3-V Operation on All Ports

• Up to 48-MHz Clock

• Supports Card Detect and Write Protect

• Complies With MMC4.3 and SD and SDIO

2.0 Specifications

– Up to Three I2C Master and Slave Interfaces

• Standard Mode (up to 100 kHz)

• Fast Mode (up to 400 kHz)

– Up to Six Banks of General-Purpose I/O (GPIO)

• 32 GPIOs per Bank (Multiplexed With Other

Functional Pins)

• GPIOs Can be Used as Interrupt Inputs (up

to Two Interrupt Inputs per Bank)

– Up to Three External DMA Event Inputs That

Can Also be Used as Interrupt Inputs

– Twelve 32-Bit General-Purpose Timers

• DMTIMER1 is a 1-ms Timer Used for

Operating System (OS) Ticks

• DMTIMER4–DMTIMER7 are Pinned Out

– One Public Watchdog Timer

– One Free-Running, High-Resolution 32-kHz

Counter (synctimer32K)

– One Secure Watchdog Timer (Avaliable Only on

AM437xHS Devices)

– SGX530 3D Graphics Engine

• Tile-Based Architecture Delivering up to 20M

Poly/sec

• Universal Scalable Shader Engine is a

Multithreaded Engine Incorporating Pixel and

Vertex Shader Functionality

• Advanced Shader Feature Set in Excess of

Microsoft VS3.0, PS3.0, and OGL2.0

• Industry Standard API Support of Direct3D

Mobile, OGL-ES 1.1 and 2.0, and OpenVG

1.0

• Fine-Grained Task Switching, Load

Balancing, and Power Management

• Advanced Geometry DMA-Driven Operation

for Minimum CPU Interaction

• Programmable High-Quality Image Anti-

Aliasing

• Fully Virtualized Memory Addressing for OS

Operation in a Unified Memory Architecture

– Display Subsystem

• Display Modes

– Programmable Pixel Memory Formats

(Palletized: 1-, 2-, 4-, and 8-Bits Per

Pixel; RGB 16- and 24-Bits Per Pixel; and

YUV 4:2:2)

– 256- × 24-Bit Entries Palette in RGB

– Up to 2048 × 2048 Resolution

• Display Support

– Four Types of Displays Are Supported:

Passive and Active Colors; Passive and

Active Monochromes

– 4- and 8-Bit Monochrome Passive Panel

Interface Support (15 Grayscale Levels

Supported Using Dithering Block)

– RGB 8-Bit Color Passive Panel Interface

Support (3,375 Colors Supported for

Color Panel Using Dithering Block)

– RGB 12-, 16-, 18-, and 24-Bit Active

Panel Interface Support (Replicated or

Dithered Encoded Pixel Values)

– Remote Frame Buffer (Embedded in the

LCD Panel) Support Through the RFBI

Module

– Partial Refresh of the Remote Frame

Buffer Through the RFBI Module

– Partial Display

– Multiple Cycles Output Format on 8-, 9-,

12-, and 16-Bit Interface (TDM)

• Signal Processing

– Overlay and Windowing Support for One

Graphics Layer (RGB or CLUT) and Two

Video Layers (YUV 4:2:2, RGB16, and

RGB24)

– RGB 24-Bit Support on the Display

Interface, Optionally Dithered to RGB

18‑Bit Pixel Output Plus 6-Bit Frame Rate

Control (Spatial and Temporal)

– Transparency Color Key (Source and

Destination)

– Synchronized Buffer Update

– Gamma Curve Support

– Multiple-Buffer Support

– Cropping Support

– Color Phase Rotation

– Two 12-Bit SAR ADCs (ADC0, ADC1)

• 867K Samples Per Second

• Input Can Be Selected from Any of the Eight

Analog Inputs Multiplexed Through an 8:1

Analog Switch

• ADC0 Can Be Configured to Operate as a

4‑, 5-, or 8-Wire Resistive Touch Screen

Controller (TSC)

– Up to Three 32-Bit eCAP Modules

• Configurable as Three Capture Inputs or

Three Auxiliary PWM Outputs

– Up to Six Enhanced eHRPWM Modules

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

• Dedicated 16-Bit Time-Base Counter With

Time and Frequency Controls

• Configurable as Six Single-Ended, Six Dual-

Edge Symmetric, or Three Dual-Edge

Asymmetric Outputs

– Up to Three 32-Bit eQEP Modules

• Device Identification

– Factory Programmable Electrical Fuse Farm

(FuseFarm)

• Production ID

• Device Part Number (Unique JTAG ID)

• Device Revision (Readable by Host ARM)

• Security Keys (Avaliable Only on AM437xHS

Devices)

• Feature Identification

• Debug Interface Support

– JTAG and cJTAG for ARM (Cortex-A9 and

PRCM) and PRU-ICSS Debug

– Supports Real-Time Trace Pins (for Cortex-A9)

– 64-KB Embedded Trace Buffer (ETB)

– Supports Device Boundary Scan

– Supports IEEE 1500

• DMA

– On-Chip Enhanced DMA Controller (EDMA) Has

Three Third-Party Transfer Controllers (TPTCs)

and One Third-Party Channel Controller

(TPCC), Which Supports up to 64

Programmable Logical Channels and Eight

QDMA Channels

– EDMA is Used for:

• Transfers to and from On-Chip Memories

• Transfers to and from External Storage

(EMIF, GPMC, and Slave Peripherals)

• InterProcessor Communication (IPC)

– Integrates Hardware-Based Mailbox for IPC and

Spinlock for Process Synchronization Between

the Cortex-A9, PRCM, and PRU-ICSS

• Boot Modes

– Boot Mode is Selected Through Boot

Configuration Pins Latched on the Rising Edge

of the PWRONRSTn Reset Input Pin

• Camera

– Dual Port 8- and 10-Bit BT656 Interface

– Dual Port 8- and 10-Bit Including External Syncs

– Single Port 12-Bit

– YUV422/RGB422 and BT656 Input Format

– RAW Format

– Pixel Clock Rate up to 75 MHz

• Package

– 491-Pin BGA Package (17-mm × 17-mm) (ZDN

Suffix), 0.65-mm Ball Pitch With Via Channel

Array Technology to Enable Low-Cost Routing

1.2 Applications

• Patient Monitoring

• Navigation Equipment

• Industrial Automation

• Portable Data Terminals

• Bar Code Scanners

• Point of Service

• Portable Mobile Radios

• Test and Measurement

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

(1) For more information, see Section 7,Mechanical, Packaging, and Orderable Information.

1.3 Description

The TI AM437x high-performance processors are based on the ARM Cortex-A9 core.

The processors are enhanced with 3D graphics acceleration for rich graphical user interfaces, as well as a

coprocessor for deterministic, real-time processing including industrial communication protocols, such as

EtherCAT, PROFIBUS, EnDat, and others. The devices support high-level operating systems (HLOS).

Linux®is available free of charge from TI. Other HLOSs are available from TI's Design Network and

ecosystem partners.

These devices offer an upgrade to systems based on lower performance ARM cores and provide updated

peripherals, including memory options such as QSPI-NOR and LPDDR2.

The processors contain the subsystems shown in Figure 1-1, and a brief description of each follows.

The processor subsystem is based on the ARM Cortex-A9 core, and the PowerVR SGX™ graphics

accelerator subsystem provides 3D graphics acceleration to support display and advanced user interfaces.

The programmable real-time unit subsystem and industrial communication subsystem (PRU-ICSS) is

separate from the ARM core and allows independent operation and clocking for greater efficiency and

flexibility. The PRU-ICSS enables additional peripheral interfaces and real-time protocols such as

EtherCAT, PROFINET, EtherNet/IP, PROFIBUS, Ethernet Powerlink, Sercos, EnDat, and others. The

PRU-ICSS enables EnDat and another industrial communication protocol in parallel. Additionally, the

programmable nature of the PRU-ICSS, along with their access to pins, events and all system-on-chip

(SoC) resources, provides flexibility in implementing fast real-time responses, specialized data handling

operations, custom peripheral interfaces, and in off-loading tasks from the other processor cores of the

SoC.

High-performance interconnects provide high-bandwidth data transfers for multiple initiators to the internal

and external memory controllers and to on-chip peripherals. The device also offers a comprehensive

clock-management scheme.

One on-chip analog to digital converter (ADC0) can couple with the display subsystem to provide an

integrated touch-screen solution. The other ADC (ADC1) can combine with the pulse width module to

create a closed-loop motor control solution.

The RTC provides a clock reference on a separate power domain. The clock reference enables a battery-

backed clock reference.

The camera interface offers configuration for a single- or dual-camera parallel port.

Cryptographic acceleration is available in every AM437x device. Secure boot is available only on

AM437xHS devices for anticloning and illegal software update protection. For more information about

secure boot and HS devices, contact your TI sales representative.

Table 1-1. Device Information(1)

PART NUMBER PACKAGE BODY SIZE

AM4372ZDN NFBGA (491) 17.0 mm × 17.0 mm

AM4376ZDN NFBGA (491) 17.0 mm × 17.0 mm

AM4377ZDN NFBGA (491) 17.0 mm × 17.0 mm

AM4378ZDN NFBGA (491) 17.0 mm × 17.0 mm

AM4379ZDN NFBGA (491) 17.0 mm × 17.0 mm

ARM

Cortex-A9

Up to 1000 MHz

32KB, 32KB L1

256KB L2, L3 RAM

64KB RAM

Graphics

PowerVR

SGX

3D GFX

20 MTri/s

Crypto

256KB

L3 RAM

Touch Screen Controller (TSC)(A)

Display

Quad Core

PRU-ICSS

EtherCAT,

PROFINET,

EtherNet/IP,

EnDat

and more

L3 and L4 Interconnect

I C x3

UART x6

System Interface

EDMA

Timers x12

WDT

RTC

eHRPWM x6

eQEP, eCAP x3

JTAG, ETB

EMAC

2-port switch

10, 100, 1G

with 1588

(MII, RMII,

RGMII

and MDIO)

32b LPDDR2, DDR3, DDR3L(B)

NAND, NOR, Async

(16-bit ECC)

Memory Interface

Processing: Overlay,

Resizing,Color Space

Conversion, and more

SPI x5

QSPI

CAN x2

HDQ, 1-Wire

ADC0 (8 inputs)

12-bit SAR(A)

GPIO

Camera Interface

(2x Parallel)

MMC, SD,

SDIO x3

USB 2.0 Dual-Role

+ PHY x2

McASP x2

(4ch)

24-bit LCDCtrl (WXGA)

Simplified Power

Sequencing

ADC1 (8 inputs)

12-bit SAR

Secure Boot

(HS device only)

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

1.4 Functional Block Diagram

A. Use of TSC limits available ADC0 inputs.

B. Maximum clock: LPDDR2 = 266 MHz; DDR3/DDR3L = 400 MHz.

Figure 1-1. Functional Block Diagram

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table of Contents

1 Device Overview ......................................... 1

1.1 Features .............................................. 1

1.2 Applications........................................... 4

1.3 Description............................................ 5

1.4 Functional Block Diagram ............................ 6

2 Revision History ......................................... 8

3 Device Comparison ..................................... 9

3.1 Related Products.................................... 10

4 Terminal Configuration and Functions ............ 11

4.1 Pin Diagrams........................................ 11

4.2 Pin Attributes........................................ 21

4.3 Signal Descriptions.................................. 65

5 Specifications ......................................... 103

5.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings........................ 103

5.2 ESD Ratings ....................................... 105

5.3 Power-On Hours (POH) ........................... 105

5.4 Operating Performance Points .................... 106

5.5 Recommended Operating Conditions ............. 107

5.6 Power Consumption Summary .................... 109

5.7 DC Electrical Characteristics ...................... 110

5.8 ADC0: Touch Screen Controller and Analog-to-

Digital Subsystem Electrical Parameters .......... 113

5.9 ADC1: Analog-to-Digital Subsystem Electrical

Parameters......................................... 115

5.10 VPP Specifications for One-Time Programmable

(OTP) eFuses...................................... 118

5.11 Thermal Resistance Characteristics............... 119

5.12 External Capacitors ................................ 121

5.13 Timing and Switching Characteristics.............. 124

5.14 Emulation and Debug.............................. 254

6 Device and Documentation Support.............. 255

6.1 Device Nomenclature.............................. 255

6.2 Tools and Software ................................ 256

6.3 Documentation Support............................ 258

6.4 Related Links ...................................... 260

6.5 Community Resources............................. 260

6.6 Trademarks ........................................ 260

6.7 Electrostatic Discharge Caution ................... 260

6.8 Glossary............................................ 260

7 Mechanical, Packaging, and Orderable

Information............................................. 261

7.1 Via Channel........................................ 261

7.2 Packaging Information ............................. 261

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

2 Revision History

NOTE: Page numbers for previous revisions may differ from page numbers in the current version.

Changes from Revision C (April 2015) to Revision D Page

• Added AM4372 device information to document ................................................................................. 1

• Added AM4372ZDN Part Number to Table 1-1, Device Information .......................................................... 5

• Added Table 3-1, Device Features Comparison ................................................................................. 9

• Added AM4372 Device and 600-MHz Device Speed Range to Figure 6-1, Device Nomenclature .................... 256

• Updated Design Kits and Evaluation Modules list in Section 6.2, Tools and Software................................... 256

• Updated notification alert paragraph in Section 6.3, Documentation Support............................................. 258

• Added AM4372 part number information to Table 6-1, Related Links...................................................... 260

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

3 Device Comparison

Table 3-1 shows the features supported across different AM437x devices.

Table 3-1. Device Features Comparison

FUNCTION AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

ARM Cortex-A9 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Frequency 600 MHz

800 MHz

300 MHz

800 MHz

1000 MHz

800 MHz

1000 MHz 800 MHz

1000 MHz

MIPS 1500

2000

750

2000

2500

2000

2500 2000

2500

On-chip L1 cache 64KB 64KB 64KB 64KB 64KB

On-chip L2 cache 256KB 256KB 256KB 256KB 256KB

Graphics accelerator (SGX530) — — — 3D 3D

Hardware acceleration Crypto accelerator Crypto accelerator Crypto accelerator Crypto accelerator Crypto accelerator

Programmable real-time unit

subsystem and industrial

communication subsystem (PRU-

ICSS)

—Features including

basic Industrial

protocols

Features including all

Industrial protocols

Features including

basic Industrial

protocols

Features including all

Industrial protocols

On-chip memory 256KB 256KB 256KB 256KB 256KB

Display options DSS DSS DSS DSS DSS

General-purpose memory 1 16-bit (GPMC,

NAND flash, NOR

flash, SRAM)

1 16-bit (GPMC,

NAND flash, NOR

flash, SRAM)

1 16-bit (GPMC,

NAND flash, NOR

flash, SRAM)

1 16-bit (GPMC,

NAND flash, NOR

flash, SRAM)

1 16-bit (GPMC,

NAND flash, NOR

flash, SRAM)

DRAM(1) 1 32-bit (DDR3-800,

DDR3L-800,

LPDDR2-532)

1 32-bit (DDR3-800,

DDR3L-800,

LPDDR2-532)

1 32-bit (DDR3-800,

DDR3L-800,

LPDDR2-532)

1 32-bit (DDR3-800,

DDR3L-800,

LPDDR2-532)

1 32-bit (DDR3-800,

DDR3L-800,

LPDDR2-532)

Universal serial bus (USB) 2 ports 2 ports 2 ports 2 ports 2 ports

Ethernet media access controller

(EMAC) with 2-port switch 10/100/1000

2 ports 10/100/1000

2 ports

Multimedia card (MMC) 3 3 3 3 3

Controller-area network (CAN) 2 2 2 2 2

Universal asynchronous receiver

and transmitter (UART) 6 6 6 6 6

Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) 2 8-ch 12-bit 2 8-ch 12-bit 2 8-ch 12-bit 2 8-ch 12-bit 2 8-ch 12-bit

Enhanced high-resolution PWM

modules (eHRPWM) 6 6 6 6 6

Enhanced capture modules (eCAP) 3 3 3 3 3

Enhanced quadrature encoder

pulse (eQEP) 3 3 3 3 3

Real-time clock (RTC) 1 1 1 1 1

Inter-integrated circuit (I2C) 3 3 3 3 3

Multichannel audio serial port

(McASP) 2 2 2 2 2

Multichannel serial port interface

(McSPI) 5 5 5 5 5

Enhanced direct memory access

(EDMA) 64-Ch 64-Ch 64-Ch 64-Ch 64-Ch

Camera (VPFE) 12-bit 12-bit 12-bit 12-bit 12-bit

Sync timer (32K) 1 1 1 1 1

HDQ/1-Wire 1 1 1 1 1

QSPI 1 1 1 1 1

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 3-1. Device Features Comparison (continued)

FUNCTION AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Timers 12 12 12 12 12

DEV_FEATURE register value(2) 0x020000EF 0x020000EF 0x020300EF 0x220000EF 0x220300EF

Input/output (I/O) supply 1.8 V, 3.3 V 1.8 V, 3.3 V 1.8 V, 3.3 V 1.8 V, 3.3 V 1.8 V, 3.3 V

Operating temperature range 0 to 90°C

–40 to 105°C

0 to 90°C

–40 to 105°C

–40 to 90°C

–40 to 105°C

–40 to 90°C

0 to 90°C

–40 to 105°C

–40 to 90°C –40 to 105°C

(1) DRAM speeds listed are data rates.

(2) For more details about the DEV_FEATURE register, see the AM437x Sitara Processors Technical Reference Manual.

3.1 Related Products

For information about other devices in this family of products or related products, see the following links:

Sitara Processors Scalable processors based on ARM Cortex-A cores with flexible peripherals,

connectivity and unified software support – perfect for sensors to servers.

Sitara AM437x Processors Scalable ARM Cortex-A9 from 300 MHz up to 1 GHz. 3D graphics option for

enhanced user interface. Quad core PRU-ICSS for industrial Ethernet protocols and position

feedback control. Dual camera support for barcode scanning, preview and still pictures.

Customer programmable secure boot option.

Companion Products for AM437x Devices Review products that are frequently used in conjunction with

this product.

Reference Designs for AM437x Devices TI Designs Reference Design Library is a robust reference

design library spanning analog, embedded processor and connectivity. Created by TI experts

to help you jump start your system design, all TI Designs include schematic or block

diagrams, BOMs and design files to speed your time to market. Search and download

designs at ti.com/tidesigns.

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

4 Terminal Configuration and Functions

4.1 Pin Diagrams

NOTE

The terms "ball", "pin", and "terminal" are used interchangeably throughout the document. An

attempt is made to use "ball" only when referring to the physical package.

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 4-1. ZDN Ball Map [Section Top Left - Top View]

A B C D E F G H

25 VSS XTALOUT XTALIN gpio5_8 gpio5_12 USB1_DRVVBUS EXTINTn uart3_rxd

24 dss_ac_bias_en VSS_OSC xdma_event_intr1 xdma_event_intr0 gpio5_13 gpio5_9 eCAP0_in_PWM0_o

ut uart3_txd

23 dss_hsync dss_vsync VDDS_OSC VDDS_CLKOUT gpio5_11 mcasp0_axr0

22 dss_pclk dss_data0 VDDSHV5 WARMRSTn uart3_ctsn

21 dss_data1 dss_data2 dss_data3 USB0_DRVVBUS Reserved

20 dss_data4 dss_data5 dss_data6 vdd_mpu_mon VDDS gpio5_10 clkreq

19 dss_data8 dss_data9 dss_data12 dss_data13 dss_data7 CAP_VBB_MPU Reserved

18 dss_data10 dss_data11 VSS

Ball Map Position

123

456

789

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 4-2. ZDN Ball Map [Section Top Middle - Top View]

J K L M N P R T

25 uart0_rtsn uart0_rxd uart0_ctsn mcasp0_axr1 spi4_cs0 spi4_sclk spi0_cs1 USB1_VBUS

24 uart0_txd uart3_rtsn mcasp0_ahclkx mcasp0_ahclkr mcasp0_aclkx spi4_d1 spi4_d0 EMU1

23 mcasp0_fsr mcasp0_aclkr EMU0 spi0_sclk spi2_cs0

22 uart1_ctsn uart1_rtsn mcasp0_fsx spi2_d0 spi0_d0

21 uart1_rxd uart1_txd VDDS_PLL_CORE_

LCD VPP spi0_d1

20 VDD_MPU VDD_MPU spi2_sclk spi2_d1 spi0_cs0

19 VDD_MPU VDD_MPU VDDSHV3 VDDS VDD_CORE

18 VDDSHV3 VDDSHV3 VSS VDD_MPU VDDSHV3 VDDSHV3 VSS VDD_CORE

Ball Map Position

123

456

789

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 4-3. ZDN Ball Map [Section Top Right - Top View]

U V W Y AA AB AC AD AE

25 USB1_ID USB1_DM USB0_DP nTRST TCK cam1_wen cam1_field cam1_hd VSS

24 USB0_ID USB1_DP USB0_DM TMS TDO I2C0_SDA cam1_data9 cam1_data8 cam1_data7

23 USB0_VBUS VSSA_USB PWRONRSTn VSS cam1_vd cam1_data6 cam1_data5

22 USB1_CE USB0_CE I2C0_SCL cam1_data4 cam1_data3

21 VDDA1P8V_USB1 VDDA1P8V_USB0 cam1_data1 cam1_data2 cam1_pclk

20 VDDA3P3V_USB1 VDDA3P3V_USB0 TDI cam1_data0 cam0_pclk cam0_data7 cam0_data6

19 VSS VDDS cam0_data9 cam0_data8 cam0_data5 cam0_data4

18 VSS VSS VDDSHV3 cam0_data2 cam0_data3 cam0_data1 cam0_field cam0_vd cam0_data0

Ball Map Position

123

456

789

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 4-4. ZDN Ball Map [Section Middle Left - Top View]

A B C D E F G H

17 mdio_data mdio_clk dss_data14 dss_data15 VDDS_PLL_MPU mii1_rxd0 VDDSHV6 VDDSHV6

16 rmii1_ref_clk mii1_rxd1 mii1_txd3 mii1_col mii1_rxd2 VDDSHV7 VDDSHV6 VDD_MPU

15 mii1_rx_dv mii1_txd0 VSS

14 mii1_txd1 mii1_crs mii1_rxd3 mii1_tx_clk CAP_VDD_SRAM_

MPU VDDS_SRAM_MPU

_BB VDDSHV8 VDD_MPU

13 mii1_tx_en mii1_rx_er mii1_txd2 mii1_rx_clk CAP_VDD_SRAM_C

ORE VDDS_SRAM_COR

E_BG VDDSHV8 VDD_MPU

12 gpmc_clk gpmc_csn3 VDDS

11 gpmc_ad15 gpmc_ad14 gpmc_ad13 gpmc_ad11 gpmc_ad12 gpmc_ad10 VDDSHV9 VDDSHV9

10 gpmc_ad9 gpmc_ad8 gpmc_be0n_cle gpmc_wen gpmc_oen_ren gpmc_csn2 VDDSHV10 VDDSHV10

Ball Map Position

123

456

789

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 4-5. ZDN Ball Map [Section Middle Middle - Top View]

J K L M N P R T

17 VSS VDDSHV3 VSS VDD_MPU VDD_CORE VDD_CORE VSS VSS

16 VDD_MPU VSS VDD_CORE VDD_CORE

15 VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS

14 VDD_MPU VSS VDD_CORE VDD_CORE VSS VSS VDD_CORE VDD_CORE

13 VDD_MPU VSS VSS VSS

12 VSS VSS VDD_CORE VDD_CORE VSS VSS VSS VSS

11 VDD_CORE VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VDD_CORE VDD_CORE

10 VDD_CORE VSS VSS VSS

Ball Map Position

123

456

789

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 4-6. ZDN Ball Map [Section Middle Right - Top View]

U V W Y AA AB AC AD AE

17 VSS VDDSHV2 cam0_wen cam0_hd

16 VSS VDDSHV2 VDDSHV2 VDDA_ADC1 ADC1_AIN2 ADC1_AIN1 ADC1_AIN0 ADC1_AIN7 ADC1_AIN6

15 VDD_CORE VDD_CORE VDDS ADC1_AIN5 ADC1_AIN4 ADC1_AIN3 VSSA_ADC ADC1_VREFN ADC1_VREFP

14 VSS VSS ADC0_VREFP ADC0_VREFN

13 VSS VSS VDD_CORE ADC0_AIN2 ADC0_AIN3 ADC0_AIN4 ADC0_AIN5 ADC0_AIN6 ADC0_AIN7

12 VSS VSS VDD_CORE ADC0_AIN1 ADC0_AIN0 VDDA_ADC0 Reserved VDDS Reserved

11 VSS VSS Reserved Reserved

10 VSS VSS Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved VSS

Ball Map Position

123

456

789

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 4-7. ZDN Ball Map [Section Bottom Left - Top View]

A B C D E F G H

9gpmc_advn_ale gpmc_csn1 VDDSHV11

8gpmc_csn0 gpmc_ad7 gpmc_ad6 gpmc_a11 gpmc_a6 VDDS3P3V_IOLDO gpmc_a10 VDDSHV11

7gpmc_ad5 gpmc_ad4 gpmc_a4 gpmc_a5 gpmc_a8

6gpmc_ad3 gpmc_ad2 gpmc_a2 CAP_VDDS1P8V_IO

LDO gpmc_a7 VDDS

5gpmc_ad1 gpmc_ad0 gpmc_a1 VDDS_PLL_DDR

4gpmc_a3 gpmc_a9 ddr_dqm0 ddr_d4

3gpmc_be1n gpmc_wpn gpmc_a0 ddr_d0 ddr_d3 ddr_d5

2gpmc_wait0 mmc0_dat2 mmc0_dat1 mmc0_cmd ddr_d1 ddr_dqs0 ddr_d6 ddr_dqm1

1VSS mmc0_dat3 mmc0_dat0 mmc0_clk ddr_d2 ddr_dqsn0 ddr_d7 ddr_d8

Ball Map Position

123

456

789

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 4-8. ZDN Ball Map [Section Bottom Middle - Top View]

J K L M N P R T

9VSS VSS VSS VDD_CORE VDD_CORE VSS VDD_CORE VDD_CORE

8VDDSHV1 VDDS_DDR VSS VDDS_DDR VDDS_DDR VSS VDDS_DDR VDDS_DDR

7VDDSHV1 VDDS_DDR VDDS_DDR VDDS_DDR VDDS_DDR VDDS_DDR

6ddr_d9 ddr_d13 ddr_a10 ddr_cke1 VDDS_DDR ddr_vref

5ddr_d10 ddr_d14 ddr_csn0 ddr_a13 ddr_a5 ddr_a11

4ddr_d11 ddr_d15 ddr_csn1 ddr_wen ddr_a6 ddr_a12

3ddr_d12 ddr_ba2 ddr_cke0 ddr_casn ddr_a7 ddr_a14

2ddr_dqs1 ddr_ba1 ddr_a2 ddr_ck ddr_rasn ddr_a3 ddr_a8 ddr_a15

1ddr_dqsn1 ddr_ba0 ddr_a1 ddr_nck ddr_a0 ddr_a4 ddr_a9 ddr_resetn

Ball Map Position

123

456

789

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 4-9. ZDN Ball Map [Section Bottom Right - Top View]

U V W Y AA AB AC AD AE

9VSS VSS Reserved Reserved Reserved VDD_CORE Reserved

8VSS VDDS_DDR VDDS VSS

7VDDS_DDR Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved VSS

6ddr_dqm2 ddr_d23 Reserved Reserved Reserved RTC_PMIC_EN RTC_PWRONRST

5ddr_d16 ddr_d22 Reserved VDDS_RTC RTC_XTALIN

4ddr_d17 ddr_d21 ddr_d26 VSS_RTC RTC_XTALOUT

3ddr_d18 ddr_d25 ddr_d27 ddr_vtp CAP_VDD_RTC RTC_WAKEUP

2ddr_odt1 ddr_d19 ddr_dqsn2 ddr_d24 ddr_dqsn3 ddr_d28 ddr_d31 Reserved RTC_KALDO_EN

1ddr_odt0 ddr_d20 ddr_dqs2 ddr_dqm3 ddr_dqs3 ddr_d29 ddr_d30 Reserved VSS

Ball Map Position

123

456

789

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

4.2 Pin Attributes

1. BALL NUMBER: Package ball numbers associated with each signals.

2. PIN NAME: The name of the package pin.

Note: The table does not take into account subsystem terminal multiplexing options.

3. SIGNAL NAME: The signal name for that pin in the mode being used.

4. MODE: Multiplexing mode number.

(a) Mode 0 is the primary mode; this means that when mode 0 is set, the function mapped on the

terminal corresponds to the name of the terminal. There is always a function mapped on the

primary mode. Notice that primary mode is not necessarily the default mode.

Note: The default mode is the mode at the release of the reset; also see the RESET REL. MODE

column.

(b) Modes 1 to 7 are possible modes for alternate functions. On each terminal, some modes are

effectively used for alternate functions, while some modes are not used and do not correspond to a

functional configuration.

5. TYPE: Signal direction

– I = Input

– O = Output

– IO = Input and Output

– D = Open drain

– DS = Differential

– A = Analog

– PWR = Power

– GND = Ground

Note: In the safe_mode, the buffer is configured in high-impedance.

6. BALL RESET STATE: State of the terminal while the active low PWRONRSTn terminal is low.

– 0: The buffer drives VOL (pulldown or pullup resistor not activated)

0(PD): The buffer drives VOL with an active pulldown resistor

– 1: The buffer drives VOH (pulldown or pullup resistor not activated)

1(PU): The buffer drives VOH with an active pullup resistor

– Z or OFF: High-impedance

– L: High-impedance with an active pulldown resistor

– H : High-impedance with an active pullup resistor

7. BALL RESET REL. STATE: State of the terminal after the active low PWRONRSTn terminal

transitions from low to high.

– 0: The buffer drives VOL (pulldown or pullup resistor not activated)

0(PD): The buffer drives VOL with an active pulldown resistor

– 1: The buffer drives VOH (pulldown or pullup resistor not activated)

1(PU): The buffer drives VOH with an active pullup resistor

– Z or OFF: High-impedance.

– L: High-impedance with an active pulldown resistor

– H : High-impedance with an active pullup resistor

8. RESET REL. MODE: The mode is automatically configured after the active low PWRONRSTn terminal

transitions from low to high.

9. POWER: The voltage supply that powers the terminal’s IO buffers.

10. HYS: Indicates if the input buffer is with hysteresis.

11. BUFFER STRENGTH: Drive strength of the associated output buffer.

12. PULLUP OR PULLDOWN TYPE: Denotes the presence of an internal pullup or pulldown resistor.

Pullup and pulldown resistors can be enabled or disabled via software.

13. IO CELL: IO cell information.

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Note: Configuring two terminals to the same input signal is not supported as it can yield unexpected

results. This can be easily prevented with the proper software configuration.

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Table 4-10. Pin Attributes (ZDN Package)

BALL

NUMBER [1] PIN NAME [2] SIGNAL NAME [3] MODE [4] TYPE [5] BALL

RESET

STATE [6]

BALL

RESET

REL.

STATE [7]

BALL RESET

REL. MODE

[8] POWER [9] HYS [10] BUFFER

STRENGTH

(mA) [11]

PULL

UP/DOWN

TYPE [12] IO CELL [13]

AA12 ADC0_AIN0 ADC0_AIN0 0x0 A Z Z Mode0 VDDA_ADC0 NA 25 NA Analog

Y12 ADC0_AIN1 ADC0_AIN1 0x0 A Z Z Mode0 VDDA_ADC0 NA 25 NA Analog

Y13 ADC0_AIN2 ADC0_AIN2 0x0 A Z Z Mode0 VDDA_ADC0 NA 25 NA Analog

AA13 ADC0_AIN3 ADC0_AIN3 0x0 A Z Z Mode0 VDDA_ADC0 NA 25 NA Analog

AB13 ADC0_AIN4 ADC0_AIN4 0x0 A Z Z Mode0 VDDA_ADC0 NA 25 NA Analog

AC13 ADC0_AIN5 ADC0_AIN5 0x0 A Z Z Mode0 VDDA_ADC0 NA 25 NA Analog

AD13 ADC0_AIN6 ADC0_AIN6 0x0 A Z Z Mode0 VDDA_ADC0 NA 25 NA Analog

AE13 ADC0_AIN7 ADC0_AIN7 0x0 A Z Z Mode0 VDDA_ADC0 NA 25 NA Analog

AE14 ADC0_VREFN ADC0_VREFN 0x0 AP Z Z Mode0 VDDA_ADC0 NA NA NA Analog

AD14 ADC0_VREFP ADC0_VREFP 0x0 AP Z Z Mode0 VDDA_ADC0 NA NA NA Analog

AC16 ADC1_AIN0 ADC1_AIN0 0x0 A Z Z Mode0 VDDA_ADC1 NA 25 NA Analog

AB16 ADC1_AIN1 ADC1_AIN1 0x0 A Z Z Mode0 VDDA_ADC1 NA 25 NA Analog

AA16 ADC1_AIN2 ADC1_AIN2 0x0 A Z Z Mode0 VDDA_ADC1 NA 25 NA Analog

AB15 ADC1_AIN3 ADC1_AIN3 0x0 A Z Z Mode0 VDDA_ADC1 NA 25 NA Analog

AA15 ADC1_AIN4 ADC1_AIN4 0x0 A Z Z Mode0 VDDA_ADC1 NA 25 NA Analog

Y15 ADC1_AIN5 ADC1_AIN5 0x0 A Z Z Mode0 VDDA_ADC1 NA 25 NA Analog

AE16 ADC1_AIN6 ADC1_AIN6 0x0 A Z Z Mode0 VDDA_ADC1 NA 25 NA Analog

AD16 ADC1_AIN7 ADC1_AIN7 0x0 A Z Z Mode0 VDDA_ADC1 NA 25 NA Analog

AD15 ADC1_VREFN ADC1_VREFN 0x0 AP Z Z Mode0 VDDA_ADC1 NA NA NA Analog

AE15 ADC1_VREFP ADC1_VREFP 0x0 AP Z Z Mode0 VDDA_ADC1 NA NA NA Analog

AE18 cam0_data0 cam0_data0 0x0 I PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV2 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

cam1_data9 0x2 I

I2C1_SDA 0x3 IOD

pr0_pru1_gpo16 0x4 O

pr0_pru1_gpi16 0x5 I

ehrpwm0_synco 0x6 O

gpio5_19 0x7 IO

AB18 cam0_data1 cam0_data1 0x0 I PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV2 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

cam1_data8 0x2 I

I2C1_SCL 0x3 IOD

pr0_pru1_gpo17 0x4 O

pr0_pru1_gpi17 0x5 I

ehrpwm3_synco 0x6 O

gpio5_20 0x7 IO

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Table 4-10. Pin Attributes (ZDN Package) (continued)

BALL

NUMBER [1] PIN NAME [2] SIGNAL NAME [3] MODE [4] TYPE [5] BALL

RESET

STATE [6]

BALL

RESET

REL.

STATE [7]

BALL RESET

REL. MODE

[8] POWER [9] HYS [10] BUFFER

STRENGTH

(mA) [11]

PULL

UP/DOWN

TYPE [12] IO CELL [13]

Y18 cam0_data2 cam0_data2 0x0 I PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV2 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

mmc1_clk 0x1 IO

cam1_data10 0x2 I

qspi_clk 0x3 IO

gpio4_24 0x7 IO

AA18 cam0_data3 cam0_data3 0x0 I PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV2 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

mmc1_cmd 0x1 IO

cam1_data11 0x2 I

qspi_csn 0x3 O

gpio4_25 0x7 IO

AE19 cam0_data4 cam0_data4 0x0 I PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV2 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

mmc1_dat0 0x1 IO

cam1_wen 0x2 I

qspi_d0 0x3 IO

ehrpwm3A 0x6 O

gpio4_26 0x7 IO

AD19 cam0_data5 cam0_data5 0x0 I PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV2 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

mmc1_dat1 0x1 IO

qspi_d1 0x3 I

ehrpwm3B 0x6 O

gpio4_27 0x7 IO

AE20 cam0_data6 cam0_data6 0x0 I PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV2 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

mmc1_dat2 0x1 IO

qspi_d2 0x3 I

ehrpwm1A 0x6 O

gpio4_28 0x7 IO

AD20 cam0_data7 cam0_data7 0x0 I PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV2 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

mmc1_dat3 0x1 IO

qspi_d3 0x3 I

ehrpwm1B 0x6 O

gpio4_29 0x7 IO

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Table 4-10. Pin Attributes (ZDN Package) (continued)

BALL

NUMBER [1] PIN NAME [2] SIGNAL NAME [3] MODE [4] TYPE [5] BALL

RESET

STATE [6]

BALL

RESET

REL.

STATE [7]

BALL RESET

REL. MODE

[8] POWER [9] HYS [10] BUFFER

STRENGTH

(mA) [11]

PULL

UP/DOWN

TYPE [12] IO CELL [13]

AB19 cam0_data8 cam0_data8 0x0 I PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV2 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

dss_data18 0x2 O

pr0_pru0_gpo15 0x3 O

spi2_cs2 0x4 IO

pr0_pru0_gpi15 0x5 I

EMU7 0x6 IO

gpio4_5 0x7 IO

I2C2_SCL 0x8 IOD

AA19 cam0_data9 cam0_data9 0x0 I PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV2 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

dss_data17 0x2 O

pr0_pru0_gpo16 0x3 O

spi2_cs3 0x4 IO

pr0_pru0_gpi16 0x5 I

EMU8 0x6 IO

gpio4_6 0x7 IO

AC18 cam0_field cam0_field 0x0 IO PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV2 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

dss_data21 0x2 O

cam0_data10 0x3 I

spi2_sclk 0x4 IO

cam1_data10 0x5 I

EMU4 0x6 IO

gpio4_2 0x7 IO

AE17 cam0_hd cam0_hd 0x0 IO PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV2 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

dss_data23 0x2 O

pr1_edio_sof 0x3 O

spi2_cs1 0x4 IO

EMU10 0x5 IO

EMU2 0x6 IO

gpio4_0 0x7 IO

AC20 cam0_pclk cam0_pclk 0x0 I PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV2 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

dss_data19 0x2 O

pr0_pru0_gpo14 0x3 O

spi2_cs0 0x4 IO

pr0_pru0_gpi14 0x5 I

EMU6 0x6 IO

gpio4_4 0x7 IO

I2C2_SDA 0x8 IOD

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Table 4-10. Pin Attributes (ZDN Package) (continued)

BALL

NUMBER [1] PIN NAME [2] SIGNAL NAME [3] MODE [4] TYPE [5] BALL

RESET

STATE [6]

BALL

RESET

REL.

STATE [7]

BALL RESET

REL. MODE

[8] POWER [9] HYS [10] BUFFER

STRENGTH

(mA) [11]

PULL

UP/DOWN

TYPE [12] IO CELL [13]

AD18 cam0_vd cam0_vd 0x0 IO PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV2 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

dss_data22 0x2 O

pr1_edio_outvalid 0x3 O

spi2_d1 0x4 IO

EMU11 0x5 IO

EMU3 0x6 IO

gpio4_1 0x7 IO

AD17 cam0_wen cam0_wen 0x0 I PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV2 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

dss_data20 0x2 O

cam0_data11 0x3 I

spi2_d0 0x4 IO

cam1_data11 0x5 I

EMU5 0x6 IO

gpio4_3 0x7 IO

AB20 cam1_data0 cam1_data0 0x0 I PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV2 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

uart1_rxd 0x1 IO

spi3_d0 0x2 IO

I2C2_SDA 0x3 IOD

ehrpwm0_tripzone_input 0x6 I

gpio4_14 0x7 IO

AC21 cam1_data1 cam1_data1 0x0 I PU PU Mode7 VDDSHV2 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

uart1_txd 0x1 IO

spi3_d1 0x2 IO

I2C2_SCL 0x3 IOD

ehrpwm0_synci 0x6 I

gpio4_15 0x7 IO

AD21 cam1_data2 cam1_data2 0x0 I PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV2 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

uart1_ctsn 0x1 IO

spi3_cs0 0x2 IO

mmc2_clk 0x3 IO

pr0_pru1_gpo10 0x4 O

pr0_pru1_gpi10 0x5 I

ehrpwm1_tripzone_input 0x6 I

gpio4_16 0x7 IO

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Table 4-10. Pin Attributes (ZDN Package) (continued)

BALL

NUMBER [1] PIN NAME [2] SIGNAL NAME [3] MODE [4] TYPE [5] BALL

RESET

STATE [6]

BALL

RESET

REL.

STATE [7]

BALL RESET

REL. MODE

[8] POWER [9] HYS [10] BUFFER

STRENGTH

(mA) [11]

PULL

UP/DOWN

TYPE [12] IO CELL [13]

AE22 cam1_data3 cam1_data3 0x0 I PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV2 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

uart1_rtsn 0x1 O

spi3_sclk 0x2 IO

mmc2_cmd 0x3 IO

pr0_pru1_gpo11 0x4 O

pr0_pru1_gpi11 0x5 I

pr1_edc_latch0_in 0x6 I

gpio4_17 0x7 IO

AD22 cam1_data4 cam1_data4 0x0 I PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV2 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

uart1_rin 0x1 I

uart2_rxd 0x2 IO

mmc2_dat0 0x3 IO

pr0_pru1_gpo12 0x4 O

pr0_pru1_gpi12 0x5 I

pr1_edc_latch1_in 0x6 I

gpio4_18 0x7 IO

uart0_dcdn 0x8 I

AE23 cam1_data5 cam1_data5 0x0 I PU PU Mode7 VDDSHV2 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

uart1_dsrn 0x1 I

uart2_txd 0x2 IO

mmc2_dat1 0x3 IO

pr0_pru1_gpo13 0x4 O

pr0_pru1_gpi13 0x5 I

pr1_edio_latch_in 0x6 I

gpio4_19 0x7 IO

AD23 cam1_data6 cam1_data6 0x0 I PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV2 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

uart1_dcdn 0x1 I

uart2_ctsn 0x2 IO

mmc2_dat2 0x3 IO

pr0_pru1_gpo14 0x4 O

pr0_pru1_gpi14 0x5 I

pr1_edio_data_in0 0x6 I

gpio4_20 0x7 IO

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Table 4-10. Pin Attributes (ZDN Package) (continued)

BALL

NUMBER [1] PIN NAME [2] SIGNAL NAME [3] MODE [4] TYPE [5] BALL

RESET

STATE [6]

BALL

RESET

REL.

STATE [7]

BALL RESET

REL. MODE

[8] POWER [9] HYS [10] BUFFER

STRENGTH

(mA) [11]

PULL

UP/DOWN

TYPE [12] IO CELL [13]

AE24 cam1_data7 cam1_data7 0x0 I PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV2 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

uart1_dtrn 0x1 O

uart2_rtsn 0x2 O

mmc2_dat3 0x3 IO

pr0_pru1_gpo15 0x4 O

pr0_pru1_gpi15 0x5 I

pr1_edio_data_in1 0x6 I

gpio4_21 0x7 IO

AD24 cam1_data8 cam1_data8 0x0 I PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV2 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

xdma_event_intr3 0x1 I

spi0_cs2 0x2 IO

pr0_pru1_gpo0 0x3 O

spi2_d0 0x4 IO

pr0_pru1_gpi0 0x5 I

EMU10 0x6 IO

gpio4_8 0x7 IO

uart0_rtsn 0x8 O

AC24 cam1_data9 cam1_data9 0x0 I PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV2 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

dss_data16 0x2 O

pr0_pru0_gpo17 0x3 O

spi2_cs3 0x4 IO

pr0_pru0_gpi17 0x5 I

EMU9 0x6 IO

gpio4_7 0x7 IO

uart0_ctsn 0x8 I

AC25 cam1_field cam1_field 0x0 IO PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV2 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

xdma_event_intr7 0x1 I

ext_hw_trigger 0x2 I

cam0_data10 0x3 I

spi2_cs1 0x4 IO

cam1_data10 0x5 I

ehrpwm1B 0x6 O

gpio4_12 0x7 IO

ehrpwm3A 0x8 O

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Table 4-10. Pin Attributes (ZDN Package) (continued)

BALL

NUMBER [1] PIN NAME [2] SIGNAL NAME [3] MODE [4] TYPE [5] BALL

RESET

STATE [6]

BALL

RESET

REL.

STATE [7]

BALL RESET

REL. MODE

[8] POWER [9] HYS [10] BUFFER

STRENGTH

(mA) [11]

PULL

UP/DOWN

TYPE [12] IO CELL [13]

AD25 cam1_hd cam1_hd 0x0 IO PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV2 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

xdma_event_intr4 0x1 I

spi0_cs3 0x2 IO

pr0_pru1_gpo1 0x3 O

spi2_cs0 0x4 IO

pr0_pru1_gpi1 0x5 I

ehrpwm0A 0x6 O

gpio4_9 0x7 IO

AE21 cam1_pclk cam1_pclk 0x0 I PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV2 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

xdma_event_intr6 0x1 I

spi1_cs3 0x2 IO

pr0_pru1_gpo3 0x3 O

spi2_sclk 0x4 IO

pr0_pru1_gpi3 0x5 I

ehrpwm1A 0x6 O

gpio4_11 0x7 IO

AC23 cam1_vd cam1_vd 0x0 IO PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV2 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

xdma_event_intr5 0x1 I

spi1_cs2 0x2 IO

pr0_pru1_gpo2 0x3 O

spi2_cs2 0x4 IO

pr0_pru1_gpi2 0x5 I

ehrpwm0B 0x6 O

gpio4_10 0x7 IO

AB25 cam1_wen cam1_wen 0x0 I PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV2 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

xdma_event_intr8 0x1 I

pr1_edio_sof 0x2 O

cam0_data11 0x3 I

spi2_d1 0x4 IO

cam1_data11 0x5 I

EMU11 0x6 IO

gpio4_13 0x7 IO

ehrpwm3B 0x8 O

F19 CAP_VBB_MPU CAP_VBB_MPU NA A NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

D6 CAP_VDDS1P8V_IOLDO CAP_VDDS1P8V_IOLDO NA POWER NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

AD3 CAP_VDD_RTC CAP_VDD_RTC NA A NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

E13 CAP_VDD_SRAM_CORE CAP_VDD_SRAM_CORE NA A NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

E14 CAP_VDD_SRAM_MPU CAP_VDD_SRAM_MPU NA A NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Table 4-10. Pin Attributes (ZDN Package) (continued)

BALL

NUMBER [1] PIN NAME [2] SIGNAL NAME [3] MODE [4] TYPE [5] BALL

RESET

STATE [6]

BALL

RESET

REL.

STATE [7]

BALL RESET

REL. MODE

[8] POWER [9] HYS [10] BUFFER

STRENGTH

(mA) [11]

PULL

UP/DOWN

TYPE [12] IO CELL [13]

H20 clkreq clkreq 0x0 O OFF PU Mode0 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gpio0_24 0x7 IO

N1 ddr_a0 ddr_a0 0x0 O PU Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

L1 ddr_a1 ddr_a1 0x0 O PU Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

L2 ddr_a2 ddr_a2 0x0 O PU Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

P2 ddr_a3 ddr_a3 0x0 O PU Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

P1 ddr_a4 ddr_a4 0x0 O PU Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

R5 ddr_a5 ddr_a5 0x0 O PU Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

R4 ddr_a6 ddr_a6 0x0 O PU Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

R3 ddr_a7 ddr_a7 0x0 O PU Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

R2 ddr_a8 ddr_a8 0x0 O PU Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

R1 ddr_a9 ddr_a9 0x0 O PU Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

M6 ddr_a10 ddr_a10 0x0 O PU Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

T5 ddr_a11 ddr_a11 0x0 O PU Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

T4 ddr_a12 ddr_a12 0x0 O PU Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

N5 ddr_a13 ddr_a13 0x0 O PU Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

T3 ddr_a14 ddr_a14 0x0 O PU Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

T2 ddr_a15 ddr_a15 0x0 O PU Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

K1 ddr_ba0 ddr_ba0 0x0 O PU Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

K2 ddr_ba1 ddr_ba1 0x0 O PU Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

K3 ddr_ba2 ddr_ba2 0x0 O PU Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

N3 ddr_casn ddr_casn 0x0 O PU Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

M2 ddr_ck ddr_ck 0x0 O PD Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

M3 ddr_cke0 ddr_cke0 0x0 O PD Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Table 4-10. Pin Attributes (ZDN Package) (continued)

BALL

NUMBER [1] PIN NAME [2] SIGNAL NAME [3] MODE [4] TYPE [5] BALL

RESET

STATE [6]

BALL

RESET

REL.

STATE [7]

BALL RESET

REL. MODE

[8] POWER [9] HYS [10] BUFFER

STRENGTH

(mA) [11]

PULL

UP/DOWN

TYPE [12] IO CELL [13]

N6 ddr_cke1 ddr_cke1 0x0 O PD Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

M5 ddr_csn0 ddr_csn0 0x0 O PU Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

M4 ddr_csn1 ddr_csn1 0x0 O PU Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

E3 ddr_d0 ddr_d0 0x0 IO PD Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

E2 ddr_d1 ddr_d1 0x0 IO PD Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

E1 ddr_d2 ddr_d2 0x0 IO PD Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

F3 ddr_d3 ddr_d3 0x0 IO PD Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

G4 ddr_d4 ddr_d4 0x0 IO PD Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

G3 ddr_d5 ddr_d5 0x0 IO PD Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

G2 ddr_d6 ddr_d6 0x0 IO PD Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

G1 ddr_d7 ddr_d7 0x0 IO PD Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

H1 ddr_d8 ddr_d8 0x0 IO PD Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

J6 ddr_d9 ddr_d9 0x0 IO PD Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

J5 ddr_d10 ddr_d10 0x0 IO PD Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

J4 ddr_d11 ddr_d11 0x0 IO PD Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

J3 ddr_d12 ddr_d12 0x0 IO PD Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

K6 ddr_d13 ddr_d13 0x0 IO PD Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

K5 ddr_d14 ddr_d14 0x0 IO PD Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

K4 ddr_d15 ddr_d15 0x0 IO PD Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

V5 ddr_d16 ddr_d16 0x0 IO PD Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

V4 ddr_d17 ddr_d17 0x0 IO PD Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

V3 ddr_d18 ddr_d18 0x0 IO PD Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

V2 ddr_d19 ddr_d19 0x0 IO PD Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Table 4-10. Pin Attributes (ZDN Package) (continued)

BALL

NUMBER [1] PIN NAME [2] SIGNAL NAME [3] MODE [4] TYPE [5] BALL

RESET

STATE [6]

BALL

RESET

REL.

STATE [7]

BALL RESET

REL. MODE

[8] POWER [9] HYS [10] BUFFER

STRENGTH

(mA) [11]

PULL

UP/DOWN

TYPE [12] IO CELL [13]

V1 ddr_d20 ddr_d20 0x0 IO PD Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

W4 ddr_d21 ddr_d21 0x0 IO PD Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

W5 ddr_d22 ddr_d22 0x0 IO PD Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

W6 ddr_d23 ddr_d23 0x0 IO PD Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

Y2 ddr_d24 ddr_d24 0x0 IO PD Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

Y3 ddr_d25 ddr_d25 0x0 IO PD Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

Y4 ddr_d26 ddr_d26 0x0 IO PD Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

AA3 ddr_d27 ddr_d27 0x0 IO PD Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

AB2 ddr_d28 ddr_d28 0x0 IO PD Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

AB1 ddr_d29 ddr_d29 0x0 IO PD Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

AC1 ddr_d30 ddr_d30 0x0 IO PD Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

AC2 ddr_d31 ddr_d31 0x0 IO PD Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

F4 ddr_dqm0 ddr_dqm0 0x0 O PU Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

H2 ddr_dqm1 ddr_dqm1 0x0 O PU Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

V6 ddr_dqm2 ddr_dqm2 0x0 O PU Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

Y1 ddr_dqm3 ddr_dqm3 0x0 O PU Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

F2 ddr_dqs0 ddr_dqs0 0x0 IO PD Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

J2 ddr_dqs1 ddr_dqs1 0x0 IO PD Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

W1 ddr_dqs2 ddr_dqs2 0x0 IO PD Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

AA1 ddr_dqs3 ddr_dqs3 0x0 IO PD Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

F1 ddr_dqsn0 ddr_dqsn0 0x0 IO PU Mode0 VDDS_DDR Yes 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

J1 ddr_dqsn1 ddr_dqsn1 0x0 IO PU Mode0 VDDS_DDR Yes 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

W2 ddr_dqsn2 ddr_dqsn2 0x0 IO PU Mode0 VDDS_DDR Yes 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Table 4-10. Pin Attributes (ZDN Package) (continued)

BALL

NUMBER [1] PIN NAME [2] SIGNAL NAME [3] MODE [4] TYPE [5] BALL

RESET

STATE [6]

BALL

RESET

REL.

STATE [7]

BALL RESET

REL. MODE

[8] POWER [9] HYS [10] BUFFER

STRENGTH

(mA) [11]

PULL

UP/DOWN

TYPE [12] IO CELL [13]

AA2 ddr_dqsn3 ddr_dqsn3 0x0 IO PU Mode0 VDDS_DDR Yes 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

M1 ddr_nck ddr_nck 0x0 O PU Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

U1 ddr_odt0 ddr_odt0 0x0 O PD Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

U2 ddr_odt1 ddr_odt1 0x0 O PD Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

N2 ddr_rasn ddr_rasn 0x0 O PU Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

T1 ddr_resetn ddr_resetn 0x0 O PD Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS

T6 ddr_vref ddr_vref 0x0 AP (19) NA NA Mode0 VDDS_DDR NA NA NA Analog

AC3 ddr_vtp ddr_vtp 0x0 I (20) NA NA Mode0 VDDS_DDR NA NA NA Analog

N4 ddr_wen ddr_wen 0x0 O PU Mode0 VDDS_DDR YES 8 PU/PD LVCMOS/HST

L/HSUL_12

A24 dss_ac_bias_en dss_ac_bias_en 0x0 O OFF OFF Mode7 VDDSHV6 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gpmc_a11 0x1 O

gpmc_a4 0x2 O

pr1_edio_data_in5 0x3 I

pr1_edio_data_out5 0x4 O

pr0_pru1_gpo9 0x5 O

pr0_pru1_gpi9 0x6 I

gpio2_25 0x7 IO

B22 dss_data0 (4) dss_data0 0x0 IO OFF OFF Mode7 VDDSHV6 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gpmc_a0 0x1 O

pr1_mii_mt0_clk 0x2 I

ehrpwm2A 0x3 O

pr1_pru0_gpo0 0x5 O

pr1_pru0_gpi0 0x6 I

gpio2_6 0x7 IO

A21 dss_data1 (4) dss_data1 0x0 IO OFF OFF Mode7 VDDSHV6 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gpmc_a1 0x1 O

pr1_mii0_txen 0x2 O

ehrpwm2B 0x3 O

pr1_pru0_gpo1 0x5 O

pr1_pru0_gpi1 0x6 I

gpio2_7 0x7 IO

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Table 4-10. Pin Attributes (ZDN Package) (continued)

BALL

NUMBER [1] PIN NAME [2] SIGNAL NAME [3] MODE [4] TYPE [5] BALL

RESET

STATE [6]

BALL

RESET

REL.

STATE [7]

BALL RESET

REL. MODE

[8] POWER [9] HYS [10] BUFFER

STRENGTH

(mA) [11]

PULL

UP/DOWN

TYPE [12] IO CELL [13]

B21 dss_data2 (4) dss_data2 0x0 IO OFF OFF Mode7 VDDSHV6 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gpmc_a2 0x1 O

pr1_mii0_txd3 0x2 O

ehrpwm2_tripzone_input 0x3 I

pr1_pru0_gpo2 0x5 O

pr1_pru0_gpi2 0x6 I

gpio2_8 0x7 IO

C21 dss_data3 (4) dss_data3 0x0 IO OFF OFF Mode7 VDDSHV6 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gpmc_a3 0x1 O

pr1_mii0_txd2 0x2 O

ehrpwm0_synco 0x3 O

pr1_pru0_gpo3 0x5 O

pr1_pru0_gpi3 0x6 I

gpio2_9 0x7 IO

A20 dss_data4 (4) dss_data4 0x0 IO OFF OFF Mode7 VDDSHV6 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gpmc_a4 0x1 O

pr1_mii0_txd1 0x2 O

eQEP2A_in 0x3 I

pr1_pru0_gpo4 0x5 O

pr1_pru0_gpi4 0x6 I

gpio2_10 0x7 IO

B20 dss_data5 (4) dss_data5 0x0 IO OFF OFF Mode7 VDDSHV6 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gpmc_a5 0x1 O

pr1_mii0_txd0 0x2 O

eQEP2B_in 0x3 I

pr1_pru0_gpo5 0x5 O

pr1_pru0_gpi5 0x6 I

gpio2_11 0x7 IO

C20 dss_data6 (4) dss_data6 0x0 IO OFF OFF Mode7 VDDSHV6 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gpmc_a6 0x1 O

pr1_edio_data_in6 0x2 I

eQEP2_index 0x3 IO

pr1_edio_data_out6 0x4 O

pr1_pru0_gpo6 0x5 O

pr1_pru0_gpi6 0x6 I

gpio2_12 0x7 IO

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Table 4-10. Pin Attributes (ZDN Package) (continued)

BALL

NUMBER [1] PIN NAME [2] SIGNAL NAME [3] MODE [4] TYPE [5] BALL

RESET

STATE [6]

BALL

RESET

REL.

STATE [7]

BALL RESET

REL. MODE

[8] POWER [9] HYS [10] BUFFER

STRENGTH

(mA) [11]

PULL

UP/DOWN

TYPE [12] IO CELL [13]

E19 dss_data7 (4) dss_data7 0x0 IO OFF OFF Mode7 VDDSHV6 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gpmc_a7 0x1 O

pr1_edio_data_in7 0x2 I

eQEP2_strobe 0x3 IO

pr1_edio_data_out7 0x4 O

pr1_pru0_gpo7 0x5 O

pr1_pru0_gpi7 0x6 I

gpio2_13 0x7 IO

A19 dss_data8 (4) dss_data8 0x0 IO OFF OFF Mode7 VDDSHV6 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gpmc_a12 0x1 O

ehrpwm1_tripzone_input 0x2 I

mcasp0_aclkx 0x3 IO

uart5_txd 0x4 O

pr1_mii0_rxd3 0x5 I

uart2_ctsn 0x6 IO

gpio2_14 0x7 IO

B19 dss_data9 (4) dss_data9 0x0 IO OFF OFF Mode7 VDDSHV6 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gpmc_a13 0x1 O

ehrpwm0_synco 0x2 O

mcasp0_fsx 0x3 IO

uart5_rxd 0x4 I

pr1_mii0_rxd2 0x5 I

uart2_rtsn 0x6 O

gpio2_15 0x7 IO

A18 dss_data10 (4) dss_data10 0x0 IO OFF OFF Mode7 VDDSHV6 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gpmc_a14 0x1 O

ehrpwm1A 0x2 O

mcasp0_axr0 0x3 IO

pr1_mii0_rxd1 0x5 I

uart3_ctsn 0x6 IO

gpio2_16 0x7 IO

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Table 4-10. Pin Attributes (ZDN Package) (continued)

BALL

NUMBER [1] PIN NAME [2] SIGNAL NAME [3] MODE [4] TYPE [5] BALL

RESET

STATE [6]

BALL

RESET

REL.

STATE [7]

BALL RESET

REL. MODE

[8] POWER [9] HYS [10] BUFFER

STRENGTH

(mA) [11]

PULL

UP/DOWN

TYPE [12] IO CELL [13]

B18 dss_data11 (4) dss_data11 0x0 IO OFF OFF Mode7 VDDSHV6 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gpmc_a15 0x1 O

ehrpwm1B 0x2 O

mcasp0_ahclkr 0x3 IO

mcasp0_axr2 0x4 IO

pr1_mii0_rxd0 0x5 I

uart3_rtsn 0x6 O

gpio2_17 0x7 IO

spi3_cs1 0x8 IO

C19 dss_data12 (4) dss_data12 0x0 IO OFF OFF Mode7 VDDSHV6 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gpmc_a16 0x1 O

eQEP1A_in 0x2 I

mcasp0_aclkr 0x3 IO

mcasp0_axr2 0x4 IO

pr1_mii0_rxlink 0x5 I

uart4_ctsn 0x6 I

gpio0_8 0x7 IO

spi3_sclk 0x8 IO

D19 dss_data13 (4) dss_data13 0x0 IO OFF OFF Mode7 VDDSHV6 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gpmc_a17 0x1 O

eQEP1B_in 0x2 I

mcasp0_fsr 0x3 IO

mcasp0_axr3 0x4 IO

pr1_mii0_rxer 0x5 I

uart4_rtsn 0x6 O

gpio0_9 0x7 IO

spi3_d0 0x8 IO

C17 dss_data14 (4) dss_data14 0x0 IO OFF OFF Mode7 VDDSHV6 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gpmc_a18 0x1 O

eQEP1_index 0x2 IO

mcasp0_axr1 0x3 IO

uart5_rxd 0x4 I

pr1_mii_mr0_clk 0x5 I

uart5_ctsn 0x6 I

gpio0_10 0x7 IO

spi3_d1 0x8 IO

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Table 4-10. Pin Attributes (ZDN Package) (continued)

BALL

NUMBER [1] PIN NAME [2] SIGNAL NAME [3] MODE [4] TYPE [5] BALL

RESET

STATE [6]

BALL

RESET

REL.

STATE [7]

BALL RESET

REL. MODE

[8] POWER [9] HYS [10] BUFFER

STRENGTH

(mA) [11]

PULL

UP/DOWN

TYPE [12] IO CELL [13]

D17 dss_data15 (4) dss_data15 0x0 IO OFF OFF Mode7 VDDSHV6 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gpmc_a19 0x1 O

eQEP1_strobe 0x2 IO

mcasp0_ahclkx 0x3 IO

mcasp0_axr3 0x4 IO

pr1_mii0_rxdv 0x5 I

uart5_rtsn 0x6 O

gpio0_11 0x7 IO

spi3_cs0 0x8 IO

A23 dss_hsync (5) dss_hsync 0x0 O OFF OFF Mode7 VDDSHV6 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gpmc_a9 0x1 O

gpmc_a2 0x2 O

pr1_edio_data_in3 0x3 I

pr1_edio_data_out3 0x4 O

pr0_pru1_gpo7 0x5 O

pr0_pru1_gpi7 0x6 I

gpio2_23 0x7 IO

A22 dss_pclk dss_pclk 0x0 O OFF PD Mode7 VDDSHV6 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gpmc_a10 0x1 O

gpmc_a3 0x2 O

pr1_edio_data_in4 0x3 I

pr1_edio_data_out4 0x4 O

pr0_pru1_gpo8 0x5 O

pr0_pru1_gpi8 0x6 I

gpio2_24 0x7 IO

B23 dss_vsync (6) dss_vsync 0x0 O OFF OFF Mode7 VDDSHV6 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gpmc_a8 0x1 O

gpmc_a1 0x2 O

pr1_edio_data_in2 0x3 I

pr1_edio_data_out2 0x4 O

pr0_pru1_gpo6 0x5 O

pr0_pru1_gpi6 0x6 I

gpio2_22 0x7 IO

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Table 4-10. Pin Attributes (ZDN Package) (continued)

BALL

NUMBER [1] PIN NAME [2] SIGNAL NAME [3] MODE [4] TYPE [5] BALL

RESET

STATE [6]

BALL

RESET

REL.

STATE [7]

BALL RESET

REL. MODE

[8] POWER [9] HYS [10] BUFFER

STRENGTH

(mA) [11]

PULL

UP/DOWN

TYPE [12] IO CELL [13]

G24 eCAP0_in_PWM0_out eCAP0_in_PWM0_out 0x0 IO OFF PD Mode7 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

uart3_txd 0x1 IO

spi1_cs1 0x2 IO

pr1_ecap0_ecap_capin_apwm_o 0x3 IO

spi1_sclk 0x4 IO

mmc0_sdwp 0x5 I

xdma_event_intr2 0x6 I

gpio0_7 0x7 IO

ehrpwm2B 0x8 O

timer1 0x9 IO

N23 EMU0 EMU0 0x0 IO PU PU Mode0 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gpio3_7 0x7 IO

T24 EMU1 EMU1 0x0 IO PU PU Mode0 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gpio3_8 0x7 IO

G25 EXTINTn nNMI 0x0 I OFF PU Mode0 VDDSHV3 Yes NA PU/PD LVCMOS

D25 gpio5_8 pr1_mii0_col 0x5 I OFF PD Mode7 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gpio5_8 0x7 IO

F24 gpio5_9 pr1_mii1_col 0x5 I OFF PD Mode7 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gpio5_9 0x7 IO

G20 gpio5_10 I2C1_SCL 0x1 IOD OFF PD Mode7 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

pr1_mii0_crs 0x5 I

gpio5_10 0x7 IO

F23 gpio5_11 pr1_mii1_crs 0x5 I OFF PD Mode7 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gpio5_11 0x7 IO

E25 gpio5_12 I2C1_SDA 0x1 IOD OFF PD Mode7 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

pr1_mii0_rxlink 0x5 I

gpio5_12 0x7 IO

E24 gpio5_13 pr1_mii1_rxlink 0x5 I OFF PD Mode7 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gpio5_13 0x7 IO

C3 gpmc_a0 gpmc_a0 0x0 O PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV11 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gmii2_txen 0x1 O

rgmii2_tctl 0x2 O

rmii2_txen 0x3 O

gpmc_a16 0x4 O

pr1_mii1_txen 0x5 O

ehrpwm1_tripzone_input 0x6 I

gpio1_16 0x7 IO

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Table 4-10. Pin Attributes (ZDN Package) (continued)

BALL

NUMBER [1] PIN NAME [2] SIGNAL NAME [3] MODE [4] TYPE [5] BALL

RESET

STATE [6]

BALL

RESET

REL.

STATE [7]

BALL RESET

REL. MODE

[8] POWER [9] HYS [10] BUFFER

STRENGTH

(mA) [11]

PULL

UP/DOWN

TYPE [12] IO CELL [13]

C5 gpmc_a1 gpmc_a1 0x0 O PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV11 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gmii2_rxdv 0x1 I

rgmii2_rctl 0x2 I

mmc2_dat0 0x3 IO

gpmc_a17 0x4 O

pr1_mii1_rxdv 0x5 I

ehrpwm0_synco 0x6 O

gpio1_17 0x7 IO

C6 gpmc_a2 gpmc_a2 0x0 O PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV11 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gmii2_txd3 0x1 O

rgmii2_td3 0x2 O

mmc2_dat1 0x3 IO

gpmc_a18 0x4 O

pr1_mii1_txd3 0x5 O

ehrpwm1A 0x6 O

gpio1_18 0x7 IO

A4 gpmc_a3 gpmc_a3 0x0 O PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV11 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gmii2_txd2 0x1 O

rgmii2_td2 0x2 O

mmc2_dat2 0x3 IO

gpmc_a19 0x4 O

pr1_mii1_txd2 0x5 O

ehrpwm1B 0x6 O

gpio1_19 0x7 IO

D7 gpmc_a4 gpmc_a4 0x0 O PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV11 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gmii2_txd1 0x1 O

rgmii2_td1 0x2 O

rmii2_txd1 0x3 O

gpmc_a20 0x4 O

pr1_mii1_txd1 0x5 O

eQEP1A_in 0x6 I

gpio1_20 0x7 IO

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Table 4-10. Pin Attributes (ZDN Package) (continued)

BALL

NUMBER [1] PIN NAME [2] SIGNAL NAME [3] MODE [4] TYPE [5] BALL

RESET

STATE [6]

BALL

RESET

REL.

STATE [7]

BALL RESET

REL. MODE

[8] POWER [9] HYS [10] BUFFER

STRENGTH

(mA) [11]

PULL

UP/DOWN

TYPE [12] IO CELL [13]

E7 gpmc_a5 gpmc_a5 0x0 O PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV11 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gmii2_txd0 0x1 O

rgmii2_td0 0x2 O

rmii2_txd0 0x3 O

gpmc_a21 0x4 O

pr1_mii1_txd0 0x5 O

eQEP1B_in 0x6 I

gpio1_21 0x7 IO

E8 gpmc_a6 gpmc_a6 0x0 O PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV11 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gmii2_txclk 0x1 I

rgmii2_tclk 0x2 O

mmc2_dat4 0x3 IO

gpmc_a22 0x4 O

pr1_mii_mt1_clk 0x5 I

eQEP1_index 0x6 IO

gpio1_22 0x7 IO

F6 gpmc_a7 gpmc_a7 0x0 O PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV11 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gmii2_rxclk 0x1 I

rgmii2_rclk 0x2 I

mmc2_dat5 0x3 IO

gpmc_a23 0x4 O

pr1_mii_mr1_clk 0x5 I

eQEP1_strobe 0x6 IO

gpio1_23 0x7 IO

F7 gpmc_a8 gpmc_a8 0x0 O PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV11 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gmii2_rxd3 0x1 I

rgmii2_rd3 0x2 I

mmc2_dat6 0x3 IO

gpmc_a24 0x4 O

pr1_mii1_rxd3 0x5 I

mcasp0_aclkx 0x6 IO

gpio1_24 0x7 IO

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Table 4-10. Pin Attributes (ZDN Package) (continued)

BALL

NUMBER [1] PIN NAME [2] SIGNAL NAME [3] MODE [4] TYPE [5] BALL

RESET

STATE [6]

BALL

RESET

REL.

STATE [7]

BALL RESET

REL. MODE

[8] POWER [9] HYS [10] BUFFER

STRENGTH

(mA) [11]

PULL

UP/DOWN

TYPE [12] IO CELL [13]

B4 gpmc_a9 gpmc_a9 0x0 O PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV11 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gmii2_rxd2 0x1 I

rgmii2_rd2 0x2 I

mmc2_dat7 0x3 IO

gpmc_a25 0x4 O

pr1_mii1_rxd2 0x5 I

mcasp0_fsx 0x6 IO

gpio1_25 0x7 IO

rmii2_crs_dv 0x8 I

G8 gpmc_a10 gpmc_a10 0x0 O PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV11 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gmii2_rxd1 0x1 I

rgmii2_rd1 0x2 I

rmii2_rxd1 0x3 I

gpmc_a26 0x4 O

pr1_mii1_rxd1 0x5 I

mcasp0_axr0 0x6 IO

gpio1_26 0x7 IO

D8 gpmc_a11 gpmc_a11 0x0 O PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV11 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gmii2_rxd0 0x1 I

rgmii2_rd0 0x2 I

rmii2_rxd0 0x3 I

gpmc_a27 0x4 O

pr1_mii1_rxd0 0x5 I

mcasp0_axr1 0x6 IO

gpio1_27 0x7 IO

B5 gpmc_ad0 gpmc_ad0 0x0 IO PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV10 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

mmc1_dat0 0x1 IO

gpio1_0 0x7 IO

A5 gpmc_ad1 gpmc_ad1 0x0 IO PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV10 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

mmc1_dat1 0x1 IO

gpio1_1 0x7 IO

B6 gpmc_ad2 gpmc_ad2 0x0 IO PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV10 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

mmc1_dat2 0x1 IO

gpio1_2 0x7 IO

A6 gpmc_ad3 gpmc_ad3 0x0 IO PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV10 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

mmc1_dat3 0x1 IO

gpio1_3 0x7 IO

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Table 4-10. Pin Attributes (ZDN Package) (continued)

BALL

NUMBER [1] PIN NAME [2] SIGNAL NAME [3] MODE [4] TYPE [5] BALL

RESET

STATE [6]

BALL

RESET

REL.

STATE [7]

BALL RESET

REL. MODE

[8] POWER [9] HYS [10] BUFFER

STRENGTH

(mA) [11]

PULL

UP/DOWN

TYPE [12] IO CELL [13]

B7 gpmc_ad4 gpmc_ad4 0x0 IO PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV10 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

mmc1_dat4 0x1 IO

gpio1_4 0x7 IO

A7 gpmc_ad5 gpmc_ad5 0x0 IO PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV10 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

mmc1_dat5 0x1 IO

gpio1_5 0x7 IO

C8 gpmc_ad6 gpmc_ad6 0x0 IO PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV10 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

mmc1_dat6 0x1 IO

gpio1_6 0x7 IO

B8 gpmc_ad7 gpmc_ad7 0x0 IO PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV10 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

mmc1_dat7 0x1 IO

gpio1_7 0x7 IO

B10 gpmc_ad8 gpmc_ad8 0x0 IO PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV9 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

dss_data23 0x1 O

mmc1_dat0 0x2 IO

mmc2_dat4 0x3 IO

ehrpwm2A 0x4 O

pr1_mii_mt0_clk 0x5 I

spi3_sclk 0x6 IO

gpio0_22 0x7 IO

spi3_cs1 0x8 IO

gpio5_26 0x9 IO

A10 gpmc_ad9 gpmc_ad9 0x0 IO PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV9 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

dss_data22 0x1 O

mmc1_dat1 0x2 IO

mmc2_dat5 0x3 IO

ehrpwm2B 0x4 O

pr1_mii0_col 0x5 I

spi3_d0 0x6 IO

gpio0_23 0x7 IO

gpio5_25 0x9 IO

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Table 4-10. Pin Attributes (ZDN Package) (continued)

BALL

NUMBER [1] PIN NAME [2] SIGNAL NAME [3] MODE [4] TYPE [5] BALL

RESET

STATE [6]

BALL

RESET

REL.

STATE [7]

BALL RESET

REL. MODE

[8] POWER [9] HYS [10] BUFFER

STRENGTH

(mA) [11]

PULL

UP/DOWN

TYPE [12] IO CELL [13]

F11 gpmc_ad10 gpmc_ad10 0x0 IO PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV9 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

dss_data21 0x1 O

mmc1_dat2 0x2 IO

mmc2_dat6 0x3 IO

ehrpwm2_tripzone_input 0x4 I

pr1_mii0_txen 0x5 O

spi3_d1 0x6 IO

gpio0_26 0x7 IO

gpio5_24 0x9 IO

D11 gpmc_ad11 gpmc_ad11 0x0 IO PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV9 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

dss_data20 0x1 O

mmc1_dat3 0x2 IO

mmc2_dat7 0x3 IO

ehrpwm0_synco 0x4 O

pr1_mii0_txd3 0x5 O

spi3_cs0 0x6 IO

gpio0_27 0x7 IO

gpio5_23 0x9 IO

E11 gpmc_ad12 gpmc_ad12 0x0 IO PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV9 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

dss_data19 0x1 O

mmc1_dat4 0x2 IO

mmc2_dat0 0x3 IO

eQEP2A_in 0x4 I

pr1_mii0_txd2 0x5 O

pr1_pru0_gpi10 0x6 I

gpio1_12 0x7 IO

mcasp0_aclkx 0x8 IO

pr1_pru0_gpo10 0x9 O

C11 gpmc_ad13 gpmc_ad13 0x0 IO PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV9 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

dss_data18 0x1 O

mmc1_dat5 0x2 IO

mmc2_dat1 0x3 IO

eQEP2B_in 0x4 I

pr1_mii0_txd1 0x5 O

pr1_pru0_gpi11 0x6 I

gpio1_13 0x7 IO

mcasp0_fsx 0x8 IO

pr1_pru0_gpo11 0x9 O

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Table 4-10. Pin Attributes (ZDN Package) (continued)

BALL

NUMBER [1] PIN NAME [2] SIGNAL NAME [3] MODE [4] TYPE [5] BALL

RESET

STATE [6]

BALL

RESET

REL.

STATE [7]

BALL RESET

REL. MODE

[8] POWER [9] HYS [10] BUFFER

STRENGTH

(mA) [11]

PULL

UP/DOWN

TYPE [12] IO CELL [13]

B11 gpmc_ad14 gpmc_ad14 0x0 IO PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV9 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

dss_data17 0x1 O

mmc1_dat6 0x2 IO

mmc2_dat2 0x3 IO

eQEP2_index 0x4 IO

pr1_mii0_txd0 0x5 O

pr1_pru0_gpi16 0x6 I

gpio1_14 0x7 IO

mcasp0_axr0 0x8 IO

A11 gpmc_ad15 gpmc_ad15 0x0 IO PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV9 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

dss_data16 0x1 O

mmc1_dat7 0x2 IO

mmc2_dat3 0x3 IO

eQEP2_strobe 0x4 IO

pr1_ecap0_ecap_capin_apwm_o 0x5 IO

gpio1_15 0x7 IO

mcasp0_axr1 0x8 IO

spi3_cs1 0x9 IO

A9 gpmc_advn_ale gpmc_advn_ale 0x0 O PU PU Mode7 VDDSHV10 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

spi0_cs3 0x1 IO

timer4 0x2 IO

qspi_d0 0x3 IO

gpio2_2 0x7 IO

C10 gpmc_be0n_cle gpmc_be0n_cle 0x0 O PU PU Mode7 VDDSHV10 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

spi1_cs3 0x1 IO

timer5 0x2 IO

qspi_d3 0x3 I

pr1_mii1_rxlink 0x4 I

gpmc_a5 0x5 O

spi3_cs1 0x6 IO

gpio2_5 0x7 IO

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Table 4-10. Pin Attributes (ZDN Package) (continued)

BALL

NUMBER [1] PIN NAME [2] SIGNAL NAME [3] MODE [4] TYPE [5] BALL

RESET

STATE [6]

BALL

RESET

REL.

STATE [7]

BALL RESET

REL. MODE

[8] POWER [9] HYS [10] BUFFER

STRENGTH

(mA) [11]

PULL

UP/DOWN

TYPE [12] IO CELL [13]

A3 gpmc_be1n gpmc_be1n 0x0 O PU PU Mode7 VDDSHV11 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gmii2_col 0x1 I

gpmc_csn6 0x2 O

mmc2_dat3 0x3 IO

gpmc_dir 0x4 O

pr1_mii1_col 0x5 I

mcasp0_aclkr 0x6 IO

gpio1_28 0x7 IO

A12 gpmc_clk gpmc_clk 0x0 IO PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV9 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gpmc_wait1 0x2 I

mmc2_clk 0x3 IO

pr1_mii1_crs 0x4 I

pr1_mdio_mdclk 0x5 O

mcasp0_fsr 0x6 IO

gpio2_1 0x7 IO

gpio0_4 0x9 IO

A8 gpmc_csn0 gpmc_csn0 0x0 O PU PU Mode7 VDDSHV10 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

qspi_csn 0x3 O

gpio1_29 0x7 IO

B9 gpmc_csn1 gpmc_csn1 0x0 O PU PU Mode7 VDDSHV10 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gpmc_clk 0x1 IO

mmc1_clk 0x2 IO

pr1_edio_data_in6 0x3 I

pr1_edio_data_out6 0x4 O

pr1_pru0_gpo8 0x5 O

pr1_pru0_gpi8 0x6 I

gpio1_30 0x7 IO

F10 gpmc_csn2 gpmc_csn2 0x0 O PU PU Mode7 VDDSHV10 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gpmc_be1n 0x1 O

mmc1_cmd 0x2 IO

pr1_edio_data_in7 0x3 I

pr1_edio_data_out7 0x4 O

pr1_pru0_gpo9 0x5 O

pr1_pru0_gpi9 0x6 I

gpio1_31 0x7 IO

gmii2_crs 0x8 I

rmii2_crs_dv 0x9 I

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Table 4-10. Pin Attributes (ZDN Package) (continued)

BALL

NUMBER [1] PIN NAME [2] SIGNAL NAME [3] MODE [4] TYPE [5] BALL

RESET

STATE [6]

BALL

RESET

REL.

STATE [7]

BALL RESET

REL. MODE

[8] POWER [9] HYS [10] BUFFER

STRENGTH

(mA) [11]

PULL

UP/DOWN

TYPE [12] IO CELL [13]

B12 gpmc_csn3 gpmc_csn3 0x0 O PU PU Mode7 VDDSHV9 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gpmc_wait0 0x1 I

qspi_clk 0x2 IO

mmc2_cmd 0x3 IO

pr1_mii0_crs 0x4 I

pr1_mdio_data 0x5 IO

EMU4 0x6 IO

gpio2_0 0x7 IO

gmii2_crs 0x8 I

rmii2_crs_dv 0x9 I

E10 gpmc_oen_ren gpmc_oen_ren 0x0 O PU PU Mode7 VDDSHV10 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

spi0_cs2 0x1 IO

timer7 0x2 IO

qspi_d1 0x3 I

gpio2_3 0x7 IO

A2 gpmc_wait0 gpmc_wait0 0x0 I PU PU Mode7 VDDSHV11 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gmii2_crs 0x1 I

gpmc_csn4 0x2 O

rmii2_crs_dv 0x3 I

mmc1_sdcd 0x4 I

pr1_mii1_crs 0x5 I

uart4_rxd 0x6 I

gpio0_30 0x7 IO

gpio5_30 0x9 IO

D10 gpmc_wen gpmc_wen 0x0 O PU PU Mode7 VDDSHV10 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

spi1_cs2 0x1 IO

timer6 0x2 IO

qspi_d2 0x3 I

gpio2_4 0x7 IO

B3 gpmc_wpn gpmc_wpn 0x0 O PU PU Mode7 VDDSHV11 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gmii2_rxer 0x1 I

gpmc_csn5 0x2 O

rmii2_rxer 0x3 I

mmc2_sdcd 0x4 I

pr1_mii1_rxer 0x5 I

uart4_txd 0x6 O

gpio0_31 0x7 IO

gpio5_31 0x9 IO

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Table 4-10. Pin Attributes (ZDN Package) (continued)

BALL

NUMBER [1] PIN NAME [2] SIGNAL NAME [3] MODE [4] TYPE [5] BALL

RESET

STATE [6]

BALL

RESET

REL.

STATE [7]

BALL RESET

REL. MODE

[8] POWER [9] HYS [10] BUFFER

STRENGTH

(mA) [11]

PULL

UP/DOWN

TYPE [12] IO CELL [13]

Y22 I2C0_SCL I2C0_SCL 0x0 IOD OFF PU Mode7 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

timer7 0x1 IO

uart2_rtsn 0x2 O

eCAP1_in_PWM1_out 0x3 IO

gpio3_6 0x7 IO

AB24 I2C0_SDA I2C0_SDA 0x0 IOD OFF PU Mode7 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

timer4 0x1 IO

uart2_ctsn 0x2 IO

eCAP2_in_PWM2_out 0x3 IO

gpio3_5 0x7 IO

L23 mcasp0_aclkr mcasp0_aclkr 0x0 IO OFF PD Mode7 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

eQEP0A_in 0x1 I

mcasp0_axr2 0x2 IO

mcasp1_aclkx 0x3 IO

mmc0_sdwp 0x4 I

pr0_pru0_gpo4 0x5 O

pr0_pru0_gpi4 0x6 I

gpio3_18 0x7 IO

gpio0_18 0x9 IO

N24 mcasp0_aclkx mcasp0_aclkx 0x0 IO OFF PD Mode7 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

ehrpwm0A 0x1 O

spi0_cs3 0x2 IO

spi1_sclk 0x3 IO

mmc0_sdcd 0x4 I

pr0_pru0_gpo0 0x5 O

pr0_pru0_gpi0 0x6 I

gpio3_14 0x7 IO

M24 mcasp0_ahclkr mcasp0_ahclkr 0x0 IO OFF PD Mode7 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

ehrpwm0_synci 0x1 I

mcasp0_axr2 0x2 IO

spi1_cs0 0x3 IO

eCAP2_in_PWM2_out 0x4 IO

pr0_pru0_gpo3 0x5 O

pr0_pru0_gpi3 0x6 I

gpio3_17 0x7 IO

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Table 4-10. Pin Attributes (ZDN Package) (continued)

BALL

NUMBER [1] PIN NAME [2] SIGNAL NAME [3] MODE [4] TYPE [5] BALL

RESET

STATE [6]

BALL

RESET

REL.

STATE [7]

BALL RESET

REL. MODE

[8] POWER [9] HYS [10] BUFFER

STRENGTH

(mA) [11]

PULL

UP/DOWN

TYPE [12] IO CELL [13]

L24 mcasp0_ahclkx mcasp0_ahclkx 0x0 IO OFF PD Mode7 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

eQEP0_strobe 0x1 IO

mcasp0_axr3 0x2 IO

mcasp1_axr1 0x3 IO

EMU4 0x4 IO

pr0_pru0_gpo7 0x5 O

pr0_pru0_gpi7 0x6 I

gpio3_21 0x7 IO

gpio0_3 0x9 IO

H23 mcasp0_axr0 mcasp0_axr0 0x0 IO OFF PD Mode7 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

ehrpwm0_tripzone_input 0x1 I

spi1_cs3 0x2 IO

spi1_d1 0x3 IO

mmc2_sdcd 0x4 I

pr0_pru0_gpo2 0x5 O

pr0_pru0_gpi2 0x6 I

gpio3_16 0x7 IO

M25 mcasp0_axr1 mcasp0_axr1 0x0 IO OFF PD Mode7 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

eQEP0_index 0x1 IO

mcasp1_axr0 0x3 IO

EMU3 0x4 IO

pr0_pru0_gpo6 0x5 O

pr0_pru0_gpi6 0x6 I

gpio3_20 0x7 IO

gpio0_2 0x9 IO

K23 mcasp0_fsr mcasp0_fsr 0x0 IO OFF PD Mode7 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

eQEP0B_in 0x1 I

mcasp0_axr3 0x2 IO

mcasp1_fsx 0x3 IO

EMU2 0x4 IO

pr0_pru0_gpo5 0x5 O

pr0_pru0_gpi5 0x6 I

gpio3_19 0x7 IO

gpio0_19 0x9 IO

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Table 4-10. Pin Attributes (ZDN Package) (continued)

BALL

NUMBER [1] PIN NAME [2] SIGNAL NAME [3] MODE [4] TYPE [5] BALL

RESET

STATE [6]

BALL

RESET

REL.

STATE [7]

BALL RESET

REL. MODE

[8] POWER [9] HYS [10] BUFFER

STRENGTH

(mA) [11]

PULL

UP/DOWN

TYPE [12] IO CELL [13]

N22 mcasp0_fsx mcasp0_fsx 0x0 IO OFF PD Mode7 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

ehrpwm0B 0x1 O

spi1_cs2 0x2 IO

spi1_d0 0x3 IO

mmc1_sdcd 0x4 I

pr0_pru0_gpo1 0x5 O

pr0_pru0_gpi1 0x6 I

gpio3_15 0x7 IO

B17 mdio_clk mdio_clk 0x0 O PU PU Mode7 VDDSHV7 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

timer5 0x1 IO

uart5_txd 0x2 O

uart3_rtsn 0x3 O

mmc0_sdwp 0x4 I

mmc1_clk 0x5 IO

mmc2_clk 0x6 IO

gpio0_1 0x7 IO

pr1_mdio_mdclk 0x8 O

A17 mdio_data mdio_data 0x0 IO PU PU Mode7 VDDSHV7 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

timer6 0x1 IO

uart5_rxd 0x2 I

uart3_ctsn 0x3 IO

mmc0_sdcd 0x4 I

mmc1_cmd 0x5 IO

mmc2_cmd 0x6 IO

gpio0_0 0x7 IO

pr1_mdio_data 0x8 IO

D16 mii1_col gmii1_col 0x0 I PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV8 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

rmii2_refclk 0x1 IO

spi1_sclk 0x2 IO

uart5_rxd 0x3 I

mcasp1_axr2 0x4 IO

mmc2_dat3 0x5 IO

mcasp0_axr2 0x6 IO

gpio3_0 0x7 IO

gpio0_0 0x9 IO

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Table 4-10. Pin Attributes (ZDN Package) (continued)

BALL

NUMBER [1] PIN NAME [2] SIGNAL NAME [3] MODE [4] TYPE [5] BALL

RESET

STATE [6]

BALL

RESET

REL.

STATE [7]

BALL RESET

REL. MODE

[8] POWER [9] HYS [10] BUFFER

STRENGTH

(mA) [11]

PULL

UP/DOWN

TYPE [12] IO CELL [13]

B14 mii1_crs gmii1_crs 0x0 I PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV8 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

rmii1_crs_dv 0x1 I

spi1_d0 0x2 IO

I2C1_SDA 0x3 IOD

mcasp1_aclkx 0x4 IO

uart5_ctsn 0x5 I

uart2_rxd 0x6 IO

gpio3_1 0x7 IO

F17 mii1_rxd0 gmii1_rxd0 0x0 I PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV8 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

rmii1_rxd0 0x1 I

rgmii1_rd0 0x2 I

mcasp1_ahclkx 0x3 IO

mcasp1_ahclkr 0x4 IO

mcasp1_aclkr 0x5 IO

mcasp0_axr3 0x6 IO

gpio2_21 0x7 IO

B16 mii1_rxd1 gmii1_rxd1 0x0 I PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV8 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

rmii1_rxd1 0x1 I

rgmii1_rd1 0x2 I

mcasp1_axr3 0x3 IO

mcasp1_fsr 0x4 IO

eQEP0_strobe 0x5 IO

mmc2_clk 0x6 IO

gpio2_20 0x7 IO

E16 mii1_rxd2 gmii1_rxd2 0x0 I PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV8 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

uart3_txd 0x1 IO

rgmii1_rd2 0x2 I

mmc0_dat4 0x3 IO

mmc1_dat3 0x4 IO

uart1_rin 0x5 I

mcasp0_axr1 0x6 IO

gpio2_19 0x7 IO

gpio0_11 0x9 IO

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Table 4-10. Pin Attributes (ZDN Package) (continued)

BALL

NUMBER [1] PIN NAME [2] SIGNAL NAME [3] MODE [4] TYPE [5] BALL

RESET

STATE [6]

BALL

RESET

REL.

STATE [7]

BALL RESET

REL. MODE

[8] POWER [9] HYS [10] BUFFER

STRENGTH

(mA) [11]

PULL

UP/DOWN

TYPE [12] IO CELL [13]

C14 mii1_rxd3 gmii1_rxd3 0x0 I PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV8 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

uart3_rxd 0x1 IO

rgmii1_rd3 0x2 I

mmc0_dat5 0x3 IO

mmc1_dat2 0x4 IO

uart1_dtrn 0x5 O

mcasp0_axr0 0x6 IO

gpio2_18 0x7 IO

gpio0_10 0x9 IO

D13 mii1_rx_clk gmii1_rxclk 0x0 I PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV8 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

uart2_txd 0x1 IO

rgmii1_rclk 0x2 I

mmc0_dat6 0x3 IO

mmc1_dat1 0x4 IO

uart1_dsrn 0x5 I

mcasp0_fsx 0x6 IO

gpio3_10 0x7 IO

gpio0_9 0x9 IO

A15 mii1_rx_dv gmii1_rxdv 0x0 I PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV8 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

rgmii1_rctl 0x2 I

uart5_txd 0x3 O

mcasp1_aclkx 0x4 IO

mmc2_dat0 0x5 IO

mcasp0_aclkr 0x6 IO

gpio3_4 0x7 IO

gpio0_1 0x9 IO

B13 mii1_rx_er gmii1_rxer 0x0 I PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV8 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

rmii1_rxer 0x1 I

spi1_d1 0x2 IO

I2C1_SCL 0x3 IOD

mcasp1_fsx 0x4 IO

uart5_rtsn 0x5 O

uart2_txd 0x6 IO

gpio3_2 0x7 IO

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Table 4-10. Pin Attributes (ZDN Package) (continued)

BALL

NUMBER [1] PIN NAME [2] SIGNAL NAME [3] MODE [4] TYPE [5] BALL

RESET

STATE [6]

BALL

RESET

REL.

STATE [7]

BALL RESET

REL. MODE

[8] POWER [9] HYS [10] BUFFER

STRENGTH

(mA) [11]

PULL

UP/DOWN

TYPE [12] IO CELL [13]

B15 mii1_txd0 gmii1_txd0 0x0 O PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV8 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

rmii1_txd0 0x1 O

rgmii1_td0 0x2 O

mcasp1_axr2 0x3 IO

mcasp1_aclkr 0x4 IO

eQEP0B_in 0x5 I

mmc1_clk 0x6 IO

gpio0_28 0x7 IO

A14 mii1_txd1 gmii1_txd1 0x0 O PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV8 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

rmii1_txd1 0x1 O

rgmii1_td1 0x2 O

mcasp1_fsr 0x3 IO

mcasp1_axr1 0x4 IO

eQEP0A_in 0x5 I

mmc1_cmd 0x6 IO

gpio0_21 0x7 IO

C13 mii1_txd2 gmii1_txd2 0x0 O PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV8 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

dcan0_rx 0x1 I

rgmii1_td2 0x2 O

uart4_txd 0x3 O

mcasp1_axr0 0x4 IO

mmc2_dat2 0x5 IO

mcasp0_ahclkx 0x6 IO

gpio0_17 0x7 IO

gpio3_12 0x9 IO

C16 mii1_txd3 gmii1_txd3 0x0 O PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV8 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

dcan0_tx 0x1 O

rgmii1_td3 0x2 O

uart4_rxd 0x3 I

mcasp1_fsx 0x4 IO

mmc2_dat1 0x5 IO

mcasp0_fsr 0x6 IO

gpio0_16 0x7 IO

gpio3_11 0x9 IO

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Table 4-10. Pin Attributes (ZDN Package) (continued)

BALL

NUMBER [1] PIN NAME [2] SIGNAL NAME [3] MODE [4] TYPE [5] BALL

RESET

STATE [6]

BALL

RESET

REL.

STATE [7]

BALL RESET

REL. MODE

[8] POWER [9] HYS [10] BUFFER

STRENGTH

(mA) [11]

PULL

UP/DOWN

TYPE [12] IO CELL [13]

D14 mii1_tx_clk gmii1_txclk 0x0 I PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV8 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

uart2_rxd 0x1 IO

rgmii1_tclk 0x2 O

mmc0_dat7 0x3 IO

mmc1_dat0 0x4 IO

uart1_dcdn 0x5 I

mcasp0_aclkx 0x6 IO

gpio3_9 0x7 IO

gpio0_8 0x9 IO

A13 mii1_tx_en gmii1_txen 0x0 O PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV8 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

rmii1_txen 0x1 O

rgmii1_tctl 0x2 O

timer4 0x3 IO

mcasp1_axr0 0x4 IO

eQEP0_index 0x5 IO

mmc2_cmd 0x6 IO

gpio3_3 0x7 IO

D1 mmc0_clk mmc0_clk 0x0 IO OFF OFF Mode7 VDDSHV1 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gpmc_a24 0x1 O

uart3_ctsn 0x2 IO

uart2_rxd 0x3 IO

dcan1_tx 0x4 O

pr0_pru0_gpo12 0x5 O

pr0_pru0_gpi12 0x6 I

gpio2_30 0x7 IO

D2 mmc0_cmd mmc0_cmd 0x0 IO OFF OFF Mode7 VDDSHV1 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gpmc_a25 0x1 O

uart3_rtsn 0x2 O

uart2_txd 0x3 IO

dcan1_rx 0x4 I

pr0_pru0_gpo13 0x5 O

pr0_pru0_gpi13 0x6 I

gpio2_31 0x7 IO

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Table 4-10. Pin Attributes (ZDN Package) (continued)

BALL

NUMBER [1] PIN NAME [2] SIGNAL NAME [3] MODE [4] TYPE [5] BALL

RESET

STATE [6]

BALL

RESET

REL.

STATE [7]

BALL RESET

REL. MODE

[8] POWER [9] HYS [10] BUFFER

STRENGTH

(mA) [11]

PULL

UP/DOWN

TYPE [12] IO CELL [13]

C1 mmc0_dat0 mmc0_dat0 0x0 IO OFF OFF Mode7 VDDSHV1 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gpmc_a23 0x1 O

uart5_rtsn 0x2 O

uart3_txd 0x3 IO

uart1_rin 0x4 I

pr0_pru0_gpo11 0x5 O

pr0_pru0_gpi11 0x6 I

gpio2_29 0x7 IO

C2 mmc0_dat1 mmc0_dat1 0x0 IO OFF OFF Mode7 VDDSHV1 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gpmc_a22 0x1 O

uart5_ctsn 0x2 I

uart3_rxd 0x3 IO

uart1_dtrn 0x4 O

pr0_pru0_gpo10 0x5 O

pr0_pru0_gpi10 0x6 I

gpio2_28 0x7 IO

B2 mmc0_dat2 mmc0_dat2 0x0 IO OFF OFF Mode7 VDDSHV1 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gpmc_a21 0x1 O

uart4_rtsn 0x2 O

timer6 0x3 IO

uart1_dsrn 0x4 I

pr0_pru0_gpo9 0x5 O

pr0_pru0_gpi9 0x6 I

gpio2_27 0x7 IO

B1 mmc0_dat3 mmc0_dat3 0x0 IO OFF OFF Mode7 VDDSHV1 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gpmc_a20 0x1 O

uart4_ctsn 0x2 I

timer5 0x3 IO

uart1_dcdn 0x4 I

pr0_pru0_gpo8 0x5 O

pr0_pru0_gpi8 0x6 I

gpio2_26 0x7 IO

Y25 nTRST nTRST 0x0 I PD PD Mode0 VDDSHV3 Yes NA PU/PD LVCMOS

Y23 PWRONRSTn porz 0x0 I Z Z Mode0 VDDSHV3 (13) Yes NA NA LVCMOS

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Table 4-10. Pin Attributes (ZDN Package) (continued)

BALL

NUMBER [1] PIN NAME [2] SIGNAL NAME [3] MODE [4] TYPE [5] BALL

RESET

STATE [6]

BALL

RESET

REL.

STATE [7]

BALL RESET

REL. MODE

[8] POWER [9] HYS [10] BUFFER

STRENGTH

(mA) [11]

PULL

UP/DOWN

TYPE [12] IO CELL [13]

AA10,AA7,

AA9,AB10,

AB6,AB7,

AB9,AC10,

AC12,AC5,

AC6,AC7,

AC9,AD1,

AD10,AD11,

AD2,AD7,

AE11,AE12,

AE9,H19,

H21,W10,

Y10,Y6,Y7

Reserved Reserved (7) NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

A16 rmii1_ref_clk rmii1_refclk 0x0 IO PD PD Mode7 VDDSHV8 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

xdma_event_intr2 0x1 I

spi1_cs0 0x2 IO

uart5_txd 0x3 O

mcasp1_axr3 0x4 IO

mmc0_pow 0x5 O

mcasp1_ahclkx 0x6 IO

gpio0_29 0x7 IO

AE2 RTC_KALDO_ENn RTC_KALDO_ENn 0x0 I Z Z Mode0 VDDS_RTC NA NA NA Analog

AD6 RTC_PMIC_EN RTC_PMIC_EN 0x0 O PU 1 Mode0 VDDS_RTC NA 6 NA LVCMOS

AE6 RTC_PWRONRSTn RTC_PORz 0x0 I Z Z Mode0 VDDS_RTC Yes NA NA LVCMOS

AE3 RTC_WAKEUP RTC_WAKEUP 0x0 I PD Z Mode0 VDDS_RTC Yes NA NA LVCMOS

AE5 RTC_XTALIN OSC1_IN 0x0 I H H Mode0 VDDS_RTC Yes NA PU (2) LVCMOS

AE4 RTC_XTALOUT OSC1_OUT 0x0 O Z Z (24) Mode0 VDDS_RTC NA NA (14) NA LVCMOS

T20 spi0_cs0 spi0_cs0 0x0 IO OFF PU Mode7 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

mmc2_sdwp 0x1 I

I2C1_SCL 0x2 IOD

ehrpwm0_synci 0x3 I

pr1_uart0_txd 0x4 O

pr0_uart0_txd 0x5 O

pr1_edio_data_out1 0x6 O

gpio0_5 0x7 IO

ehrpwm1B 0x8 O

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Table 4-10. Pin Attributes (ZDN Package) (continued)

BALL

NUMBER [1] PIN NAME [2] SIGNAL NAME [3] MODE [4] TYPE [5] BALL

RESET

STATE [6]

BALL

RESET

REL.

STATE [7]

BALL RESET

REL. MODE

[8] POWER [9] HYS [10] BUFFER

STRENGTH

(mA) [11]

PULL

UP/DOWN

TYPE [12] IO CELL [13]

R25 spi0_cs1 spi0_cs1 0x0 IO OFF PU Mode7 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

uart3_rxd 0x1 IO

eCAP1_in_PWM1_out 0x2 IO

mmc0_pow 0x3 O

xdma_event_intr2 0x4 I

mmc0_sdcd 0x5 I

EMU4 0x6 IO

gpio0_6 0x7 IO

ehrpwm2A 0x8 O

timer0 0x9 IO

T22 spi0_d0 spi0_d0 0x0 IO OFF PU Mode7 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

uart2_txd 0x1 IO

I2C2_SCL 0x2 IOD

ehrpwm0B 0x3 O

pr1_uart0_rts_n 0x4 O

pr0_uart0_rts_n 0x5 O

EMU3 0x6 IO

gpio0_3 0x7 IO

T21 spi0_d1 spi0_d1 0x0 IO OFF PU Mode7 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

mmc1_sdwp 0x1 I

I2C1_SDA 0x2 IOD

ehrpwm0_tripzone_input 0x3 I

pr1_uart0_rxd 0x4 I

pr0_uart0_rxd 0x5 I

pr1_edio_data_out0 0x6 O

gpio0_4 0x7 IO

ehrpwm1A 0x8 O

P23 spi0_sclk spi0_sclk 0x0 IO OFF PU Mode7 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

uart2_rxd 0x1 IO

I2C2_SDA 0x2 IOD

ehrpwm0A 0x3 O

pr1_uart0_cts_n 0x4 I

pr0_uart0_cts_n 0x5 I

EMU2 0x6 IO

gpio0_2 0x7 IO

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Table 4-10. Pin Attributes (ZDN Package) (continued)

BALL

NUMBER [1] PIN NAME [2] SIGNAL NAME [3] MODE [4] TYPE [5] BALL

RESET

STATE [6]

BALL

RESET

REL.

STATE [7]

BALL RESET

REL. MODE

[8] POWER [9] HYS [10] BUFFER

STRENGTH

(mA) [11]

PULL

UP/DOWN

TYPE [12] IO CELL [13]

T23 spi2_cs0 spi2_cs0 0x0 IO OFF PU Mode7 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

I2C1_SDA 0x1 IOD

ehrpwm2_tripzone_input 0x6 I

gpio3_25 0x7 IO

gpio0_23 0x9 IO

P22 spi2_d0 spi2_d0 0x0 IO OFF PD Mode7 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

ehrpwm5_tripzone_input 0x6 I

gpio3_22 0x7 IO

gpio0_20 0x9 IO

P20 spi2_d1 spi2_d1 0x0 IO OFF PU Mode7 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

ehrpwm1_tripzone_input 0x6 I

gpio3_23 0x7 IO

gpio0_21 0x9 IO

N20 spi2_sclk spi2_sclk 0x0 IO OFF PD Mode7 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

I2C1_SCL 0x1 IOD

ehrpwm4_tripzone_input 0x6 I

gpio3_24 0x7 IO

gpio0_22 0x9 IO

N25 spi4_cs0 spi4_cs0 0x0 IO OFF PU Mode7 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

ehrpwm3_tripzone_input 0x6 I

gpio5_7 0x7 IO

R24 spi4_d0 spi4_d0 0x0 IO OFF PD Mode7 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

ehrpwm3_synci 0x6 I

gpio5_5 0x7 IO

P24 spi4_d1 spi4_d1 0x0 IO OFF PD Mode7 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

ehrpwm0_tripzone_input 0x6 I

gpio5_6 0x7 IO

P25 spi4_sclk spi4_sclk 0x0 IO OFF PD Mode7 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

ehrpwm0_synci 0x6 I

gpio5_4 0x7 IO

AA25 TCK TCK 0x0 I PU PU Mode0 VDDSHV3 Yes NA PU/PD LVCMOS

Y20 TDI TDI 0x0 I PU PU Mode0 VDDSHV3 Yes NA PU/PD LVCMOS

AA24 TDO TDO 0x0 O PU PU Mode0 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

Y24 TMS TMS 0x0 I PU PU Mode0 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Table 4-10. Pin Attributes (ZDN Package) (continued)

BALL

NUMBER [1] PIN NAME [2] SIGNAL NAME [3] MODE [4] TYPE [5] BALL

RESET

STATE [6]

BALL

RESET

REL.

STATE [7]

BALL RESET

REL. MODE

[8] POWER [9] HYS [10] BUFFER

STRENGTH

(mA) [11]

PULL

UP/DOWN

TYPE [12] IO CELL [13]

L25 uart0_ctsn uart0_ctsn 0x0 I OFF PU Mode7 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

uart4_rxd 0x1 I

dcan1_tx 0x2 O

I2C1_SDA 0x3 IOD

spi1_d0 0x4 IO

timer7 0x5 IO

pr1_edc_sync0_out 0x6 O

gpio1_8 0x7 IO

J25 uart0_rtsn uart0_rtsn 0x0 O OFF PU Mode7 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

uart4_txd 0x1 O

dcan1_rx 0x2 I

I2C1_SCL 0x3 IOD

spi1_d1 0x4 IO

spi1_cs0 0x5 IO

pr1_edc_sync1_out 0x6 O

gpio1_9 0x7 IO

K25 uart0_rxd uart0_rxd 0x0 I OFF PU Mode7 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

spi1_cs0 0x1 IO

dcan0_tx 0x2 O

I2C2_SDA 0x3 IOD

eCAP2_in_PWM2_out 0x4 IO

pr0_pru1_gpo4 0x5 O

pr0_pru1_gpi4 0x6 I

gpio1_10 0x7 IO

J24 uart0_txd uart0_txd 0x0 O OFF PU Mode7 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

spi1_cs1 0x1 IO

dcan0_rx 0x2 I

I2C2_SCL 0x3 IOD

eCAP1_in_PWM1_out 0x4 IO

pr0_pru1_gpo5 0x5 O

pr0_pru1_gpi5 0x6 I

gpio1_11 0x7 IO

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Table 4-10. Pin Attributes (ZDN Package) (continued)

BALL

NUMBER [1] PIN NAME [2] SIGNAL NAME [3] MODE [4] TYPE [5] BALL

RESET

STATE [6]

BALL

RESET

REL.

STATE [7]

BALL RESET

REL. MODE

[8] POWER [9] HYS [10] BUFFER

STRENGTH

(mA) [11]

PULL

UP/DOWN

TYPE [12] IO CELL [13]

K22 uart1_ctsn uart1_ctsn 0x0 IO OFF PU Mode7 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

timer6 0x1 IO

dcan0_tx 0x2 O

I2C2_SDA 0x3 IOD

spi1_cs0 0x4 IO

pr1_uart0_cts_n 0x5 I

pr1_edc_latch0_in 0x6 I

gpio0_12 0x7 IO

L22 uart1_rtsn uart1_rtsn 0x0 O OFF PU Mode7 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

timer5 0x1 IO

dcan0_rx 0x2 I

I2C2_SCL 0x3 IOD

spi1_cs1 0x4 IO

pr1_uart0_rts_n 0x5 O

pr1_edc_latch1_in 0x6 I

gpio0_13 0x7 IO

K21 uart1_rxd uart1_rxd 0x0 IO OFF PU Mode7 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

mmc1_sdwp 0x1 I

dcan1_tx 0x2 O

I2C1_SDA 0x3 IOD

pr1_uart0_rxd 0x5 I

pr1_pru0_gpi16 0x6 I

gpio0_14 0x7 IO

L21 uart1_txd uart1_txd 0x0 IO OFF PU Mode7 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

mmc2_sdwp 0x1 I

dcan1_rx 0x2 I

I2C1_SCL 0x3 IOD

pr1_uart0_txd 0x5 O

pr1_pru0_gpi16 0x6 I

gpio0_15 0x7 IO

H22 uart3_ctsn uart3_ctsn 0x0 IO OFF PU Mode7 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

spi4_cs1 0x2 IO

pr0_pru1_gpo18 0x4 O

pr0_pru1_gpi18 0x5 I

ehrpwm5A 0x6 O

gpio5_0 0x7 IO

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Table 4-10. Pin Attributes (ZDN Package) (continued)

BALL

NUMBER [1] PIN NAME [2] SIGNAL NAME [3] MODE [4] TYPE [5] BALL

RESET

STATE [6]

BALL

RESET

REL.

STATE [7]

BALL RESET

REL. MODE

[8] POWER [9] HYS [10] BUFFER

STRENGTH

(mA) [11]

PULL

UP/DOWN

TYPE [12] IO CELL [13]

K24 uart3_rtsn uart3_rtsn 0x0 O OFF PU Mode7 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

hdq_sio 0x1 IOD

pr0_pru1_gpo19 0x4 O

pr0_pru1_gpi19 0x5 I

ehrpwm5B 0x6 O

gpio5_1 0x7 IO

H25 uart3_rxd uart3_rxd 0x0 IO OFF PU Mode7 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

pr0_pru0_gpo18 0x4 O

pr0_pru0_gpi18 0x5 I

ehrpwm4A 0x6 O

gpio5_2 0x7 IO

H24 uart3_txd uart3_txd 0x0 IO OFF PU Mode7 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

pr0_pru0_gpo19 0x4 O

pr0_pru0_gpi19 0x5 I

ehrpwm4B 0x6 O

gpio5_3 0x7 IO

W22 USB0_CE USB0_CE 0x0 A Z Z Mode0 VDDA3P3V_USB0/V

DDA1P8V_USB0 NA NA NA Analog

W24 USB0_DM USB0_DM 0x0 A Z Z Mode0 VDDA3P3V_USB0/V

DDA1P8V_USB0 NA (15) 8(15) NA Analog

W25 USB0_DP USB0_DP 0x0 A Z Z Mode0 VDDA3P3V_USB0/V

DDA1P8V_USB0 NA (15) 8(15) NA Analog

G21 USB0_DRVVBUS USB0_DRVVBUS 0x0 O PD PD Mode0 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gpio0_18 0x7 IO

gpio5_27 0x9 IO

U24 USB0_ID USB0_ID 0x0 A Z Z Mode0 VDDA3P3V_USB0/V

DDA1P8V_USB0 NA NA NA Analog

U23 USB0_VBUS USB0_VBUS 0x0 A Z Z Mode0 VDDA3P3V_USB0/V

DDA1P8V_USB0 NA NA NA Analog

U22 USB1_CE USB1_CE 0x0 A Z Z Mode0 VDDA3P3V_USB1/V

DDA1P8V_USB1 NA NA NA Analog

V25 USB1_DM USB1_DM 0x0 A Z Z Mode0 VDDA3P3V_USB1/V

DDA1P8V_USB1 NA (16) 8(16) NA Analog

V24 USB1_DP USB1_DP 0x0 A Z Z Mode0 VDDA3P3V_USB1/V

DDA1P8V_USB1 NA (16) 8(16) NA Analog

F25 USB1_DRVVBUS USB1_DRVVBUS 0x0 O PD PD Mode0 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

gpio3_13 0x7 IO

gpio0_25 0x9 IO

U25 USB1_ID USB1_ID 0x0 A Z Z Mode0 VDDA3P3V_USB1/V

DDA1P8V_USB1 NA NA NA Analog

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Table 4-10. Pin Attributes (ZDN Package) (continued)

BALL

NUMBER [1] PIN NAME [2] SIGNAL NAME [3] MODE [4] TYPE [5] BALL

RESET

STATE [6]

BALL

RESET

REL.

STATE [7]

BALL RESET

REL. MODE

[8] POWER [9] HYS [10] BUFFER

STRENGTH

(mA) [11]

PULL

UP/DOWN

TYPE [12] IO CELL [13]

T25 USB1_VBUS USB1_VBUS 0x0 A Z Z Mode0 VDDA3P3V_USB1/V

DDA1P8V_USB1 NA NA NA Analog

W21 VDDA1P8V_USB0 VDDA1P8V_USB0 NA POWER NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

U21 VDDA1P8V_USB1 VDDA1P8V_USB1 NA POWER NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

W20 VDDA3P3V_USB0 VDDA3P3V_USB0 NA POWER NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

U20 VDDA3P3V_USB1 VDDA3P3V_USB1 NA POWER NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

AB12 VDDA_ADC0 VDDA_ADC0 NA POWER NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

Y16 VDDA_ADC1 VDDA_ADC1 NA POWER NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

AD12,AD8,

F20,G6,H12,

P19,W15,

Y19

VDDS VDDS (1) NA POWER NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

F8 VDDS3P3V_IOLDO VDDS3P3V_IOLDO NA POWER NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

J7,J8 VDDSHV1 VDDSHV1 NA POWER NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

V16,V17,

W16 VDDSHV2 VDDSHV2 NA POWER NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

J18,K17,

K18,N18,

N19,P18,

W18

VDDSHV3 VDDSHV3 NA POWER NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

F22 VDDSHV5 VDDSHV5 NA POWER NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

G16,G17,

H17 VDDSHV6 VDDSHV6 NA POWER NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

F16 VDDSHV7 VDDSHV7 NA POWER NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

G13,G14 VDDSHV8 VDDSHV8 NA POWER NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

G11,H11 VDDSHV9 VDDSHV9 NA POWER NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

G10,H10 VDDSHV10 VDDSHV10 NA POWER NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

H8,H9 VDDSHV11 VDDSHV11 NA POWER NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

E23 VDDS_CLKOUT VDDS_CLKOUT NA POWER NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

K7,K8,M7,

M8,N7,N8,

R6,R7,R8,

T7,T8,V7,

VDDS_DDR VDDS_DDR NA POWER NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

C23 VDDS_OSC VDDS_OSC NA POWER NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

N21 VDDS_PLL_CORE_LCD VDDS_PLL_CORE_LCD NA POWER NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

G5 VDDS_PLL_DDR VDDS_PLL_DDR NA POWER NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

E17 VDDS_PLL_MPU VDDS_PLL_MPU NA POWER NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

AD5 VDDS_RTC VDDS_RTC NA POWER NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

F13 VDDS_SRAM_CORE_BG VDDS_SRAM_CORE_BG NA POWER NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

F14 VDDS_SRAM_MPU_BB VDDS_SRAM_MPU_BB NA POWER NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Table 4-10. Pin Attributes (ZDN Package) (continued)

BALL

NUMBER [1] PIN NAME [2] SIGNAL NAME [3] MODE [4] TYPE [5] BALL

RESET

STATE [6]

BALL

RESET

REL.

STATE [7]

BALL RESET

REL. MODE

[8] POWER [9] HYS [10] BUFFER

STRENGTH

(mA) [11]

PULL

UP/DOWN

TYPE [12] IO CELL [13]

AD9,J10,

J11,L12,L14,

M12,M14,

M9,N16,N17,

N9,P16,P17,

R11,R14,R9,

T11,T14,

T18,T19,T9,

U15,V15,

W12,W13

VDD_CORE VDD_CORE (11) NA POWER NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

H13,H14,

H16,J13,J14,

J16,K19,

K20,L19,

L20,M17,

M18

VDD_MPU VDD_MPU NA POWER NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

D20 vdd_mpu_mon vdd_mpu_mon (25) NA POWER NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

P21 VPP VPP (18) NA POWER NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

A1,A25,

AA23,AE1,

AE10,AE25,

AE7,AE8,

H15,H18,

J12,J15,J17,

J9,K11,K12,

K14,K15,K9,

L11,L15,L17,

L18,L8,L9,

M10,M11,

M13,M15,

M16,N10,

N11,N12,

N13,N14,

N15,P10,

P11,P12,

P13,P14,

P15,P8,P9,

R12,R15,

R17,R18,

T12,T15,

T17,U10,

U11,U12,

U13,U14,

U16,U17,

U18,U19,U8,

U9,V10,V11,

V12,V13,

V14,V18,V9

VSS VSS (12) NA GROUND NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

AC15 VSSA_ADC VSSA_ADC NA GROUND NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

W23 VSSA_USB VSSA_USB NA GROUND NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

B24 VSS_OSC VSS_OSC (26) NA GROUND NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

AD4 VSS_RTC VSS_RTC (27) NA GROUND NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

G22 WARMRSTn nRESETIN_OUT 0x0 IOD (9) OFF PU (17) Mode0 VDDSHV3 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Table 4-10. Pin Attributes (ZDN Package) (continued)

BALL

NUMBER [1] PIN NAME [2] SIGNAL NAME [3] MODE [4] TYPE [5] BALL

RESET

STATE [6]

BALL

RESET

REL.

STATE [7]

BALL RESET

REL. MODE

[8] POWER [9] HYS [10] BUFFER

STRENGTH

(mA) [11]

PULL

UP/DOWN

TYPE [12] IO CELL [13]

D24 xdma_event_intr0 xdma_event_intr0 0x0 I OFF PD (8) Mode7 VDDSHV5 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

ext_hw_trigger 0x1 I

timer4 0x2 IO

clkout1 0x3 O

spi1_cs1 0x4 IO

pr1_pru0_gpi16 0x5 I

EMU2 0x6 IO

gpio0_19 0x7 IO

pr1_mdio_data 0x8 IO

gpio5_28 0x9 IO

C24 xdma_event_intr1 xdma_event_intr1 0x0 I OFF PD Mode7 VDDSHV5 Yes 6 PU/PD LVCMOS

spi0_cs2 0x1 IO

tclkin 0x2 I

clkout2 0x3 O

timer7 0x4 IO

pr1_pru0_gpi16 0x5 I

EMU3 0x6 IO

gpio0_20 0x7 IO

pr1_mdio_mdclk 0x8 O

gpio5_29 0x9 IO

C25 XTALIN OSC0_IN 0x0 (3) I Z Z Mode0 VDDS_OSC Yes NA PD LVCMOS

B25 XTALOUT OSC0_OUT 0x0 O Z Z Mode0 VDDS_OSC NA NA (14) NA LVCMOS

(1) AD12 and AD8 are not connected to VDDS in the device, but they are required to be connected to 1.8-V VDDS on the board.

(2) An internal 10-kΩpullup is turned on when the oscillator is disabled. The oscillator is disabled by default after power is applied.

(3) An internal 15-kΩpulldown is turned on when the oscillator is disabled. The oscillator is enabled by default after power is applied.

(4) DSS_DATA[15:0] terminals are respectively SYSBOOT[15:0] inputs, latched on the rising edge of PWRONRSTn.

(5) DSS_HSYNC terminal is SYSBOOT[17] input, latched on the rising edge of PWRONRSTn.

(6) DSS_VSYNC terminal is SYSBOOT[16] input, latched on the rising edge of PWRONRSTn.

(7) Do not connect any signal, test point, or board trace to reserved signals.

(8) If sysboot[17] is low on the rising edge of PWRONRSTn, this terminal has an internal pulldown turned on after reset is released. If sysboot[17] is high on the rising edge or PWRONRSTn,

this terminal will initially be driven low after reset is released then it begins to toggle at the same frequency of the OSC0_IN terminal.

(9) See the External Warm Reset section of the Technical Reference Manual for more information related to the operation of this terminal.

(10) Reset Release Mode = 7 if sysboot[17] is low. Mode = 3 if sysboot[17] is high.

(11) Terminal AD9 is not connected to VDD_CORE in the device, but it is required to be connected to VDD_CORE on the board.

(12) Terminals AA23, AE10, AE7, AE8 are not connected to VSS in the device, but they are required to be connected to board ground.

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

(13) The input voltage thresholds for this input are not a function of VDDSHV3. See the DC Electrical Characteristics section for details related to electrical parameters associated with this

input terminal.

(14) This output should only be used to source the recommended crystal circuit.

(15) This parameter only applies when this USB PHY terminal is operating in UART2 mode.

(16) This parameter only applies when this USB PHY terminal is operating in UART3 mode.

(17) This pin is configured as open-drain and, hence, is expected to have an external pullup resistor. However, there is also an internal PU resistor by default enabled after reset is

deasserted.

(18) This signal is valid only for High-Security (AM437xHS) devices. For more details, see the VPP Specification for One-Time Programmable (OTP) eFUSEs section. This signal is reserved

for AM437x devices and, thus, do not connect any signal, test point, or board trace to this signal for AM437x devices.

(19) This terminal is an analog input used to set the switching threshold of the DDR input buffers to (VDDS_DDR / 2).

(20) This terminal is an analog passive signal that connects to an external 49.9 Ω1%, 20mW reference resistor which is used to calibrate the DDR input/output buffers.

(21) This terminal is analog input that may also be configured as an open-drain output.

(22) This terminal is analog input that may also be configured as an open-source or open-drain output.

(23) This terminal is analog input that may also be configured as an open-source output.

(24) This terminal is high-Z when the oscillator is disabled. This terminal is driven high if RTC_XTALIN is less than VIL, driven low if RTC_XTALIN is greater than VIH, and driven to a

unknown value if RTC_XTALIN is between VIL and VIH when the oscillator is enabled. The oscillator is disabled by default after power is applied.

(25) This terminal provides a Kelvin connection to VDD_MPU. It can be connected to the power supply feedback input to provide remote sensing which compensates for voltage drop in the

PCB power distribution network and package. When the Kelvin connection is not used it should be connected to the same power source as VDD_MPU.

(26) This terminal provides a Kelvin ground reference for the external crystal components. If a crystal circuit is connected to the OSC0_IN/OSC0_OUT terminals, the crystal circuit component

grounds should be connected to this terminal and also be connected to the PCB ground plane close to this terminal. If an external LVCMOS clock source is connected to the OSC0_IN

terminal, this terminal should be connected to VSS.

(27) This terminal provides a Kelvin ground reference for the external crystal components. If a crystal circuit is connected to the OSC1_IN/OSC1_OUT terminals, the crystal circuit component

grounds should be connected to this terminal and also should be connected to the PCB ground plane close to this terminal. If an external LVCMOS clock source is connected to the

OSC1_IN terminal, this terminal should be connected to VSS.

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

4.3 Signal Descriptions

The device contains many peripheral interfaces. In order to reduce package size and lower overall system

cost while maintaining maximum functionality, many of the terminals can multiplex up to eight signal

functions. Although there are many combinations of pin multiplexing that are possible, only a certain

number of sets, called IO Sets, are valid due to timing limitations. These valid IO Sets were carefully

chosen to provide many possible application scenarios for the user.

TI has developed a Windows-based application called Pin Mux Utility that helps a system designer select

the appropriate pin-multiplexing configuration for their device-based product design. The Pin Mux Utility

provides a way to select valid IO Sets of specific peripheral interfaces to ensure the pin-multiplexing

configuration selected for a design only uses valid IO Sets supported by the device.

(1) SIGNAL NAME: The signal name

(2) DESCRIPTION: Description of the signal.

(3) TYPE: Ball type for this specific function:

– I = Input

– O = Output

– I/O = Input/Output

– D = Open drain

– DS = Differential

– A = Analog

(4) BALL: Package ball location.

4.3.1 ADC Interfaces

Table 4-11. ADC0 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

ADC0_AIN0 Analog Input/Output A AA12

ADC0_AIN1 Analog Input/Output A Y12

ADC0_AIN2 Analog Input/Output A Y13

ADC0_AIN3 Analog Input/Output A AA13

ADC0_AIN4 Analog Input/Output A AB13

ADC0_AIN5 Analog Input/Output A AC13

ADC0_AIN6 Analog Input/Output A AD13

ADC0_AIN7 Analog Input/Output A AE13

ADC0_VREFN Analog Negative Reference Input AP AE14

ADC0_VREFP Analog Positive Reference Input AP AD14

Table 4-12. ADC0/1 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

ext_hw_trigger External Hardware Trigger for ADC conversion I AC25,D24

Table 4-13. ADC1 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

ADC1_AIN0 Analog Input/Output A AC16

ADC1_AIN1 Analog Input/Output A AB16

ADC1_AIN2 Analog Input/Output A AA16

ADC1_AIN3 Analog Input/Output A AB15

ADC1_AIN4 Analog Input/Output A AA15

ADC1_AIN5 Analog Input/Output A Y15

ADC1_AIN6 Analog Input/Output A AE16

ADC1_AIN7 Analog Input/Output A AD16

ADC1_VREFN Analog Negative Reference Input AP AD15

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 4-13. ADC1 Signal Descriptions (continued)

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

ADC1_VREFP Analog Positive Reference Input AP AE15

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

4.3.2 CAN Interfaces

Table 4-14. DCAN0 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

dcan0_rx DCAN0 Receive Data I C13,J24,L22

dcan0_tx DCAN0 Transmit Data O C16,K22,K25

Table 4-15. DCAN1 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

dcan1_rx DCAN1 Receive Data I D2,J25,L21

dcan1_tx DCAN1 Transmit Data O D1,K21,L25

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

4.3.3 Camera (VPFE) Interfaces

Table 4-16. Camera0 Input Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

cam0_data0 Camera data I AE18

cam0_data1 Camera data I AB18

cam0_data2 Camera data I Y18

cam0_data3 Camera data I AA18

cam0_data4 Camera data I AE19

cam0_data5 Camera data I AD19

cam0_data6 Camera data I AE20

cam0_data7 Camera data I AD20

cam0_data8 Camera data I AB19

cam0_data9 Camera data I AA19

cam0_data10 Camera data I AC18,AC25

cam0_data11 Camera data I AB25,AD17

cam0_field CCD Data Field Indicator IO AC18

cam0_hd CCD Data Horizontal Detect IO AE17

cam0_pclk CCD Data Pixel Clock I AC20

cam0_vd CCD Data Vertical Detect IO AD18

cam0_wen CCD Data Write Enable I AD17

Table 4-17. Camera1 Input Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

cam1_data0 Camera data I AB20

cam1_data1 Camera data I AC21

cam1_data2 Camera data I AD21

cam1_data3 Camera data I AE22

cam1_data4 Camera data I AD22

cam1_data5 Camera data I AE23

cam1_data6 Camera data I AD23

cam1_data7 Camera data I AE24

cam1_data8 Camera data I AB18,AD24

cam1_data9 Camera data I AC24,AE18

cam1_data10 Camera data I AC18,AC25,Y18

cam1_data11 Camera data I AA18,AB25,AD17

cam1_field CCD Data Field Indicator IO AC25

cam1_hd CCD Data Horizontal Detect IO AD25

cam1_pclk CCD Data Pixel Clock I AE21

cam1_vd CCD Data Vertical Detect IO AC23

cam1_wen CCD Data Write Enable I AB25,AE19

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

4.3.4 Debug Subsystem Interface

Table 4-18. Debug Subsystem Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

EMU0 MISC EMULATION PIN IO N23

EMU1 MISC EMULATION PIN IO T24

EMU2 MISC EMULATION PIN IO AE17,D24,K23,P23

EMU3 MISC EMULATION PIN IO AD18,C24,M25,T22

EMU4 MISC EMULATION PIN IO AC18,B12,L24,R25

EMU5 MISC EMULATION PIN IO AD17

EMU6 MISC EMULATION PIN IO AC20

EMU7 MISC EMULATION PIN IO AB19

EMU8 MISC EMULATION PIN IO AA19

EMU9 MISC EMULATION PIN IO AC24

EMU10 MISC EMULATION PIN IO AD24,AE17

EMU11 MISC EMULATION PIN IO AB25,AD18

nTRST JTAG TEST RESET (ACTIVE LOW) I Y25

TCK JTAG TEST CLOCK I AA25

TDI JTAG TEST DATA INPUT I Y20

TDO JTAG TEST DATA OUTPUT O AA24

TMS JTAG TEST MODE SELECT I Y24

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

4.3.5 Display Subsystem (DSS) Interface

Table 4-19. Display Subsystem (DSS) Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

dss_ac_bias_en DSS data O A24

dss_data0 DSS data IO B22

dss_data1 DSS data IO A21

dss_data2 DSS data IO B21

dss_data3 DSS data IO C21

dss_data4 DSS data IO A20

dss_data5 DSS data IO B20

dss_data6 DSS data IO C20

dss_data7 DSS data IO E19

dss_data8 DSS data IO A19

dss_data9 DSS data IO B19

dss_data10 DSS data IO A18

dss_data11 DSS data IO B18

dss_data12 DSS data IO C19

dss_data13 DSS data IO D19

dss_data14 DSS data IO C17

dss_data15 DSS data IO D17

dss_data16 DSS data O A11,AC24

dss_data17 DSS data O AA19,B11

dss_data18 DSS data O AB19,C11

dss_data19 DSS data O AC20,E11

dss_data20 DSS data O AD17,D11

dss_data21 DSS data O AC18,F11

dss_data22 DSS data O A10,AD18

dss_data23 DSS data O AE17,B10

dss_hsync DSS Horizontal Sync O A23

dss_pclk DSS Pixel Clock O A22

dss_vsync DSS Vertical Sync O B23

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

4.3.6 Ethernet (GEMAC_CPSW) Interfaces

Table 4-20. MDIO Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

mdio_clk MDIO Clk O B17

mdio_data MDIO Data IO A17

Table 4-21. MII1 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

gmii1_col MII Colision I D16

gmii1_crs MII Carrier Sense I B14

gmii1_rxclk MII Receive Clock I D13

gmii1_rxd0 MII Receive Data bit 0 I F17

gmii1_rxd1 MII Receive Data bit 1 I B16

gmii1_rxd2 MII Receive Data bit 2 I E16

gmii1_rxd3 MII Receive Data bit 3 I C14

gmii1_rxdv MII Receive Data Valid I A15

gmii1_rxer MII Receive Data Error I B13

gmii1_txclk MII Transmit Clock I D14

gmii1_txd0 MII Transmit Data bit 0 O B15

gmii1_txd1 MII Transmit Data bit 1 O A14

gmii1_txd2 MII Transmit Data bit 2 O C13

gmii1_txd3 MII Transmit Data bit 3 O C16

gmii1_txen MII Transmit Enable O A13

Table 4-22. MII2 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

gmii2_col MII Colision I A3

gmii2_crs MII Carrier Sense I A2,B12,F10

gmii2_rxclk MII Receive Clock I F6

gmii2_rxd0 MII Receive Data bit 0 I D8

gmii2_rxd1 MII Receive Data bit 1 I G8

gmii2_rxd2 MII Receive Data bit 2 I B4

gmii2_rxd3 MII Receive Data bit 3 I F7

gmii2_rxdv MII Receive Data Valid I C5

gmii2_rxer MII Receive Data Error I B3

gmii2_txclk MII Transmit Clock I E8

gmii2_txd0 MII Transmit Data bit 0 O E7

gmii2_txd1 MII Transmit Data bit 1 O D7

gmii2_txd2 MII Transmit Data bit 2 O A4

gmii2_txd3 MII Transmit Data bit 3 O C6

gmii2_txen MII Transmit Enable O C3

Table 4-23. RGMII1 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

rgmii1_rclk RGMII Receive Clock I D13

rgmii1_rctl RGMII Receive Control I A15

rgmii1_rd0 RGMII Receive Data bit 0 I F17

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 4-23. RGMII1 Signal Descriptions (continued)

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

rgmii1_rd1 RGMII Receive Data bit 1 I B16

rgmii1_rd2 RGMII Receive Data bit 2 I E16

rgmii1_rd3 RGMII Receive Data bit 3 I C14

rgmii1_tclk RGMII Transmit Clock O D14

rgmii1_tctl RGMII Transmit Control O A13

rgmii1_td0 RGMII Transmit Data bit 0 O B15

rgmii1_td1 RGMII Transmit Data bit 1 O A14

rgmii1_td2 RGMII Transmit Data bit 2 O C13

rgmii1_td3 RGMII Transmit Data bit 3 O C16

Table 4-24. RGMII2 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

rgmii2_rclk RGMII Receive Clock I F6

rgmii2_rctl RGMII Receive Control I C5

rgmii2_rd0 RGMII Receive Data bit 0 I D8

rgmii2_rd1 RGMII Receive Data bit 1 I G8

rgmii2_rd2 RGMII Receive Data bit 2 I B4

rgmii2_rd3 RGMII Receive Data bit 3 I F7

rgmii2_tclk RGMII Transmit Clock O E8

rgmii2_tctl RGMII Transmit Control O C3

rgmii2_td0 RGMII Transmit Data bit 0 O E7

rgmii2_td1 RGMII Transmit Data bit 1 O D7

rgmii2_td2 RGMII Transmit Data bit 2 O A4

rgmii2_td3 RGMII Transmit Data bit 3 O C6

Table 4-25. RMII1 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

rmii1_crs_dv RMII Carrier Sense / Data Valid I B14

rmii1_refclk RMII Reference Clock IO A16

rmii1_rxd0 RMII Receive Data bit 0 I F17

rmii1_rxd1 RMII Receive Data bit 1 I B16

rmii1_rxer RMII Receive Data Error I B13

rmii1_txd0 RMII Transmit Data bit 0 O B15

rmii1_txd1 RMII Transmit Data bit 1 O A14

rmii1_txen RMII Transmit Enable O A13

Table 4-26. RMII2 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

rmii2_crs_dv RMII Carrier Sense / Data Valid I A2,B12,B4,F10

rmii2_refclk RMII Reference Clock IO D16

rmii2_rxd0 RMII Receive Data bit 0 I D8

rmii2_rxd1 RMII Receive Data bit 1 I G8

rmii2_rxer RMII Receive Data Error I B3

rmii2_txd0 RMII Transmit Data bit 0 O E7

rmii2_txd1 RMII Transmit Data bit 1 O D7

rmii2_txen RMII Transmit Enable O C3

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

4.3.7 External Memory Interfaces

Table 4-27. DDR Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

ddr_a0 DDR SDRAM ROW/COLUMN ADDRESS O N1

ddr_a1 DDR SDRAM ROW/COLUMN ADDRESS O L1

ddr_a2 DDR SDRAM ROW/COLUMN ADDRESS O L2

ddr_a3 DDR SDRAM ROW/COLUMN ADDRESS O P2

ddr_a4 DDR SDRAM ROW/COLUMN ADDRESS O P1

ddr_a5 DDR SDRAM ROW/COLUMN ADDRESS O R5

ddr_a6 DDR SDRAM ROW/COLUMN ADDRESS O R4

ddr_a7 DDR SDRAM ROW/COLUMN ADDRESS O R3

ddr_a8 DDR SDRAM ROW/COLUMN ADDRESS O R2

ddr_a9 DDR SDRAM ROW/COLUMN ADDRESS O R1

ddr_a10 DDR SDRAM ROW/COLUMN ADDRESS O M6

ddr_a11 DDR SDRAM ROW/COLUMN ADDRESS O T5

ddr_a12 DDR SDRAM ROW/COLUMN ADDRESS O T4

ddr_a13 DDR SDRAM ROW/COLUMN ADDRESS O N5

ddr_a14 DDR SDRAM ROW/COLUMN ADDRESS O T3

ddr_a15 DDR SDRAM ROW/COLUMN ADDRESS O T2

ddr_ba0 DDR SDRAM BANK ADDRESS O K1

ddr_ba1 DDR SDRAM BANK ADDRESS O K2

ddr_ba2 DDR SDRAM BANK ADDRESS O K3

ddr_casn DDR SDRAM COLUMN ADDRESS STROBE. (ACTIVE

LOW) ON3

ddr_ck DDR SDRAM CLOCK (Differential+) O M2

ddr_cke0 DDR SDRAM CLOCK ENABLE O M3

ddr_cke1 DDR SDRAM CLOCK ENABLE1 O N6

ddr_csn0 DDR SDRAM CHIP SELECT0 O M5

ddr_csn1 DDR SDRAM CHIP SELECT1 O M4

ddr_d0 DDR SDRAM DATA IO E3

ddr_d1 DDR SDRAM DATA IO E2

ddr_d2 DDR SDRAM DATA IO E1

ddr_d3 DDR SDRAM DATA IO F3

ddr_d4 DDR SDRAM DATA IO G4

ddr_d5 DDR SDRAM DATA IO G3

ddr_d6 DDR SDRAM DATA IO G2

ddr_d7 DDR SDRAM DATA IO G1

ddr_d8 DDR SDRAM DATA IO H1

ddr_d9 DDR SDRAM DATA IO J6

ddr_d10 DDR SDRAM DATA IO J5

ddr_d11 DDR SDRAM DATA IO J4

ddr_d12 DDR SDRAM DATA IO J3

ddr_d13 DDR SDRAM DATA IO K6

ddr_d14 DDR SDRAM DATA IO K5

ddr_d15 DDR SDRAM DATA IO K4

ddr_d16 DDR SDRAM DATA IO V5

ddr_d17 DDR SDRAM DATA IO V4

ddr_d18 DDR SDRAM DATA IO V3

ddr_d19 DDR SDRAM DATA IO V2

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 4-27. DDR Signal Descriptions (continued)

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

ddr_d20 DDR SDRAM DATA IO V1

ddr_d21 DDR SDRAM DATA IO W4

ddr_d22 DDR SDRAM DATA IO W5

ddr_d23 DDR SDRAM DATA IO W6

ddr_d24 DDR SDRAM DATA IO Y2

ddr_d25 DDR SDRAM DATA IO Y3

ddr_d26 DDR SDRAM DATA IO Y4

ddr_d27 DDR SDRAM DATA IO AA3

ddr_d28 DDR SDRAM DATA IO AB2

ddr_d29 DDR SDRAM DATA IO AB1

ddr_d30 DDR SDRAM DATA IO AC1

ddr_d31 DDR SDRAM DATA IO AC2

ddr_dqm0 DDR WRITE ENABLE / DATA MASK FOR DATA[7:0] O F4

ddr_dqm1 DDR WRITE ENABLE / DATA MASK FOR DATA[15:8] O H2

ddr_dqm2 DDR WRITE ENABLE / DATA MASK FOR DATA[23:16] O V6

ddr_dqm3 DDR WRITE ENABLE / DATA MASK FOR DATA[31:24] O Y1

ddr_dqs0 DDR DATA STROBE FOR DATA[7:0] (Differential+) IO F2

ddr_dqs1 DDR DATA STROBE FOR DATA[15:8] (Differential+) IO J2

ddr_dqs2 DDR DATA STROBE FOR DATA[23:16] (Differential+) IO W1

ddr_dqs3 DDR DATA STROBE FOR DATA[31:24] (Differential+) IO AA1

ddr_dqsn0 DDR DATA STROBE FOR DATA[7:0] (Differential-) IO F1

ddr_dqsn1 DDR DATA STROBE FOR DATA[15:8] (Differential-) IO J1

ddr_dqsn2 DDR DATA STROBE FOR DATA[23:16] (Differential-) IO W2

ddr_dqsn3 DDR DATA STROBE FOR DATA[31:24] (Differential-) IO AA2

ddr_nck DDR SDRAM CLOCK (Differential-) O M1

ddr_odt0 DDR SDRAM ODT0 O U1

ddr_odt1 DDR SDRAM ODT1 O U2

ddr_rasn DDR SDRAM ROW ADDRESS STROBE (ACTIVE LOW) O N2

ddr_resetn DDR SDRAM RESET (only for DDR3) O T1

ddr_vref Voltage Reference AP (1) T6

ddr_vtp External Resistor for Impedance Training I (2) AC3

ddr_wen DDR SDRAM WRITE ENABLE (ACTIVE LOW) O N4

(1) This terminal is an analog input used to set the switching threshold of the DDR input buffers to (VDDS_DDR / 2).

(2) This terminal is an analog passive signal that connects to an external 49.9 Ω1%, 20mW reference resistor which is used to calibrate the

DDR input/output buffers.

Table 4-28. General Purpose Memory Controller (GPMC) Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

gpmc_a0 GPMC Address O B22,C3

gpmc_a1 GPMC Address O A21,B23,C5

gpmc_a2 GPMC Address O A23,B21,C6

gpmc_a3 GPMC Address O A22,A4,C21

gpmc_a4 GPMC Address O A20,A24,D7

gpmc_a5 GPMC Address O B20,C10,E7

gpmc_a6 GPMC Address O C20,E8

gpmc_a7 GPMC Address O E19,F6

gpmc_a8 GPMC Address O B23,F7

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 4-28. General Purpose Memory Controller (GPMC) Signal Descriptions (continued)

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

gpmc_a9 GPMC Address O A23,B4

gpmc_a10 GPMC Address O A22,G8

gpmc_a11 GPMC Address O A24,D8

gpmc_a12 GPMC Address O A19

gpmc_a13 GPMC Address O B19

gpmc_a14 GPMC Address O A18

gpmc_a15 GPMC Address O B18

gpmc_a16 GPMC Address O C19,C3

gpmc_a17 GPMC Address O C5,D19

gpmc_a18 GPMC Address O C17,C6

gpmc_a19 GPMC Address O A4,D17

gpmc_a20 GPMC Address O B1,D7

gpmc_a21 GPMC Address O B2,E7

gpmc_a22 GPMC Address O C2,E8

gpmc_a23 GPMC Address O C1,F6

gpmc_a24 GPMC Address O D1,F7

gpmc_a25 GPMC Address O B4,D2

gpmc_a26 GPMC Address O G8

gpmc_a27 GPMC Address O D8

gpmc_ad0 GPMC Address and Data IO B5

gpmc_ad1 GPMC Address and Data IO A5

gpmc_ad2 GPMC Address and Data IO B6

gpmc_ad3 GPMC Address and Data IO A6

gpmc_ad4 GPMC Address and Data IO B7

gpmc_ad5 GPMC Address and Data IO A7

gpmc_ad6 GPMC Address and Data IO C8

gpmc_ad7 GPMC Address and Data IO B8

gpmc_ad8 GPMC Address and Data IO B10

gpmc_ad9 GPMC Address and Data IO A10

gpmc_ad10 GPMC Address and Data IO F11

gpmc_ad11 GPMC Address and Data IO D11

gpmc_ad12 GPMC Address and Data IO E11

gpmc_ad13 GPMC Address and Data IO C11

gpmc_ad14 GPMC Address and Data IO B11

gpmc_ad15 GPMC Address and Data IO A11

gpmc_advn_ale GPMC Address Valid / Address Latch Enable O A9

gpmc_be0n_cle GPMC Byte Enable 0 / Command Latch Enable O C10

gpmc_be1n GPMC Byte Enable 1 O A3,F10

gpmc_clk GPMC Clock IO A12,B9

gpmc_csn0 GPMC Chip Select O A8

gpmc_csn1 GPMC Chip Select O B9

gpmc_csn2 GPMC Chip Select O F10

gpmc_csn3 GPMC Chip Select O B12

gpmc_csn4 GPMC Chip Select O A2

gpmc_csn5 GPMC Chip Select O B3

gpmc_csn6 GPMC Chip Select O A3

gpmc_dir GPMC Data Direction O A3

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 4-28. General Purpose Memory Controller (GPMC) Signal Descriptions (continued)

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

gpmc_oen_ren GPMC Output / Read Enable O E10

gpmc_wait0 GPMC Wait 0 I A2,B12

gpmc_wait1 GPMC Wait 1 I A12

gpmc_wen GPMC Write Enable O D10

gpmc_wpn GPMC Write Protect O B3

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

4.3.8 General Purpose IOs

Table 4-29. GPIO0 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

gpio0_0 GPIO IO A17,D16

gpio0_1 GPIO IO A15,B17

gpio0_2 GPIO IO M25,P23

gpio0_3 GPIO IO L24,T22

gpio0_4 GPIO IO A12,T21

gpio0_5 GPIO IO T20

gpio0_6 GPIO IO R25

gpio0_7 GPIO IO G24

gpio0_8 GPIO IO C19,D14

gpio0_9 GPIO IO D13,D19

gpio0_10 GPIO IO C14,C17

gpio0_11 GPIO IO D17,E16

gpio0_12 GPIO IO K22

gpio0_13 GPIO IO L22

gpio0_14 GPIO IO K21

gpio0_15 GPIO IO L21

gpio0_16 GPIO IO C16

gpio0_17 GPIO IO C13

gpio0_18 GPIO IO G21,L23

gpio0_19 GPIO IO D24,K23

gpio0_20 GPIO IO C24,P22

gpio0_21 GPIO IO A14,P20

gpio0_22 GPIO IO B10,N20

gpio0_23 GPIO IO A10,T23

gpio0_24 GPIO IO H20

gpio0_25 GPIO IO F25

gpio0_26 GPIO IO F11

gpio0_27 GPIO IO D11

gpio0_28 GPIO IO B15

gpio0_29 GPIO IO A16

gpio0_30 GPIO IO A2

gpio0_31 GPIO IO B3

Table 4-30. GPIO1 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

gpio1_0 GPIO IO B5

gpio1_1 GPIO IO A5

gpio1_2 GPIO IO B6

gpio1_3 GPIO IO A6

gpio1_4 GPIO IO B7

gpio1_5 GPIO IO A7

gpio1_6 GPIO IO C8

gpio1_7 GPIO IO B8

gpio1_8 GPIO IO L25

gpio1_9 GPIO IO J25

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 4-30. GPIO1 Signal Descriptions (continued)

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

gpio1_10 GPIO IO K25

gpio1_11 GPIO IO J24

gpio1_12 GPIO IO E11

gpio1_13 GPIO IO C11

gpio1_14 GPIO IO B11

gpio1_15 GPIO IO A11

gpio1_16 GPIO IO C3

gpio1_17 GPIO IO C5

gpio1_18 GPIO IO C6

gpio1_19 GPIO IO A4

gpio1_20 GPIO IO D7

gpio1_21 GPIO IO E7

gpio1_22 GPIO IO E8

gpio1_23 GPIO IO F6

gpio1_24 GPIO IO F7

gpio1_25 GPIO IO B4

gpio1_26 GPIO IO G8

gpio1_27 GPIO IO D8

gpio1_28 GPIO IO A3

gpio1_29 GPIO IO A8

gpio1_30 GPIO IO B9

gpio1_31 GPIO IO F10

Table 4-31. GPIO2 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

gpio2_0 GPIO IO B12

gpio2_1 GPIO IO A12

gpio2_2 GPIO IO A9

gpio2_3 GPIO IO E10

gpio2_4 GPIO IO D10

gpio2_5 GPIO IO C10

gpio2_6 GPIO IO B22

gpio2_7 GPIO IO A21

gpio2_8 GPIO IO B21

gpio2_9 GPIO IO C21

gpio2_10 GPIO IO A20

gpio2_11 GPIO IO B20

gpio2_12 GPIO IO C20

gpio2_13 GPIO IO E19

gpio2_14 GPIO IO A19

gpio2_15 GPIO IO B19

gpio2_16 GPIO IO A18

gpio2_17 GPIO IO B18

gpio2_18 GPIO IO C14

gpio2_19 GPIO IO E16

gpio2_20 GPIO IO B16

gpio2_21 GPIO IO F17

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 4-31. GPIO2 Signal Descriptions (continued)

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

gpio2_22 GPIO IO B23

gpio2_23 GPIO IO A23

gpio2_24 GPIO IO A22

gpio2_25 GPIO IO A24

gpio2_26 GPIO IO B1

gpio2_27 GPIO IO B2

gpio2_28 GPIO IO C2

gpio2_29 GPIO IO C1

gpio2_30 GPIO IO D1

gpio2_31 GPIO IO D2

Table 4-32. GPIO3 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

gpio3_0 GPIO IO D16

gpio3_1 GPIO IO B14

gpio3_2 GPIO IO B13

gpio3_3 GPIO IO A13

gpio3_4 GPIO IO A15

gpio3_5 GPIO IO AB24

gpio3_6 GPIO IO Y22

gpio3_7 GPIO IO N23

gpio3_8 GPIO IO T24

gpio3_9 GPIO IO D14

gpio3_10 GPIO IO D13

gpio3_11 GPIO IO C16

gpio3_12 GPIO IO C13

gpio3_13 GPIO IO F25

gpio3_14 GPIO IO N24

gpio3_15 GPIO IO N22

gpio3_16 GPIO IO H23

gpio3_17 GPIO IO M24

gpio3_18 GPIO IO L23

gpio3_19 GPIO IO K23

gpio3_20 GPIO IO M25

gpio3_21 GPIO IO L24

gpio3_22 GPIO IO P22

gpio3_23 GPIO IO P20

gpio3_24 GPIO IO N20

gpio3_25 GPIO IO T23

Table 4-33. GPIO4 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

gpio4_0 GPIO IO AE17

gpio4_1 GPIO IO AD18

gpio4_2 GPIO IO AC18

gpio4_3 GPIO IO AD17

gpio4_4 GPIO IO AC20

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 4-33. GPIO4 Signal Descriptions (continued)

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

gpio4_5 GPIO IO AB19

gpio4_6 GPIO IO AA19

gpio4_7 GPIO IO AC24

gpio4_8 GPIO IO AD24

gpio4_9 GPIO IO AD25

gpio4_10 GPIO IO AC23

gpio4_11 GPIO IO AE21

gpio4_12 GPIO IO AC25

gpio4_13 GPIO IO AB25

gpio4_14 GPIO IO AB20

gpio4_15 GPIO IO AC21

gpio4_16 GPIO IO AD21

gpio4_17 GPIO IO AE22

gpio4_18 GPIO IO AD22

gpio4_19 GPIO IO AE23

gpio4_20 GPIO IO AD23

gpio4_21 GPIO IO AE24

gpio4_24 GPIO IO Y18

gpio4_25 GPIO IO AA18

gpio4_26 GPIO IO AE19

gpio4_27 GPIO IO AD19

gpio4_28 GPIO IO AE20

gpio4_29 GPIO IO AD20

Table 4-34. GPIO5 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

gpio5_0 GPIO IO H22

gpio5_1 GPIO IO K24

gpio5_2 GPIO IO H25

gpio5_3 GPIO IO H24

gpio5_4 GPIO IO P25

gpio5_5 GPIO IO R24

gpio5_6 GPIO IO P24

gpio5_7 GPIO IO N25

gpio5_8 GPIO IO D25

gpio5_9 GPIO IO F24

gpio5_10 GPIO IO G20

gpio5_11 GPIO IO F23

gpio5_12 GPIO IO E25

gpio5_13 GPIO IO E24

gpio5_19 GPIO IO AE18

gpio5_20 GPIO IO AB18

gpio5_23 GPIO IO D11

gpio5_24 GPIO IO F11

gpio5_25 GPIO IO A10

gpio5_26 GPIO IO B10

gpio5_27 GPIO IO G21

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 4-34. GPIO5 Signal Descriptions (continued)

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

gpio5_28 GPIO IO D24

gpio5_29 GPIO IO C24

gpio5_30 GPIO IO A2

gpio5_31 GPIO IO B3

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

4.3.9 HDQ Interface

Table 4-35. HDQ Signal Description

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

hdq_sio HDQ 1W Data IO IOD K24

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

4.3.10 I2C Interfaces

Table 4-36. I2C0 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

I2C0_SCL I2C0 Clock IOD Y22

I2C0_SDA I2C0 Data IOD AB24

Table 4-37. I2C1 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

I2C1_SCL I2C1 Clock IOD AB18,B13,G20,J25,

L21,N20,T20

I2C1_SDA I2C1 Data IOD AE18,B14,E25,K21,

L25,T21,T23

Table 4-38. I2C2 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

I2C2_SCL I2C2 Clock IOD AB19,AC21,J24,

L22,T22

I2C2_SDA I2C2 Data IOD AB20,AC20,K22,

K25,P23

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

4.3.11 McASP Interfaces

Table 4-39. McASP0 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

mcasp0_aclkr McASP0 Receive Bit Clock IO A15,A3,C19,L23

mcasp0_aclkx McASP0 Transmit Bit Clock IO A19,D14,E11,F7,

N24

mcasp0_ahclkr McASP0 Receive Master Clock IO B18,M24

mcasp0_ahclkx McASP0 Transmit Master Clock IO C13,D17,L24

mcasp0_axr0 McASP0 Serial Data (IN/OUT) IO A18,B11,C14,G8,

H23

mcasp0_axr1 McASP0 Serial Data (IN/OUT) IO A11,C17,D8,E16,

M25

mcasp0_axr2 McASP0 Serial Data (IN/OUT) IO B18,C19,D16,L23,

M24

mcasp0_axr3 McASP0 Serial Data (IN/OUT) IO D17,D19,F17,K23,

L24

mcasp0_fsr McASP0 Receive Frame Sync IO A12,C16,D19,K23

mcasp0_fsx McASP0 Transmit Frame Sync IO B19,B4,C11,D13,

N22

Table 4-40. McASP1 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

mcasp1_aclkr McASP1 Receive Bit Clock IO B15,F17

mcasp1_aclkx McASP1 Transmit Bit Clock IO A15,B14,L23

mcasp1_ahclkr McASP1 Receive Master Clock IO F17

mcasp1_ahclkx McASP1 Transmit Master Clock IO A16,F17

mcasp1_axr0 McASP1 Serial Data (IN/OUT) IO A13,C13,M25

mcasp1_axr1 McASP1 Serial Data (IN/OUT) IO A14,L24

mcasp1_axr2 McASP1 Serial Data (IN/OUT) IO B15,D16

mcasp1_axr3 McASP1 Serial Data (IN/OUT) IO A16,B16

mcasp1_fsr McASP1 Receive Frame Sync IO A14,B16

mcasp1_fsx McASP1 Transmit Frame Sync IO B13,C16,K23

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

4.3.12 Miscellaneous

Table 4-41. Miscellaneous Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

clkout1 Clock out1 O D24

clkout2 Clock out2 O C24

clkreq Clock Request Control O H20

nNMI External Interrupt to ARM Cortex A9 core I G25

nRESETIN_OUT Warm Reset Input/Output IOD (1) G22

OSC0_IN High frequency oscillator input I C25

OSC0_OUT High frequency oscillator output O B25

OSC1_IN Low frequency (32.768 KHz) Real Time Clock oscillator

input IAE5

OSC1_OUT Low frequency (32.768 KHz) Real Time Clock oscillator

output OAE4

porz Power on Reset I Y23

RTC_PORz RTC active low reset input I AE6

tclkin Timer Clock In I C24

xdma_event_intr0 External DMA Event or Interrupt 0 I D24

xdma_event_intr1 External DMA Event or Interrupt 1 I C24

xdma_event_intr2 External DMA Event or Interrupt 2 I A16,G24,R25

xdma_event_intr3 External DMA Event or Interrupt 3 I AD24

xdma_event_intr4 External DMA Event or Interrupt 4 I AD25

xdma_event_intr5 External DMA Event or Interrupt 5 I AC23

xdma_event_intr6 External DMA Event or Interrupt 6 I AE21

xdma_event_intr7 External DMA Event or Interrupt 7 I AC25

xdma_event_intr8 External DMA Event or Interrupt 8 I AB25

(1) Refer to the External Warm Reset section of the Technical Reference Manual for more information related to the operation of this

terminal.

Table 4-42. Reserved Signals

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

Reserved NA AA10,AA7,AA9,

AB10,AB6,AB7,

AB9,AC10,AC12,

AC5,AC6,AC7,AC9,

AD1,AD10,AD11,

AD2,AD7,AE11,

AE12,AE9,H19,

H21,W10,Y10,Y6,

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

4.3.13 PRU-ICSS0 Interface

Table 4-43. PRU-ICSS0-PRU0/General Purpose Inputs Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

pr0_pru0_gpi0 PRU-ICSS0 PRU0 Data In I N24

pr0_pru0_gpi1 PRU-ICSS0 PRU0 Data In I N22

pr0_pru0_gpi2 PRU-ICSS0 PRU0 Data In I H23

pr0_pru0_gpi3 PRU-ICSS0 PRU0 Data In I M24

pr0_pru0_gpi4 PRU-ICSS0 PRU0 Data In I L23

pr0_pru0_gpi5 PRU-ICSS0 PRU0 Data In I K23

pr0_pru0_gpi6 PRU-ICSS0 PRU0 Data In I M25

pr0_pru0_gpi7 PRU-ICSS0 PRU0 Data In I L24

pr0_pru0_gpi8 PRU-ICSS0 PRU0 Data In I B1

pr0_pru0_gpi9 PRU-ICSS0 PRU0 Data In I B2

pr0_pru0_gpi10 PRU-ICSS0 PRU0 Data In I C2

pr0_pru0_gpi11 PRU-ICSS0 PRU0 Data In I C1

pr0_pru0_gpi12 PRU-ICSS0 PRU0 Data In I D1

pr0_pru0_gpi13 PRU-ICSS0 PRU0 Data In I D2

pr0_pru0_gpi14 PRU-ICSS0 PRU0 Data In I AC20

pr0_pru0_gpi15 PRU-ICSS0 PRU0 Data In I AB19

pr0_pru0_gpi16 PRU-ICSS0 PRU0 Data In Capture Enable I AA19

pr0_pru0_gpi17 PRU-ICSS0 PRU0 Data In I AC24

pr0_pru0_gpi18 PRU-ICSS0 PRU0 Data In I H25

pr0_pru0_gpi19 PRU-ICSS0 PRU0 Data In I H24

Table 4-44. PRU-ICSS0-PRU0/General Purpose Outputs Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

pr0_pru0_gpo0 PRU-ICSS0 PRU0 Data Out O N24

pr0_pru0_gpo1 PRU-ICSS0 PRU0 Data Out O N22

pr0_pru0_gpo2 PRU-ICSS0 PRU0 Data Out O H23

pr0_pru0_gpo3 PRU-ICSS0 PRU0 Data Out O M24

pr0_pru0_gpo4 PRU-ICSS0 PRU0 Data Out O L23

pr0_pru0_gpo5 PRU-ICSS0 PRU0 Data Out O K23

pr0_pru0_gpo6 PRU-ICSS0 PRU0 Data Out O M25

pr0_pru0_gpo7 PRU-ICSS0 PRU0 Data Out O L24

pr0_pru0_gpo8 PRU-ICSS0 PRU0 Data Out O B1

pr0_pru0_gpo9 PRU-ICSS0 PRU0 Data Out O B2

pr0_pru0_gpo10 PRU-ICSS0 PRU0 Data Out O C2

pr0_pru0_gpo11 PRU-ICSS0 PRU0 Data Out O C1

pr0_pru0_gpo12 PRU-ICSS0 PRU0 Data Out O D1

pr0_pru0_gpo13 PRU-ICSS0 PRU0 Data Out O D2

pr0_pru0_gpo14 PRU-ICSS0 PRU0 Data Out O AC20

pr0_pru0_gpo15 PRU-ICSS0 PRU0 Data Out O AB19

pr0_pru0_gpo16 PRU-ICSS0 PRU0 Data Out O AA19

pr0_pru0_gpo17 PRU-ICSS0 PRU0 Data Out O AC24

pr0_pru0_gpo18 PRU-ICSS0 PRU0 Data Out O H25

pr0_pru0_gpo19 PRU-ICSS0 PRU0 Data Out O H24

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 4-45. PRU-ICSS0-PRU1/General Purpose Inputs Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

pr0_pru1_gpi0 PRU-ICSS0 PRU1 Data In I AD24

pr0_pru1_gpi1 PRU-ICSS0 PRU1 Data In I AD25

pr0_pru1_gpi2 PRU-ICSS0 PRU1 Data In I AC23

pr0_pru1_gpi3 PRU-ICSS0 PRU1 Data In I AE21

pr0_pru1_gpi4 PRU-ICSS0 PRU1 Data In I K25

pr0_pru1_gpi5 PRU-ICSS0 PRU1 Data In I J24

pr0_pru1_gpi6 PRU-ICSS0 PRU1 Data In I B23

pr0_pru1_gpi7 PRU-ICSS0 PRU1 Data In I A23

pr0_pru1_gpi8 PRU-ICSS0 PRU1 Data In I A22

pr0_pru1_gpi9 PRU-ICSS0 PRU1 Data In I A24

pr0_pru1_gpi10 PRU-ICSS0 PRU1 Data In I AD21

pr0_pru1_gpi11 PRU-ICSS0 PRU1 Data In I AE22

pr0_pru1_gpi12 PRU-ICSS0 PRU1 Data In I AD22

pr0_pru1_gpi13 PRU-ICSS0 PRU1 Data In I AE23

pr0_pru1_gpi14 PRU-ICSS0 PRU1 Data In I AD23

pr0_pru1_gpi15 PRU-ICSS0 PRU1 Data In I AE24

pr0_pru1_gpi16 PRU-ICSS0 PRU1 Data In Capture Enable I AE18

pr0_pru1_gpi17 PRU-ICSS0 PRU1 Data In I AB18

pr0_pru1_gpi18 PRU-ICSS0 PRU1 Data In I H22

pr0_pru1_gpi19 PRU-ICSS0 PRU1 Data In I K24

Table 4-46. PRU-ICSS0-PRU1/General Purpose Outputs Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

pr0_pru1_gpo0 PRU-ICSS0 PRU1 Data Out O AD24

pr0_pru1_gpo1 PRU-ICSS0 PRU1 Data Out O AD25

pr0_pru1_gpo2 PRU-ICSS0 PRU1 Data Out O AC23

pr0_pru1_gpo3 PRU-ICSS0 PRU1 Data Out O AE21

pr0_pru1_gpo4 PRU-ICSS0 PRU1 Data Out O K25

pr0_pru1_gpo5 PRU-ICSS0 PRU1 Data Out O J24

pr0_pru1_gpo6 PRU-ICSS0 PRU1 Data Out O B23

pr0_pru1_gpo7 PRU-ICSS0 PRU1 Data Out O A23

pr0_pru1_gpo8 PRU-ICSS0 PRU1 Data Out O A22

pr0_pru1_gpo9 PRU-ICSS0 PRU1 Data Out O A24

pr0_pru1_gpo10 PRU-ICSS0 PRU1 Data Out O AD21

pr0_pru1_gpo11 PRU-ICSS0 PRU1 Data Out O AE22

pr0_pru1_gpo12 PRU-ICSS0 PRU1 Data Out O AD22

pr0_pru1_gpo13 PRU-ICSS0 PRU1 Data Out O AE23

pr0_pru1_gpo14 PRU-ICSS0 PRU1 Data Out O AD23

pr0_pru1_gpo15 PRU-ICSS0 PRU1 Data Out O AE24

pr0_pru1_gpo16 PRU-ICSS0 PRU1 Data Out O AE18

pr0_pru1_gpo17 PRU-ICSS0 PRU1 Data Out O AB18

pr0_pru1_gpo18 PRU-ICSS0 PRU1 Data Out O H22

pr0_pru1_gpo19 PRU-ICSS0 PRU1 Data Out O K24

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 4-47. PRU-ICSS0/UART0 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

pr0_uart0_cts_n UART Clear to Send I P23

pr0_uart0_rts_n UART Request to Send O T22

pr0_uart0_rxd UART Receive Data I T21

pr0_uart0_txd UART Transmit Data O T20

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

4.3.14 PRU-ICSS1 Interface

Table 4-48. PRU-ICSS1-PRU0/General Purpose Inputs Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

pr1_pru0_gpi0 PRU-ICSS1 PRU0 Data In I B22

pr1_pru0_gpi1 PRU-ICSS1 PRU0 Data In I A21

pr1_pru0_gpi2 PRU-ICSS1 PRU0 Data In I B21

pr1_pru0_gpi3 PRU-ICSS1 PRU0 Data In I C21

pr1_pru0_gpi4 PRU-ICSS1 PRU0 Data In I A20

pr1_pru0_gpi5 PRU-ICSS1 PRU0 Data In I B20

pr1_pru0_gpi6 PRU-ICSS1 PRU0 Data In I C20

pr1_pru0_gpi7 PRU-ICSS1 PRU0 Data In I E19

pr1_pru0_gpi8 PRU-ICSS1 PRU0 Data In I B9

pr1_pru0_gpi9 PRU-ICSS1 PRU0 Data In I F10

pr1_pru0_gpi10 PRU-ICSS1 PRU0 Data In I E11

pr1_pru0_gpi11 PRU-ICSS1 PRU0 Data In I C11

pr1_pru0_gpi16 PRU-ICSS1 PRU0 Data In Capture Enable I B11,C24,D24,K21,

L21

Table 4-49. PRU-ICSS1-PRU0/General Purpose Outputs Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

pr1_pru0_gpo0 PRU-ICSS1 PRU0 Data Out O B22

pr1_pru0_gpo1 PRU-ICSS1 PRU0 Data Out O A21

pr1_pru0_gpo2 PRU-ICSS1 PRU0 Data Out O B21

pr1_pru0_gpo3 PRU-ICSS1 PRU0 Data Out O C21

pr1_pru0_gpo4 PRU-ICSS1 PRU0 Data Out O A20

pr1_pru0_gpo5 PRU-ICSS1 PRU0 Data Out O B20

pr1_pru0_gpo6 PRU-ICSS1 PRU0 Data Out O C20

pr1_pru0_gpo7 PRU-ICSS1 PRU0 Data Out O E19

pr1_pru0_gpo8 PRU-ICSS1 PRU0 Data Out O B9

pr1_pru0_gpo9 PRU-ICSS1 PRU0 Data Out O F10

pr1_pru0_gpo10 PRU-ICSS1 PRU0 Data Out O E11

pr1_pru0_gpo11 PRU-ICSS1 PRU0 Data Out O C11

Table 4-50. PRU-ICSS1/ECAT Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

pr1_edc_latch0_in Data In I AE22,K22

pr1_edc_latch1_in Data In I AD22,L22

pr1_edc_sync0_out Data Out O L25

pr1_edc_sync1_out Data Out O J25

pr1_edio_data_in0 Data In I AD23

pr1_edio_data_in1 Data In I AE24

pr1_edio_data_in2 Data In I B23

pr1_edio_data_in3 Data In I A23

pr1_edio_data_in4 Data In I A22

pr1_edio_data_in5 Data In I A24

pr1_edio_data_in6 Data In I B9,C20

pr1_edio_data_in7 Data In I E19,F10

pr1_edio_data_out0 Data Out O T21

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 4-50. PRU-ICSS1/ECAT Signal Descriptions (continued)

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

pr1_edio_data_out1 Data Out O T20

pr1_edio_data_out2 Data Out O B23

pr1_edio_data_out3 Data Out O A23

pr1_edio_data_out4 Data Out O A22

pr1_edio_data_out5 Data Out O A24

pr1_edio_data_out6 Data Out O B9,C20

pr1_edio_data_out7 Data Out O E19,F10

pr1_edio_latch_in Latch In I AE23

pr1_edio_outvalid Data Out Valid O AD18

pr1_edio_sof Start of Frame O AB25,AE17

Table 4-51. PRU-ICSS1/MDIO Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

pr1_mdio_data MDIO Data IO A17,B12,D24

pr1_mdio_mdclk MDIO Clk O A12,B17,C24

Table 4-52. PRU-ICSS1/MII0 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

pr1_mii0_col MII Collision Detect I A10,D25

pr1_mii0_crs MII Carrier Sense I B12,G20

pr1_mii0_rxd0 MII Receive Data bit 0 I B18

pr1_mii0_rxd1 MII Receive Data bit 1 I A18

pr1_mii0_rxd2 MII Receive Data bit 2 I B19

pr1_mii0_rxd3 MII Receive Data bit 3 I A19

pr1_mii0_rxdv MII Receive Data Valid I D17

pr1_mii0_rxer MII Receive Data Error I D19

pr1_mii0_rxlink MII Receive Link I C19,E25

pr1_mii0_txd0 MII Transmit Data bit 0 O B11,B20

pr1_mii0_txd1 MII Transmit Data bit 1 O A20,C11

pr1_mii0_txd2 MII Transmit Data bit 2 O C21,E11

pr1_mii0_txd3 MII Transmit Data bit 3 O B21,D11

pr1_mii0_txen MII Transmit Enable O A21,F11

pr1_mii_mr0_clk MII Receive Clock I C17

pr1_mii_mt0_clk MII Transmit Clock I B10,B22

Table 4-53. PRU-ICSS1/MII1 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

pr1_mii1_col MII Collision Detect I A3,F24

pr1_mii1_crs MII Carrier Sense I A12,A2,F23

pr1_mii1_rxd0 MII Receive Data bit 0 I D8

pr1_mii1_rxd1 MII Receive Data bit 1 I G8

pr1_mii1_rxd2 MII Receive Data bit 2 I B4

pr1_mii1_rxd3 MII Receive Data bit 3 I F7

pr1_mii1_rxdv MII Receive Data Valid I C5

pr1_mii1_rxer MII Receive Data Error I B3

pr1_mii1_rxlink MII Receive Link I C10,E24

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 4-53. PRU-ICSS1/MII1 Signal Descriptions (continued)

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

pr1_mii1_txd0 MII Transmit Data bit 0 O E7

pr1_mii1_txd1 MII Transmit Data bit 1 O D7

pr1_mii1_txd2 MII Transmit Data bit 2 O A4

pr1_mii1_txd3 MII Transmit Data bit 3 O C6

pr1_mii1_txen MII Transmit Enable O C3

pr1_mii_mr1_clk MII Receive Clock I F6

pr1_mii_mt1_clk MII Transmit Clock I E8

Table 4-54. PRU-ICSS1/UART0 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

pr1_uart0_cts_n UART Clear to Send I K22,P23

pr1_uart0_rts_n UART Request to Send O L22,T22

pr1_uart0_rxd UART Receive Data I K21,T21

pr1_uart0_txd UART Transmit Data O L21,T20

Table 4-55. PRU-ICSS1/eCAP Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

pr1_ecap0_ecap_capin_apwm_o Enhanced capture input or Auxiliary PWM out IO A11,G24

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

4.3.15 QSPI Interface

Table 4-56. QSPI Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

qspi_clk QSPI Clock IO B12,Y18

qspi_csn QSPI Chip Select O A8,AA18

qspi_d0 QSPI Data IO A9,AE19

qspi_d1 QSPI Data I AD19,E10

qspi_d2 QSPI Data I AE20,D10

qspi_d3 QSPI Data I AD20,C10

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

4.3.16 RTC Subsystem Interface

Table 4-57. RTC Subsystem Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

RTC_KALDO_ENn Active low enable input for internal CAP_VDD_RTC

voltage regulator IAE2

RTC_PMIC_EN PMIC Power Enable output generated from Generic

RTCSS OAD6

RTC_WAKEUP External Wakeup Pin when Generic RTC is used I AE3

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

4.3.17 Removable Media Interfaces

Table 4-58. MMC0 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

mmc0_clk MMC/SD/SDIO Clock IO D1

mmc0_cmd MMC/SD/SDIO Command IO D2

mmc0_dat0 MMC/SD/SDIO Data Bus IO C1

mmc0_dat1 MMC/SD/SDIO Data Bus IO C2

mmc0_dat2 MMC/SD/SDIO Data Bus IO B2

mmc0_dat3 MMC/SD/SDIO Data Bus IO B1

mmc0_dat4 MMC/SD/SDIO Data Bus IO E16

mmc0_dat5 MMC/SD/SDIO Data Bus IO C14

mmc0_dat6 MMC/SD/SDIO Data Bus IO D13

mmc0_dat7 MMC/SD/SDIO Data Bus IO D14

mmc0_pow MMC/SD Power Switch Control O A16,R25

mmc0_sdcd SD Card Detect I A17,N24,R25

mmc0_sdwp SD Write Protect I B17,G24,L23

Table 4-59. MMC1 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

mmc1_clk MMC/SD/SDIO Clock IO B15,B17,B9,Y18

mmc1_cmd MMC/SD/SDIO Command IO A14,A17,AA18,F10

mmc1_dat0 MMC/SD/SDIO Data Bus IO AE19,B10,B5,D14

mmc1_dat1 MMC/SD/SDIO Data Bus IO A10,A5,AD19,D13

mmc1_dat2 MMC/SD/SDIO Data Bus IO AE20,B6,C14,F11

mmc1_dat3 MMC/SD/SDIO Data Bus IO A6,AD20,D11,E16

mmc1_dat4 MMC/SD/SDIO Data Bus IO B7,E11

mmc1_dat5 MMC/SD/SDIO Data Bus IO A7,C11

mmc1_dat6 MMC/SD/SDIO Data Bus IO B11,C8

mmc1_dat7 MMC/SD/SDIO Data Bus IO A11,B8

mmc1_sdcd SD Card Detect I A2,N22

mmc1_sdwp SD Write Protect I K21,T21

Table 4-60. MMC2 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

mmc2_clk MMC/SD/SDIO Clock IO A12,AD21,B16,B17

mmc2_cmd MMC/SD/SDIO Command IO A13,A17,AE22,B12

mmc2_dat0 MMC/SD/SDIO Data Bus IO A15,AD22,C5,E11

mmc2_dat1 MMC/SD/SDIO Data Bus IO AE23,C11,C16,C6

mmc2_dat2 MMC/SD/SDIO Data Bus IO A4,AD23,B11,C13

mmc2_dat3 MMC/SD/SDIO Data Bus IO A11,A3,AE24,D16

mmc2_dat4 MMC/SD/SDIO Data Bus IO B10,E8

mmc2_dat5 MMC/SD/SDIO Data Bus IO A10,F6

mmc2_dat6 MMC/SD/SDIO Data Bus IO F11,F7

mmc2_dat7 MMC/SD/SDIO Data Bus IO B4,D11

mmc2_sdcd SD Card Detect I B3,H23

mmc2_sdwp SD Write Protect I L21,T20

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

4.3.18 SPI Interfaces

Table 4-61. SPI0 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

spi0_cs0 SPI Chip Select IO T20

spi0_cs1 SPI Chip Select IO R25

spi0_cs2 SPI Chip Select IO AD24,C24,E10

spi0_cs3 SPI Chip Select IO A9,AD25,N24

spi0_d0 SPI Data IO T22

spi0_d1 SPI Data IO T21

spi0_sclk SPI Clock IO P23

Table 4-62. SPI1 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

spi1_cs0 SPI Chip Select IO A16,J25,K22,K25,

M24

spi1_cs1 SPI Chip Select IO D24,G24,J24,L22

spi1_cs2 SPI Chip Select IO AC23,D10,N22

spi1_cs3 SPI Chip Select IO AE21,C10,H23

spi1_d0 SPI Data IO B14,L25,N22

spi1_d1 SPI Data IO B13,H23,J25

spi1_sclk SPI Clock IO D16,G24,N24

Table 4-63. SPI2 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

spi2_cs0 SPI Chip Select IO AC20,AD25,T23

spi2_cs1 SPI Chip Select IO AC25,AE17

spi2_cs2 SPI Chip Select IO AB19,AC23

spi2_cs3 SPI Chip Select IO AA19,AC24

spi2_d0 SPI Data IO AD17,AD24,P22

spi2_d1 SPI Data IO AB25,AD18,P20

spi2_sclk SPI Clock IO AC18,AE21,N20

Table 4-64. SPI3 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

spi3_cs0 SPI Chip Select IO AD21,D11,D17

spi3_cs1 SPI Chip Select IO A11,B10,B18,C10

spi3_d0 SPI Data IO A10,AB20,D19

spi3_d1 SPI Data IO AC21,C17,F11

spi3_sclk SPI Clock IO AE22,B10,C19

Table 4-65. SPI4 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

spi4_cs0 SPI Chip Select IO N25

spi4_cs1 SPI Chip Select IO H22

spi4_d0 SPI Data IO R24

spi4_d1 SPI Data IO P24

spi4_sclk SPI Clock IO P25

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

4.3.19 Timer Interfaces

Table 4-66. Timer0 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

timer0 Timer trigger event / PWM out IO R25

Table 4-67. Timer1 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

timer1 Timer trigger event / PWM out IO G24

Table 4-68. Timer4 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

timer4 Timer trigger event / PWM out IO A13,A9,AB24,D24

Table 4-69. Timer5 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

timer5 Timer trigger event / PWM out IO B1,B17,C10,L22

Table 4-70. Timer6 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

timer6 Timer trigger event / PWM out IO A17,B2,D10,K22

Table 4-71. Timer7 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

timer7 Timer trigger event / PWM out IO C24,E10,L25,Y22

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

4.3.20 UART Interfaces

Table 4-72. UART0 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

uart0_ctsn UART Clear to Send I AC24,L25

uart0_dcdn UART Data Carrier Detect I AD22

uart0_rtsn UART Request to Send O AD24,J25

uart0_rxd UART Receive Data I K25

uart0_txd UART Transmit Data O J24

Table 4-73. UART1 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

uart1_ctsn UART Clear to Send IO AD21,K22

uart1_dcdn UART Clear to Send I AD23,B1,D14

uart1_dsrn UART Request to Send I AE23,B2,D13

uart1_dtrn UART Receive Data O AE24,C14,C2

uart1_rin UART Transmit Data I AD22,C1,E16

uart1_rtsn UART Request to Send O AE22,L22

uart1_rxd UART Receive Data IO AB20,K21

uart1_txd UART Transmit Data IO AC21,L21

Table 4-74. UART2 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

uart2_ctsn UART Clear to Send IO A19,AB24,AD23

uart2_rtsn UART Request to Send O AE24,B19,Y22

uart2_rxd UART Receive Data IO AD22,B14,D1,D14,

P23

uart2_txd UART Transmit Data IO AE23,B13,D13,D2,

T22

Table 4-75. UART3 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

uart3_ctsn UART Clear to Send IO A17,A18,D1,H22

uart3_rtsn UART Request to Send O B17,B18,D2,K24

uart3_rxd UART Receive Data IO C14,C2,H25,R25

uart3_txd UART Transmit Data IO C1,E16,G24,H24

Table 4-76. UART4 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

uart4_ctsn UART Clear to Send I B1,C19

uart4_rtsn UART Request to Send O B2,D19

uart4_rxd UART Receive Data I A2,C16,L25

uart4_txd UART Transmit Data O B3,C13,J25

Table 4-77. UART5 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

uart5_ctsn UART Clear to Send I B14,C17,C2

uart5_rtsn UART Request to Send O B13,C1,D17

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 4-77. UART5 Signal Descriptions (continued)

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

uart5_rxd UART Receive Data I A17,B19,C17,D16

uart5_txd UART Transmit Data O A15,A16,A19,B17

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

4.3.21 USB Interfaces

Table 4-78. USB0 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

USB0_CE USB0 Active high Charger Enable output A W22

USB0_DM USB0 Data minus A W24

USB0_DP USB0 Data plus A W25

USB0_DRVVBUS USB0 Active high VBUS control output O G21

USB0_ID USB0 ID A U24

USB0_VBUS USB0 VBUS A U23

Table 4-79. USB1 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

USB1_CE USB1 Active high Charger Enable output A U22

USB1_DM USB1 Data minus A V25

USB1_DP USB1 Data plus A V24

USB1_DRVVBUS USB1 Active high VBUS control output O F25

USB1_ID USB1 ID A U25

USB1_VBUS USB1 VBUS A T25

100

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

4.3.22 eCAP Interfaces

Table 4-80. eCAP0 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

eCAP0_in_PWM0_out Enhanced Capture 0 input or Auxiliary PWM0 output IO G24

Table 4-81. eCAP1 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

eCAP1_in_PWM1_out Enhanced Capture 1 input or Auxiliary PWM1 output IO J24,R25,Y22

Table 4-82. eCAP2 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

eCAP2_in_PWM2_out Enhanced Capture 2 input or Auxiliary PWM2 output IO AB24,K25,M24

101

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

4.3.23 eHRPWM Interfaces

Table 4-83. eHRPWM0 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

ehrpwm0_synci Sync input to eHRPWM0 module from an external pin I AC21,M24,P25,T20

ehrpwm0_synco Sync Output from eHRPWM0 module to an external pin O AE18,B19,C21,C5,

D11

ehrpwm0_tripzone_input eHRPWM0 trip zone input I AB20,H23,P24,T21

ehrpwm0A eHRPWM0 A output. O AD25,N24,P23

ehrpwm0B eHRPWM0 B output. O AC23,N22,T22

Table 4-84. eHRPWM1 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

ehrpwm1_tripzone_input eHRPWM1 trip zone input I A19,AD21,C3,P20

ehrpwm1A eHRPWM1 A output. O A18,AE20,AE21,

C6,T21

ehrpwm1B eHRPWM1 B output. O A4,AC25,AD20,

B18,T20

Table 4-85. eHRPWM2 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

ehrpwm2_tripzone_input eHRPWM2 trip zone input I B21,F11,T23

ehrpwm2A eHRPWM2 A output. O B10,B22,R25

ehrpwm2B eHRPWM2 B output. O A10,A21,G24

Table 4-86. eHRPWM3 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

ehrpwm3_synci Sync input to eHRPWM3 module or sync output to

external PWM IR24

ehrpwm3_synco Sync input to eHRPWM3 module or sync output to

external PWM OAB18

ehrpwm3_tripzone_input eHRPWM3 trip zone input I N25

ehrpwm3A eHRPWM3 A output. O AC25,AE19

ehrpwm3B eHRPWM3 B output. O AB25,AD19

Table 4-87. eHRPWM4 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

ehrpwm4_tripzone_input eHRPWM4 trip zone input I N20

ehrpwm4A eHRPWM4 A output. O H25

ehrpwm4B eHRPWM4 B output. O H24

Table 4-88. eHRPWM5 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

ehrpwm5_tripzone_input eHRPWM5 trip zone input I P22

ehrpwm5A eHRPWM5 A output. O H22

ehrpwm5B eHRPWM5 B output. O K24

102

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

4.3.24 eQEP Interfaces

Table 4-89. eQEP0 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

eQEP0_index eQEP0 index. IO A13,M25

eQEP0_strobe eQEP0 strobe. IO B16,L24

eQEP0A_in eQEP0A quadrature input I A14,L23

eQEP0B_in eQEP0B quadrature input I B15,K23

Table 4-90. eQEP1 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

eQEP1_index eQEP1 index. IO C17,E8

eQEP1_strobe eQEP1 strobe. IO D17,F6

eQEP1A_in eQEP1A quadrature input I C19,D7

eQEP1B_in eQEP1B quadrature input I D19,E7

Table 4-91. eQEP2 Signal Descriptions

SIGNAL NAME [1] DESCRIPTION [2] TYPE [3] ZDN [4]

eQEP2_index eQEP2 index. IO B11,C20

eQEP2_strobe eQEP2 strobe. IO A11,E19

eQEP2A_in eQEP2A quadrature input I A20,E11

eQEP2B_in eQEP2B quadrature input I B20,C11

103

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5 Specifications

5.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings

over junction temperature range (unless otherwise noted)(1)(2)

MIN MAX UNIT

VDD_MPU Supply voltage for the MPU domain –0.5 1.5 V

VDD_CORE Supply voltage range for the CORE domain –0.5 1.5 V

CAP_VDD_RTC(3) Supply voltage range for the RTC domain –0.5 1.5 V

VDDS_RTC Supply voltage range for the RTC domain –0.5 2.1 V

VDDS_OSC Supply voltage range for the System oscillator –0.5 2.1 V

VDDS_SRAM_CORE_BG Supply voltage range for the Core SRAM and Bandgap LDOs –0.5 2.1 V

VDDS_SRAM_MPU_BB Supply voltage range for the MPU SRAM and BB LDOs –0.5 2.1 V

VDDS_PLL_DDR Supply voltage range for the DPLL DDR –0.5 2.1 V

VDDS_PLL_CORE_LCD Supply voltage range for the DPLL CORE, EXTDEV, and LCD –0.5 2.1 V

VDDS_PLL_MPU Supply voltage range for the DPLL MPU –0.5 2.1 V

VDDS_DDR Supply voltage range for the DDR IO domain –0.5 2.1 V

VDDS Supply voltage range for all dual-voltage IO domains –0.5 2.1 V

VDDA1P8V_USB0 Supply voltage range for USBPHY and DPLL PER –0.5 2.1 V

VDDA1P8V_USB1 Supply voltage range for USBPHY –0.5 2.1 V

VDDA_ADC0 Supply voltage range for ADC0 –0.5 2.1 V

VDDA_ADC1 Supply voltage range for ADC1 –0.5 2.1 V

VDDSHV1 Supply voltage range for the dual-voltage IO domain –0.5 3.8 V

VDDSHV2 Supply voltage range for the dual-voltage IO domain –0.5 3.8 V

VDDSHV3 Supply voltage range for the dual-voltage IO domain –0.5 3.8 V

VDDSHV5 Supply voltage range for the CLKOUT voltage domain –0.5 3.8 V

VDDSHV6 Supply voltage range for the dual-voltage IO domain –0.5 3.8 V

VDDSHV7 Supply voltage range for the dual-voltage IO domain –0.5 3.8 V

VDDSHV8 Supply voltage range for the dual-voltage IO domain –0.5 3.8 V

VDDSHV9 Supply voltage range for the dual-voltage IO domain –0.5 3.8 V

VDDSHV10 Supply voltage range for the dual-voltage IO domain –0.5 3.8 V

VDDSHV11 Supply voltage range for the dual-voltage IO domain –0.5 3.8 V

VDDA3P3V_USB0 Supply voltage range for USBPHY –0.5 4 V

VDDA3P3V_USB1 Supply voltage range for USBPHY –0.5 4 V

VDDS3P3V_IOLDO Supply voltage range for the dual-voltage IO LDO –0.5 3.8 V

VDDS_CLKOUT Supply voltage range for CLKOUT domain –0.5 2.1 V

USB0_VBUS(4) Supply voltage range for USB VBUS comparator input –0.5 5.25 V

USB1_VBUS(4) Supply voltage range for USB VBUS comparator input –0.5 5.25 V

DDR_VREF Supply voltage range for the DDR3/DDR3L HSTL, LPDDR2

HSUL_12 reference voltage –0.3 1.1 V

Steady State Max. Voltage at all

IO pins(5) –0.5 V to IO supply voltage + 0.3 V

USB0_ID(6) Steady state maximum voltage range for the USB ID input –0.5 2.1 V

USB1_ID(6) Steady state maximum voltage range for the USB ID input –0.5 2.1 V

Transient Overshoot and

Undershoot specification at IO

terminal

20% of corresponding IO supply voltage for

up to 20% of signal period (see Figure 5-1)

Latch-up Performance(7) Class II (105°C)

Latch-up I-test performance current-pulse

injection on each IO pin ±100 mA

Latch-up overvoltage performance voltage

injection on each IO pin ±100

Tstg(8) Storage temperature –55 155 °C

(1) Stresses beyond those listed under Absolute Maximum Ratings may cause permanent damage to the device. These are stress ratings

only, and functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated under Recommended Operating

Conditions is not implied. Exposure to absolute-maximum-rated conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.

(2) All voltage values are with respect to their associated VSS or VSSA_x.

Tovershoot

Tundershoot

Tperiod

Overshoot = 20% of nominal

IO supply voltage

Undershoot = 20% of nominal

IO supply voltage

104

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Absolute Maximum Ratings (continued)

over junction temperature range (unless otherwise noted)(1)(2)

(3) This supply is sourced from an internal LDO when RTC_KALDO_ENn is low. If RTC_KALDO_ENn is high, this supply must be sourced

from an external power supply.

(4) This terminal is connected to a fail-safe IO and does not have a dependence on any IO supply voltage.

(5) This parameter applies to all IO terminals which are not fail-safe and the requirement applies to all values of IO supply voltage. For

example, if the voltage applied to a specific IO supply is 0 volts the valid input voltage range for any IO powered by that supply will be

–0.5 to +0.3 volts. Special attention should be applied anytime peripheral devices are not powered from the same power sources used

to power the respective IO supply. It is important the attached peripheral never sources a voltage outside the valid input voltage range,

including power supply ramp-up and ramp-down sequences.

(6) This terminal is connected to analog circuits in the respective USB PHY. The circuit sources a known current while measuring the

voltage to determine if the terminal is connected to VSSA_USB with a resistance less than 10 Ωor greater than 100 kΩ. The terminal

should be connected to ground for USB host operation or open-circuit for USB peripheral operation, and should never be connected to

any external voltage source.

(7) For current pulse injection:

Pins stressed per JEDEC JESD78D (Class II) and passed with specified I/O pin injection current and clamp voltage of 1.5 times

maximum recommended I/O voltage and negative 0.5 times maximum recommended I/O voltage.

For overvoltage performance:

Supplies stressed per JEDEC JESD78D (Class II) and passed specified voltage injection.

(8) For tape and reel the storage temperature range is [–10°C; +50°C] with a maximum relative humidity of 70%. TI recommends returning

to ambient room temperature before usage.

Fail-safe IO terminals are designed such they do not have dependencies on the respective IO power

supply voltage. This allows external voltage sources to be connected to these IO terminals when the

respective IO power supplies are turned off. The USB0_VBUS, USB1_VBUS, and DDR_RESETn are the

only fail-safe IO terminals. All other IO terminals are not fail-safe and the voltage applied to them should

be limited to the value defined by the Steady State Max. Voltage at all IO pins parameter in Section 5.1.

Figure 5-1. Tovershoot + Tundershoot < 20% of Tperiod

105

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.2 ESD Ratings

VALUE UNIT

VESD Electrostatic discharge

(ESD) Human body model (HBM), per ANSI/ESDA/JEDEC JS-001(1) ±1000 V

Charged device model (CDM), per JESD22-C101(2) ±250

(1) JEDEC document JEP155 states that 500-V HBM allows safe manufacturing with a standard ESD control process.

(2) JEDEC document JEP157 states that 250-V CDM allows safe manufacturing with a standard ESD control process.

5.3 Power-On Hours (POH)(1)(2)(3)(4)

OPERATING

CONDITION

COMMERCIAL INDUSTRIAL EXTENDED

JUNCTION TEMP

(Tj)LIFETIME

(POH)(5) JUNCTION TEMP

(Tj)LIFETIME

(POH)(5) JUNCTION TEMP

(Tj)LIFETIME

(POH)(5)

Nitro 0°C to 90°C 100K –40°C to 90°C 100K –40°C to 105°C 84.4K

Turbo 0°C to 90°C 100K –40°C to 90°C 100K –40°C to 105°C 100K

OPP120 0°C to 90°C 100K –40°C to 90°C 100K –40°C to 105°C 100K

OPP100 0°C to 90°C 100K –40°C to 90°C 100K –40°C to 105°C 100K

OPP50 0°C to 90°C 100K –40°C to 90°C 100K –40°C to 105°C 100K

(1) The POH information in this table is provided solely for your convenience and does not extend or modify the warranty provided under

TI's standard terms and conditions for TI semiconductor products.

(2) To avoid significant degradation, the device POH must be limited as described in this table.

(3) Logic functions and parameter values are not assured out of the range specified in the recommended operating conditions.

(4) The previous notations cannot be deemed a warranty or deemed to extend or modify the warranty under TI's standard terms and

conditions for TI semiconductor products.

(5) POH = Power-on hours when the device is fully functional.

106

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.4 Operating Performance Points

Device operating performance points (OPPs) are defined in Table 5-1,Table 5-2, and Table 5-3.

Table 5-1. VDD_CORE OPPs(1)

VDD_CORE OPP VDD_CORE DDR3/DDR3L(2) LPDDR2(2) L3 and L4

MIN NOM MAX

OPP100 1.056 V 1.100 V 1.144 V 400 MHz 266 MHz 200 MHz and

100 MHz

OPP50 0.912 V 0.950 V 1 V Not supported 133 MHz 100 MHz and

50 MHz

(1) Frequencies in this table indicate maximum performance for a given OPP condition.

(2) This parameter represents the maximum memory clock frequency. Because data is transferred on both edges of the clock, double-data

rate (DDR), the maximum data rate is two times the maximum memory clock frequency defined in this table.

Table 5-2. VDD_MPU OPPs(1)

VDD_MPU OPP VDD_MPU ARM (A9)

MIN NOM MAX

Nitro 1.272 V 1.325 V 1.378 V 1 GHz

Turbo 1.210 V 1.260 V 1.326 V 800 MHz

OPP120 1.152 V 1.200 V 1.248 V 720 MHz

OPP100 1.056 V 1.100 V 1.144 V 600 MHz

OPP50 0.912 V 0.950 V 1.000 V 300 MHz

(1) Frequencies in this table indicate maximum performance for a given OPP condition.

Table 5-3. Valid Combinations of VDD_CORE and

VDD_MPU OPPs(1)

VDD_CORE VDD_MPU

OPP50 OPP50

OPP100 OPP50

OPP100 OPP100

OPP100 OPP120

OPP100 Turbo

OPP100 Nitro

(1) OPP combinations listed in this table have been tested. Other OPP combinations are not supported.

107

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.5 Recommended Operating Conditions

over junction temperature range (unless otherwise noted)

SUPPLY NAME DESCRIPTION MIN NOM MAX UNIT

VDD_CORE Supply voltage range for core domain; OPP100 1.056 1.100 1.144 V

Supply voltage range for core domain; OPP50 0.912 0.950 1.000

VDD_MPU

Supply voltage range for MPU domain, Nitro 1.272 1.325 1.378

Supply voltage range for MPU domain; Turbo 1.210 1.260 1.326

Supply voltage range for MPU domain; OPP120 1.152 1.200 1.248

Supply voltage range for MPU domain; OPP100 1.056 1.100 1.144

Supply voltage range for MPU domain; OPP50 0.912 0.950 1.000

CAP_VDD_RTC(1) Supply voltage range for RTC core domain 0.900 1.100 1.250 V

VDDS_RTC Supply voltage range for RTC domain 1.710 1.800 1.890 V

VDDS_DDR

Supply voltage range for DDR IO domain (DDR3) 1.425 1.500 1.575

VSupply voltage range for DDR IO domain (DDR3L) 1.283 1.350 1.418

Supply voltage range for DDR IO domain (LPDDR2) 1.140 1.200 1.260

VDDS(2) Supply voltage range for all dual-voltage IO domains 1.710 1.800 1.890 V

VDDS_SRAM_CORE_BG Supply voltage range for Core SRAM LDOs, Analog 1.710 1.800 1.890 V

VDDS_SRAM_MPU_BB Supply voltage range for MPU SRAM LDOs, Analog 1.710 1.800 1.890 V

VDDS_PLL_DDR(3) Supply voltage range for DPLL DDR, Analog 1.710 1.800 1.890 V

VDDS_PLL_CORE_LCD(3) Supply voltage range for DPLL CORE, EXTDEV, and LCD,

Analog 1.710 1.800 1.890 V

VDDS_PLL_MPU(3) Supply voltage range for DPLL MPU, Analog 1.710 1.800 1.890 V

VDDS_OSC Supply voltage range for system oscillator, Analog 1.710 1.800 1.890 V

VDDA1P8V_USB0(3) Supply voltage range for USBPHY and DPLL PER, Analog,

1.8 V 1.710 1.800 1.890 V

VDDA1P8V_USB1 Supply voltage range for USBPHY, Analog, 1.8 V 1.710 1.800 1.890 V

VDDA3P3V_USB0 Supply voltage range for USBPHY, Analog, 3.3 V 3.135 3.300 3.465 V

VDDA3P3V_USB1 Supply voltage range for USBPHY, Analog, 3.3 V 3.135 3.300 3.465 V

VDDA_ADC0 Supply voltage range for ADC0, Analog 1.710 1.800 1.890 V

VDDA_ADC1 Supply voltage range for ADC1, Analog 1.710 1.800 1.890 V

VDDSHV1 Supply voltage range for dual-voltage IO

domain 1.8-V operation 1.710 1.800 1.890 V

3.3-V operation 3.135 3.300 3.465

VDDSHV2 Supply voltage range for dual-voltage IO

domain 1.8-V operation 1.710 1.800 1.890 V

3.3-V operation 3.135 3.300 3.465

VDDSHV3 Supply voltage range for dual-voltage IO

domain 1.8-V operation 1.710 1.800 1.890 V

3.3-V operation 3.135 3.300 3.465

VDDSHV5 Supply voltage range for CLKOUT voltage

domain 1.8-V operation 1.710 1.800 1.890 V

3.3-V operation 3.135 3.300 3.465

VDDSHV6 Supply voltage range for dual-voltage IO

domain 1.8-V operation 1.710 1.800 1.890 V

3.3-V operation 3.135 3.300 3.465

VDDSHV7 Supply voltage range for dual-voltage IO

domain 1.8-V operation 1.710 1.800 1.890 V

3.3-V operation 3.135 3.300 3.465

VDDSHV8 Supply voltage range for dual-voltage IO

domain 1.8-V operation 1.710 1.800 1.890 V

3.3-V operation 3.135 3.300 3.465

VDDSHV9 Supply voltage range for dual-voltage IO

domain 1.8-V operation 1.710 1.800 1.890 V

3.3-V operation 3.135 3.300 3.465

VDDSHV10 Supply voltage range for dual-voltage IO

domain 1.8-V operation 1.710 1.800 1.890 V

3.3-V operation 3.135 3.300 3.465

VDDSHV11 Supply voltage range for dual-voltage IO

domain 1.8-V operation 1.710 1.800 1.890 V

3.3-V operation 3.135 3.300 3.465

DDR_VREF Supply voltage range for the DDR3/DDR3L HSTL, LPDDR2

HSUL_12 reference input 0.49 ×

VDDS_DDR 0.50 ×

VDDS_DDR 0.51 ×

VDDS_DDR V

VDDS3P3V_IOLDO Supply voltage range for the dual-voltage IO LDO 3.135 3.3 3.465 V

VDDS_CLKOUT Supply voltage range for CLKOUT domain 1.71 1.8 1.89 V

108

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Recommended Operating Conditions (continued)

over junction temperature range (unless otherwise noted)

SUPPLY NAME DESCRIPTION MIN NOM MAX UNIT

USB0_VBUS Voltage range for USB VBUS comparator input 0.000 5.000 5.250 V

USB1_VBUS Voltage range for USB VBUS comparator input 0.000 5.000 5.250 V

USB0_ID Voltage range for the USB ID input (4) V

USB1_ID Voltage range for the USB ID input (4) V

Operating Temperature

Range, Tj

Commercial Temperature 0 90

°CIndustrial Temperature –40 90

Extended Temperature –40 105

(1) This supply is sourced from an internal LDO when RTC_KALDO_ENn is low. If RTC_KALDO_ENn is high, this supply must be sourced

from an external power supply.

(2) VDDS should be supplied irrespective of 1.8-V or 3.3-V mode of operation of the dual-voltage IOs.

(3) For more details on power supply requirements, see Section 5.13.2.1.1.

(4) This terminal is connected to analog circuits in the respective USB PHY. The circuit sources a known current while measuring the

voltage to determine if the terminal is connected to VSSA_USB with a resistance less than 10 Ωor greater than 100 kΩ. The terminal

should be connected to ground for USB host operation or open-circuit for USB peripheral operation, and should never be connected to

any external voltage source.

109

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

(1) Current ratings specified in this table are worst-case estimates. Actual application power supply estimates could be lower. For more

information, see AM43xx Power Consumption Summary.

(2) This supply is sourced from an internal LDO when RTC_KALDO_ENn is low. If RTC_KALDO_ENn is high, this supply must be sourced

from an external power supply.

5.6 Power Consumption Summary

Table 5-4 summarizes the maximum power consumption at each power terminal.

Note: Data in the Maximum Current Ratings table (Table 5-4) represents worst-case power consumption

based on various applications of the device using practical operating conditions. The data primarily

benefits the power supply designer trying to understand the worst-case power consumption expected from

each power rail.

Table 5-4. Maximum Current Ratings at Power Terminals(1)

PARAMETER MAX UNIT

SUPPLY NAME DESCRIPTION

VDD_CORE Maximum current rating for the core domain; OPP100 600 mA

Maximum current rating for the core domain; OPP50 400 mA

VDD_MPU

Maximum current rating for the MPU domain; Nitro at 1 GHz 1000

Maximum current rating for the MPU domain; Turbo at 800 MHz 800

Maximum current rating for the MPU domain; OPP120 at 720 MHz 720

Maximum current rating for the MPU domain; OPP100 at 600 MHz 600

Maximum current rating for the MPU domain; OPP50 at 300 MHz 350

CAP_VDD_RTC(2) Maximum current rating for RTC domain and LDO output 2 mA

VDDS_RTC Maximum current rating for the RTC domain 5 mA

VDDS_DDR Maximum current rating for DDR IO domain; DDR3/DDR3L 300 mA

Maximum current rating for DDR IO domain; LPDDR2 150

VDDS Maximum current rating for all dual-voltage IO domains 70 mA

VDDS_SRAM_CORE_BG Maximum current rating for core SRAM LDOs 10 mA

VDDS_SRAM_MPU_BB Maximum current rating for MPU SRAM LDOs 10 mA

VDDS_PLL_DDR Maximum current rating for the DPLL DDR 10 mA

VDDS_PLL_CORE_LCD Maximum current rating for the DPLL CORE, EXTDEV, and LCD 20 mA

VDDS_PLL_MPU Maximum current rating for the DPLL MPU 10 mA

VDDS_OSC Maximum current rating for the system oscillator 5 mA

VDDA1P8V_USB0 Maximum current rating for USBPHY 1.8 V and DPLL PER 25 mA

VDDA1P8V_USB1 Maximum current rating for USBPHY 1.8 V 25 mA

VDDA3P3V_USB0 Maximum current rating for USBPHY 3.3 V 40 mA

VDDA3P3V_USB1 Maximum current rating for USBPHY 3.3 V 40 mA

VDDS3P3V_IOLDO Maximum current rating for the dual-voltage IO LDO 30 mA

VDDA_ADC0 Maximum current rating for ADC0 10 mA

VDDA_ADC1 Maximum current rating for ADC1 10 mA

VDDSHV1 Maximum current rating for dual-voltage IO domain 30 mA

VDDSHV2 Maximum current rating for dual-voltage IO domain 80 mA

VDDSHV3 Maximum current rating for dual-voltage IO domain 100 mA

VDDSHV5 Maximum current rating for dual-voltage IO domain 10 mA

VDDSHV6 Maximum current rating for dual-voltage IO domain 50 mA

VDDSHV7 Maximum current rating for dual-voltage IO domain 10 mA

VDDSHV8 Maximum current rating for dual-voltage IO domain 50 mA

VDDSHV9 Maximum current rating for dual-voltage IO domain 50 mA

VDDSHV10 Maximum current rating for dual-voltage IO domain 50 mA

VDDSHV11 Maximum current rating for dual-voltage IO domain 50 mA

VDDS_CLKOUT Maximum current rating for CLKOUT domain 10 mA

110

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.7 DC Electrical Characteristics

over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating temperature (unless otherwise noted)(1)

PARAMETER MIN TYP MAX UNIT

DDR_CSn[1:0], DDR_CKE[1:0], DDR_CK, DDR_CKn, DDR_CASn, DDR_RASn, DDR_WEn, DDR_BA[2:0], DDR_A[15:0],

DDR_ODT[1:0], DDR_D[31:0], DDR_DQM[3:0], DDR_DQS[3:0], DDR_DQSn[3:0] pins (DDR3/DDR3L - HSTL mode)

VIH High-level input voltage

VDDS_DDR =

1.5 V DDR_VREF +

0.1 V

VDDS_DDR =

1.35 V DDR_VREF +

0.09

VIL Low-level input voltage

VDDS_DDR =

1.5 V DDR_VREF –

0.1 V

VDDS_DDR =

1.35 V DDR_VREF –

0.09

VHYS Hysteresis voltage at an input NA V

VOH High-level output voltage, driver enabled, pullup

or pulldown disabled IOH = 8 mA VDDS_DDR –

0.4 V

VOL Low-level output voltage, driver enabled, pullup

or pulldown disabled IOL = 8 mA 0.4 V

Input leakage current, Receiver disabled, pullup or pulldown

inhibited –10 10 µA

Input leakage current, Receiver disabled, pullup enabled –240 –40

Input leakage current, Receiver disabled, pulldown enabled 40 240

IOZ Total leakage current through the terminal connection of a driver-

receiver combination that may include a pullup or pulldown. The

driver output is disabled and the pullup or pulldown is inhibited.

–10 10 µA

DDR_CSn[1:0], DDR_CKE[1:0], DDR_CK, DDR_CKn, DDR_CASn, DDR_RASn, DDR_WEn, DDR_BA[2:0], DDR_A[15:0],

DDR_D[31:0], DDR_DQM[3:0], DDR_DQS[3:0], DDR_DQSn[3:0] pins (LPDDR2 - HSUL_12 mode)(2)

VIH High-level input voltage VDDS_DDR =

1.2 V DDR_VREF +

0.13 V

VIL Low-level input voltage VDDS_DDR =

1.2 V DDR_VREF –

0.13 V

VHYS Hysteresis voltage at an input NA V

VOH High-level output voltage, driver enabled, pullup

or pulldown disabled IOH = 8 mA VDDS_DDR –

0.4 V

VOL Low-level output voltage, driver enabled, pullup

or pulldown disabled IOL = 8 mA 0.4 V

Input leakage current, Receiver disabled, pullup or pulldown

inhibited –10 10 µA

Input leakage current, Receiver disabled, pullup enabled –240 –40

Input leakage current, Receiver disabled, pulldown enabled 40 240

IOZ Total leakage current through the terminal connection of a driver-

receiver combination that may include a pullup or pulldown. The

driver output is disabled and the pullup or pulldown is inhibited.

–10 10 µA

DDR_RESETn(3)

VIH High-level input voltage NA

VIL Low-level input voltage NA

VHYS Hysteresis voltage at an input NA

VOH High-level output voltage, driver enabled, pullup

or pulldown disabled IOH = 8 mA VDDS_DDR –

0.4 V

VOL Low-level output voltage, driver enabled, pullup

or pulldown disabled IOL = 8 mA 0.4 V

Input leakage current, Receiver disabled, pullup or pulldown

inhibited –10 10

µA

Input leakage current, Receiver disabled, pullup enabled –240 –24

Input leakage current, Receiver disabled, pulldown enabled 24 240

111

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

DC Electrical Characteristics (continued)

over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating temperature (unless otherwise noted)(1)

PARAMETER MIN TYP MAX UNIT

IOZ Total leakage current through the terminal connection of a driver-

receiver combination that may include a pullup or pulldown. The

driver output is disabled and the pullup or pulldown is inhibited.

–10 10 µA

RTC_PWRONRSTn

VIH High-level input voltage 0.65 ×

VDDS_RTC V

VIL Low-level input voltage 0.35 ×

VDDS_RTC V

VHYS Hysteresis voltage at an input 0.065 V

IIInput leakage current –1 1 µA

RTC_PMIC_EN

VOH High-level output voltage, driver enabled, pullup

or pulldown disabled IOH = 6 mA VDDS_RTC –

0.45 V

VOL Low-level output voltage, driver enabled, pullup

or pulldown disabled IOL = 6 mA 0.45 V

Input leakage current, Receiver disabled, pullup or pulldown

inhibited –1 1 µA

Input leakage current, Receiver disabled, pullup enabled –200 –40

Input leakage current, Receiver disabled, pulldown enabled 40 200

IOZ Total leakage current through the terminal connection of a driver-

receiver combination that may include a pullup or pulldown. The

driver output is disabled and the pullup or pulldown is inhibited. –1 1 µA

RTC_WAKEUP

VIH High-level input voltage 0.65 ×

VDDS_RTC V

VIL Low-level input voltage 0.35 ×

VDDS_RTC V

VHYS Hysteresis voltage at an input 0.15 V

Input leakage current, Receiver disabled, pullup or pulldown

inhibited –1 1 µA

Input leakage current, Receiver disabled, pullup enabled –200 –40

Input leakage current, Receiver disabled, pulldown enabled 40 200

TCK (VDDSHV3 = 1.8 V)

VIH High-level input voltage 1.45 V

VIL Low-level input voltage 0.46 V

VHYS Hysteresis voltage at an input 0.4 V

Input leakage current, Receiver disabled, pullup or pulldown

inhibited –8 8

µA

Input leakage current, Receiver disabled, pullup enabled –161 –100 –52

Input leakage current, Receiver disabled, pulldown enabled 52 100 170

TCK (VDDSHV3 = 3.3 V)

VIH High-level input voltage 2.15 V

VIL Low-level input voltage 0.46 V

VHYS Hysteresis voltage at an input 0.4 V

Input leakage current, Receiver disabled, pullup or pulldown

inhibited –18 18 µA

Input leakage current, Receiver disabled, pullup enabled –243 –100 –19

Input leakage current, Receiver disabled, pulldown enabled 51 110 210

PWRONRSTn (VDDSHV3 = 1.8 V or 3.3 V)(4)

VIH High-level input voltage 1.35 V

VIL Low-level input voltage 0.5 V

112

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

DC Electrical Characteristics (continued)

over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating temperature (unless otherwise noted)(1)

PARAMETER MIN TYP MAX UNIT

VHYS Hysteresis voltage at an input 0.07 V

IIInput leakage current VI= 1.8 V 0.1 µA

VI= 3.3 V 2

All other LVCMOS pins (VDDSHVx = 1.8 V; x=1–11)

VIH High-level input voltage 0.65 ×

VDDSHVx V

VIL Low-level input voltage 0.35 ×

VDDSHVx V

VHYS Hysteresis voltage at an input 0.18 0.305 V

VOH High-level output voltage, driver enabled, pullup

or pulldown disabled IOH = 6 mA VDDSHVx –

0.45 V

VOL Low-level output voltage, driver enabled, pullup

or pulldown disabled IOL = 6 mA 0.45 V

Input leakage current, Receiver disabled, pullup or pulldown

inhibited –8.4 8.4 µA

Input leakage current, Receiver disabled, pullup enabled –161 –100 –52

Input leakage current, Receiver disabled, pulldown enabled 52 100 170

IOZ Total leakage current through the terminal connection of a driver-

receiver combination that may include a pullup or pulldown. The

driver output is disabled and the pullup or pulldown is inhibited.

–8.4 8.4 µA

All other LVCMOS pins (VDDSHVx = 3.3 V; x=1–11)

VIH High-level input voltage 2 V

VIL Low-level input voltage 0.8 V

VHYS Hysteresis voltage at an input 0.265 0.44 V

VOH High-level output voltage, driver enabled, pullup

or pulldown disabled IOH = 6 mA VDDSHVx –

0.45 V

VOL Low-level output voltage, driver enabled, pullup

or pulldown disabled IOL = 6 mA 0.45 V

Input leakage current, Receiver disabled, pullup or pulldown

inhibited –18 18 µA

Input leakage current, Receiver disabled, pullup enabled –243 –100 –19

Input leakage current, Receiver disabled, pulldown enabled 51 110 210

IOZ Total leakage current through the terminal connection of a driver-

receiver combination that may include a pullup or pulldown. The

driver output is disabled and the pullup or pulldown is inhibited.

–18 18 µA

XTALIN (OSC0)

VIH High-level input voltage 0.65 ×

VDDS_OSC V

VIL Low-level input voltage 0.35 ×

VDDS_OSC V

RTC_XTALIN (OSC1)

VIH High-level input voltage 0.65 ×

VDDS_RTC V

VIL Low-level input voltage 0.35 ×

VDDS_RTC V

(1) The interfaces or signals described in this table correspond to the interfaces or signals available in multiplexing mode 0. All interfaces or

signals multiplexed on the terminals described in this table have the same DC electrical characteristics.

(2) For mapping to the LPDDR2 interface terminal name, see the AM437x Sitara Processors Technical Reference Manual.

(3) The DDR_RESETn terminal supports fail-safe operation.

(4) The input voltage thresholds for this input are not a function of VDDSHV3.

113

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.8 ADC0: Touch Screen Controller and Analog-to-Digital Subsystem Electrical Parameters

The touch screen controller (TSC) and analog-to-digital converter (ADC) subsystem (ADC0) contains a

single-channel ADC connected to an 8:1 analog multiplexer which operates as a general-purpose ADC

with optional support for interleaving TSC conversions for 4-wire, 5-wire, or 8-wire resistive panels. The

ADC0 subsystem can be configured for use in one of the following applications:

• 8 general-purpose ADC channels

• 4-wire TSC with 4 general-purpose ADC channels

• 5-wire TSC with 3 general-purpose ADC channels

• 8-wire TSC

Table 5-5 summarizes the ADC0 subsystem electrical parameters.

Table 5-5. ADC0 Electrical Parameters

PARAMETER TEST CONDITIONS MIN NOM MAX UNIT

ANALOG INPUT

ADC0_VREFP(1) (0.5 × VDDA_ADC0) +

0.25 VDDA_ADC0 V

ADC0_VREFN(1) 0(0.5 × VDDA_ADC0) –

0.25 V

ADC0_VREFP + ADC0_VREFN VDDA_ADC0 V

Full-scale Input Range Internal Voltage Reference 0 VDDA_ADC0 V

External Voltage Reference ADC0_VREFN ADC0_VREFP

Differential Nonlinearity

(DNL)

Internal Voltage Reference:

VDDA_ADC0 = 1.8 V

External Voltage Reference:

VREFP – VREFN = 1.8 V –1 0.5 1 LSB

Integral Nonlinearity (INL)

Source impedance = 50 Ω

Internal Voltage Reference:

VDDA_ADC0 = 1.8 V

External Voltage Reference:

VREFP – VREFN = 1.8 V

–2 ±1 2

LSB

Source Impedance = 1 kΩ

Internal Voltage Reference:

VDDA_ADC0 = 1.8 V

External Voltage Reference:

VREFP – VREFN = 1.8 V

±1

Gain Error Internal Voltage Reference:

VDDA_ADC0 = 1.8 V

External Voltage Reference:

VREFP – VREFN = 1.8 V ±2 LSB

Offset Error Internal Voltage Reference:

VDDA_ADC0 = 1.8 V

External Voltage Reference:

VREFP – VREFN = 1.8 V ±2 LSB

Input Sampling Capacitance 5.5 pF

Signal-to-Noise Ratio

(SNR)

Internal Voltage Reference:

VDDA_ADC0 = 1.8 V

External Voltage Reference:

VREFP – VREFN = 1.8 V

Input Signal: 30 kHz sine wave at

–0.5 dB Full Scale

70 dB

Total Harmonic Distortion

(THD)

Internal Voltage Reference:

VDDA_ADC0 = 1.8 V

External Voltage Reference:

VREFP – VREFN = 1.8 V

Input Signal: 30 kHz sine wave at

–0.5 dB Full Scale

75 dB

114

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 5-5. ADC0 Electrical Parameters (continued)

PARAMETER TEST CONDITIONS MIN NOM MAX UNIT

Spurious Free Dynamic

Range

Internal Voltage Reference:

VDDA_ADC0 = 1.8 V

External Voltage Reference:

VREFP – VREFN = 1.8 V

Input Signal: 30 kHz sine wave at

–0.5 dB Full Scale

80 dB

Signal-to-Noise Plus

Distortion

Internal Voltage Reference:

VDDA_ADC0 = 1.8 V

External Voltage Reference:

VREFP – VREFN = 1.8 V

Input Signal: 30 kHz sine wave at

–0.5 dB Full Scale

69 dB

VREFP and VREFN Input Impedance 20 kΩ

Input Impedance of

AIN[7:0](2) f = input frequency [1/((65.97 × 10–12) × f)] Ω

SAMPLING DYNAMICS

ADC Clock Frequency 13 MHz

Conversion Time 13 ADC0

clock

cycles

Acquisition Time 2 257 ADC0

clock

cycles

Sampling Rate(3) ADC0 Clock = 13 MHz 867 kSPS

Channel-to-Channel Isolation 100 dB

TOUCH SCREEN SWITCH DRIVERS

Pullup and Pulldown Switch ON-Resistance (Ron) 2 Ω

Pullup and Pulldown Switch

Current Leakage Ileak Source impedance = 500 Ω0.5 uA

Drive Current 25 mA

Touch Screen Resistance 6 kΩ

Pen Touch Detect 2 kΩ

(1) The ADC0_VREFP and ADC0_VREFN terminals should not be allowed to float to prevent noise from coupling into the ADC. If

ADC0_VREFN is not used to connect an external negative voltage reference to the ADC, connect it to VSSA_ADC. If ADC0_VREFP is

not used to connect an external positive voltage reference to the ADC, connect it to VSSA_ADC or VDDA_ADC0. Connecting

ADC0_VREFP to VSSA_ADC in this use case is the preferred option because VDDA_ADC0 may couple more noise into the ADC than

VSSA_ADC.

(2) This parameter is valid when the respective AIN terminal is configured to operate as a general-purpose ADC input.

(3) The maximum sample rate assumes a conversion time of 13 ADC clock cycles with the acquisition time configured for the minimum of 2

ADC clock cycles, where it takes a total of 15 ADC clock cycles to sample the analog input and convert it to a positive binary weighted

digital value.

115

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.9 ADC1: Analog-to-Digital Subsystem Electrical Parameters

The analog-to-digital converter (ADC) subsystem implements a basic general-purpose ADC1.

Table 5-6 summarizes the ADC1 subsystem electrical parameters.

Table 5-6. ADC1 Electrical Parameters

PARAMETER TEST CONDITIONS MIN NOM MAX UNIT

ANALOG INPUT

ADC1_VREFP(1) Bypass mode (0.5 × VDDA_ADC1) +

0.25 VDDA_ADC1 V

Gain mode (0.5 × VDDA_ADC1) +

0.25 1.2(2) VDDA_ADC1

ADC1_VREFN(1) Bypass mode 0 (0.5 × VDDA_ADC1) –

0.25 V

Gain mode 0 0.5(2) (0.5 × VDDA_ADC1) –

0.25

ADC1_VREFP + ADC1_VREFN VDDA_ADC1 V

Full-scale Input Range

Bypass mode, Internal Voltage

Reference 0 VDDA_ADC1

Bypass mode, External Voltage

Reference ADC1_VREFN ADC1_VREFP

Gain mode, Internal Voltage

Reference –(VDDA_ADC1 / Gain) (VDDA_ADC1 / Gain)

Gain mode, External Voltage

Reference –((ADC1_VREFP –

ADC1_VREFN) / Gain) ((ADC1_VREFP –

ADC1_VREFN) / Gain)

Preamp output Gain mode (differential) 2.4 V

Differential Nonlinearity

(DNL)

Internal Voltage Reference:

VDDA_ADC1 = 1.8 V

External Voltage Reference:

ADC1_VREFP – ADC1_VREFN

= 1.8 V

–1 0.5 1 LSB

Preamp Gain

GAIN_CTRLx[MSB:LSB] = 00b 12

GAIN_CTRLx[MSB:LSB] = 01b 14

GAIN_CTRLx[MSB:LSB] = 10b 16

GAIN_CTRLx[MSB:LSB] = 11b 18

Preamp Bandwidth Gain mode 15 50 kHz

Integral Nonlinearity (INL)

Bypass mode

Source impedance = ≤1 kΩ

Internal Voltage Reference:

VDDA_ADC1 = 1.8 V

External Voltage Reference:

ADC1_VREFP – ADC1_VREFN

= 1.8 V

–2 ±1 2

LSB

Gain mode

Internal Voltage Reference:

VDDA_ADC1 = 1.8 V

External Voltage Reference:

ADC1_VREFP – ADC1_VREFN

= 1.8 V

±1

Gain Error

Internal Voltage Reference:

VDDA_ADC1 = 1.8 V

External Voltage Reference:

ADC1_VREFP – ADC1_VREFN

= 1.8 V

±2 LSB

Offset Error

Internal Voltage Reference:

VDDA_ADC1 = 1.8 V

External Voltage Reference:

ADC1_VREFP – ADC1_VREFN

= 1.8 V

±2 LSB

116

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 5-6. ADC1 Electrical Parameters (continued)

PARAMETER TEST CONDITIONS MIN NOM MAX UNIT

Input Capacitance Bypass mode 5.5 pF

Gain mode 2 pF

Differential Input

Impedance(3) 18 kΩ

Signal-to-Noise Ratio

(SNR)

Bypass mode

Internal Voltage Reference:

VDDA_ADC1 = 1.8 V

External Voltage Reference:

ADC1_VREFP – ADC1_VREFN

= 1.8 V

Input Signal: 30 kHz sine wave at

–0.5 dB Full Scale

Gain mode

External Voltage Reference:

ADC1_VREFP – ADC1_VREFN

= 1.2 V

Input Signal: 5 kHz sine wave at

Full Scale

Total Harmonic Distortion

(THD)

Bypass mode

Internal Voltage Reference:

VDDA_ADC1 = 1.8 V

External Voltage Reference:

ADC1_VREFP – ADC1_VREFN

= 1.8 V

Input Signal: 30 kHz sine wave at

–0.5 dB Full Scale

Gain mode

External Voltage Reference:

ADC1_VREFP – ADC1_VREFN

= 1.2 V

Input Signal: 5 kHz sine wave at

Full Scale

Spurious Free Dynamic

Range

Bypass mode

Internal Voltage Reference:

VDDA_ADC1 = 1.8 V

External Voltage Reference:

ADC1_VREFP – ADC1_VREFN

= 1.8 V

Input Signal: 30 kHz sine wave at

–0.5 dB Full Scale

Gain mode

External Voltage Reference:

ADC1_VREFP – ADC1_VREFN

= 1.2 V

Input Signal: 5 kHz sine wave at

Full Scale

Signal-to-Noise Plus

Distortion

Bypass mode

Internal Voltage Reference:

VDDA_ADC1 = 1.8 V

External Voltage Reference:

ADC1_VREFP – ADC1_VREFN

= 1.8 V

Input Signal: 30 kHz sine wave at

–0.5 dB Full Scale

Gain mode

External Voltage Reference:

ADC1_VREFP – ADC1_VREFN

= 1.2 V

Input Signal: 5 kHz sine wave at

Full Scale

ADC1_VREFP and ADC1_VREFN Input Impedance 20 kΩ

Input Impedance of

ADC1_AIN[7:0](4) f = input frequency [1/((65.97 × 10–12) × f)] Ω

117

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 5-6. ADC1 Electrical Parameters (continued)

PARAMETER TEST CONDITIONS MIN NOM MAX UNIT

SAMPLING DYNAMICS

ADC Clock Frequency 13 MHz

Conversion Time 13 ADC

clock

cycles

Acquisition Time(5) 2 257 ADC

clock

cycles

Sampling Rate(6) ADC Clock = 13 MHz 867 kSPS

(1) The ADC1_VREFP and ADC1_VREFN terminals should not be allowed to float to prevent noise from coupling into the ADC. If

ADC1_VREFN is not used to connect an external negative voltage reference to the ADC, connect it to VSSA_ADC. If ADC1_VREFP is

not used to connect an external positive voltage reference to the ADC, connect it to VSSA_ADC or VDDA_ADC1. Connecting

ADC1_VREFP to VSSA_ADC in this use case is the preferred option because VDDA_ADC1 may couple more noise into the ADC than

VSSA_ADC.

(2) If the application using ADC1 requires low distortion when operating in Gain mode, the preamplifier output should be limited to ±1.2 volts

differential. To get the full dynamic range of the ADC for this use case it will be necessary to provide a 0.3 volt reference for

ADC1_VREFN and 1.5 volt reference for ADC1_VREFP.

(3) The differential input impedance of each preamplifier is biased to VDDA_ADC1 divided by 2 with a 22-kΩto 50-kΩsource. See the AFE

Functional Description section of the device-specific TRM for more information.

(4) This parameter is valid when the respective AIN terminal is configured to operate as a general-purpose ADC input.

(5) The maximum sample rate of ADC1 may be reduced when using the internal preamplifiers because the preamplifier outputs require 600

ns to settle. Sample Delay must be configured to provide a minimum acquisition time of 600 ns when using the preamplifiers.

An increase in acquisition time may reduce the maximum sample rate because the maximum sample rate is based on a minimum

acquisition time of 2 ADC clock cycles.

For example, the minimum Sample Delay value should be 6 when the preamplifiers are being used with a 13-MHz ADC clock. A Sample

Delay of 6 provides an acquisition time of 8 ADC clock cycles, which reduces the maximum single input sample rate to 619 kSPS when

the acquisition time is combined with the conversion time of 13 ADC clock cycles.

(6) The maximum sample rate assumes a conversion time of 13 ADC clock cycles with the acquisition time configured for the minimum of 2

ADC clock cycles, where it takes a total of 15 ADC clock cycles to sample the analog input and convert it to a positive binary weighted

digital value.

118

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.10 VPP Specifications for One-Time Programmable (OTP) eFuses

This section specifies the operating conditions required for programming the OTP eFuses and is

applicable only for high-security (AM437xHS) devices.

(1) Supply voltage range includes DC errors and peak-to-peak noise. TI power management solutions TLV70717 from the TLV707x family

meet the supply voltage range needed for VPP.

(2) During normal operation, no voltage should be applied to VPP. This can be typically achieved by disabling the regulator attached to the

VPP terminal. For more details, see TLV707, TLV707P 200-mA, Low-IQ, Low-Noise, Low-Dropout Regulator for Portable Devices.

Table 5-7. Recommended Operating Conditions for OTP eFuse Programming

PARAMETER DESCRIPTION MIN NOM MAX UNIT

VDD_CORE Supply voltage range for the core domain during OTP

operation; OPP100 1.056 1.1 1.144 V

VPP

Supply voltage range for the eFuse ROM domain during

normal operation NC

Supply voltage range for the eFuse ROM domain during

OTP programming(1)(2) 1.65 1.7 1.75 V

I(VPP) 50 mA

Temperature (ambient) 0 30 50 ºC

5.10.1 Hardware Requirements

The following hardware requirements must be met when programming keys in the OTP eFuses:

• The VPP power supply must be disabled when not programming OTP registers.

• The VPP power supply must be ramped up after the proper device power-up sequence (for more

details, see Section 5.13.1.2).

5.10.2 Programming Sequence

Programming sequence for OTP eFuses:

1. Power on the board per the power-up sequencing. No voltage should be applied on the VPP terminal

during power up and normal operation.

2. Load the OTP write software required to program the eFuse (contact your local TI representative for

the OTP software package).

3. Apply the voltage on the VPP terminal according to the specification in Table 5-7.

4. Run the software that programs the OTP registers.

5. After validating the content of the OTP registers, remove the voltage from the VPP terminal.

5.10.3 Impact to Your Hardware Warranty

You recognize and accept at your own risk that your use of eFuse permanently alters the TI device. You

acknowledge that eFuse can fail due to incorrect operating conditions or programming sequence. Such a

failure may render the TI device inoperable and TI will be unable to confirm the TI device conformed to TI

device specifications prior to the attempted eFuse. CONSEQUENTLY, TI WILL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR

ANY TI DEVICES THAT HAVE BEEN eFUSED.

119

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.11 Thermal Resistance Characteristics

Failure to maintain a junction temperature within the range specified in Section 5.5 reduces operating

lifetime, reliability, and performance—and may cause irreversible damage to the system. Therefore, the

product design cycle should include thermal analysis to verify the maximum operating junction

temperature of the device. It is important this thermal analysis is performed using specific system use

cases and conditions. TI provides an application report to aid users in overcoming some of the existing

challenges of producing a good thermal design. For more information, see AM43xx Thermal

Considerations.

Table 5-8 provides thermal characteristics for the packages used on this device.

NOTE

This table provides simulation data and may not represent actual use-case values.

120

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

(1) These values are based on a JEDEC-defined 2S2P system (with the exception of the Theta JC [RΘJC] value, which is based on a

JEDEC-defined 1S0P system) and will change based on environment as well as application. For more information, see these

EIA/JEDEC standards:

• JESD51-2, Integrated Circuits Thermal Test Method Environmental Conditions - Natural Convection (Still Air)

• JESD51-3, Low Effective Thermal Conductivity Test Board for Leaded Surface Mount Packages

• JESD51-7, High Effective Thermal Conductivity Test Board for Leaded Surface Mount Packages

• JESD51-9, Test Boards for Area Array Surface Mount Package Thermal Measurements

Power dissipation of 2 W and an ambient temperature of 70ºC is assumed.

(2) °C/W = degrees Celsius per watt.

(3) m/s = meters per second.

Table 5-8. Thermal Resistance Characteristics (NFBGA Package) [ZDN]

over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted)

NAME DESCRIPTION ZDN

(°C/W)(1) (2) AIR FLOW

(m/s)(1) (3)

RΘJC Junction-to-case 7.07 NA

RΘJB Junction-to-board 11.11 NA

RΘJA Junction-to-free air

23.0 0.0

19.5 0.5

18.5 1.0

17.5 2.0

16.9 3.0

PsiJT Junction-to-package top

2.10 0.0

2.16 0.5

2.20 1.0

2.27 2.0

2.31 3.0

PsiJB Junction-to-board

11.59 0.0

11.18 0.5

11.05 1.0

10.91 2.0

10.80 3.0

121

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.12 External Capacitors

To improve module performance, decoupling capacitors are required to suppress the switching noise

generated by high frequency and to stabilize the supply voltage. A decoupling capacitor is most effective

when it is close to the device, because this minimizes the inductance of the circuit board wiring and

interconnects.

5.12.1 Voltage Decoupling Capacitors

Table 5-9 summarizes the Core voltage decoupling characteristics.

5.12.1.1 Core Voltage Decoupling Capacitors

To improve module performance, decoupling capacitors are required to suppress high-frequency switching

noise and to stabilize the supply voltage. A decoupling capacitor is most effective when located close to

the device, because this minimizes the inductance of the circuit board wiring and interconnects.

Table 5-9. Core Voltage Decoupling Characteristics

PARAMETER TYP UNIT

CVDD_CORE(1) 10.08 μF

CVDD_MPU(2) 10.05 μF

(1) The typical value corresponds to 1 capacitor of 10 μF and 8 capacitors of 10 nF.

(2) The typical value corresponds to 1 capacitor of 10 μF and 5 capacitors of 10 nF.

5.12.1.2 IO and Analog Voltage Decoupling Capacitors

Table 5-10 summarizes the power-supply decoupling capacitor recommendations.

Table 5-10. Power-Supply Decoupling Capacitor Characteristics

PARAMETER TYP UNIT

CVDDA_ADC0 10 nF

CVDDA_ADC1 10 nF

CVDDA1P8V_USB0(1) 2.21 µF

CCVDDA3P3V_USB0 10 nF

CVDDA1P8V_USB1 10 nF

CVDDA3P3V_USB1 10 nF

CVDDS(2) 10.04 μF

CVDDS_DDR (3)

CVDDS_OSC 10 nF

CVDDS_PLL_DDR 10 nF

CVDDS_PLL_CORE_LCD 10 nF

CVDDS_SRAM_CORE_BG(4) 10.01 µF

CVDDS_SRAM_MPU_BB(5) 10.01 µF

CVDDS_PLL_MPU 10 nF

CVDDS_RTC 10 nF

CVDDS_CLKOUT 10 nF

CVDDS3P3V_IOLDO 10 nF

CVDDSHV1(6) 10.02 μF

CVDDSHV2(7) 10.06 μF

CVDDSHV3(7) 10.06 μF

CVDDSHV5(6) 10.02 μF

CVDDSHV6(7) 10.06 μF

CVDDSHV7(6) 10.02 μF

122

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 5-10. Power-Supply Decoupling Capacitor Characteristics (continued)

PARAMETER TYP UNIT

CVDDSHV8(6) 10.02 μF

CVDDSHV9(6) 10.02 μF

CVDDSHV10(6) 10.02 μF

CVDDSHV11(6) 10.02 μF

(1) LDO regulator outputs should not be used as a power source for any external components.

(2) The CAP_VDD_RTC terminal operates as an input to the RTC core voltage domain when the RTC_KALDO_ENn terminal is high.

(3) The CAP_VDDS1P8V_IOLDO terminal is the output of the IO LDO and required for simplified power sequencing. For more details, see

Figure 5-8. If simplified power sequencing is not used, this terminal can be left floating.

(1) Typical values consist of 1 capacitor of 10 μF and 4 capacitors of 10 nF.

(2) Typical values consist of 1 capacitor of 2.2 μF and 1 capacitor of 10 nF.

(3) For more details on decoupling capacitor requirements for the DDR3 and DDR3L memory interface, see Section 5.13.8.2.1.3.6 and

Section 5.13.8.2.1.3.7 when using DDR3 and DDR3L memory devices.

(4) VDDS_SRAM_CORE_BG supply powers an internal LDO for SRAM supplies. Inrush currents could cause voltage drop on the

VDDS_SRAM_CORE_BG supplies when the SRAM LDO is enabled after powering up VDDS_SRAM_CORE_BG terminals. TI

recommends placing a 10-μF capacitor close to the terminal and routing it with the widest traces possible to minimize the voltage drop

on VDDS_SRAM_CORE_BG terminals.

(5) VDDS_SRAM_MPU_BB supply powers an internal LDO for SRAM supplies. Inrush currents could cause voltage drop on the

VDDS_SRAM_MPU_BB supplies when the SRAM LDO is enabled after powering up VDDS_SRAM_MPU_BB terminals. TI

recommends placing a 10-μF capacitor close to the terminal and routing it with the widest traces possible to minimize the voltage drop

on VDDS_SRAM_MPU_BB terminals.

(6) Typical values consist of 1 capacitor of 10 μF and 2 capacitors of 10 nF.

(7) Typical values consist of 1 capacitor of 10 μF and 6 capacitors of 10 nF.

5.12.2 Output Capacitors

Internal low dropout output (LDO) regulators require external capacitors to stabilize their outputs. These

capacitors should be placed as close as possible to the respective terminals of the device. Table 5-11

summarizes the LDO output capacitor recommendations.

Table 5-11. Output Capacitor Characteristics

PARAMETER TYP UNIT

CCAP_VDD_SRAM_CORE(1) 1μF

CCAP_VDD_RTC(1)(2) 1μF

CCAP_VDD_SRAM_MPU(1) 1μF

CCAP_VBB_MPU(1) 1μF

CCAP_VDDS1P8V_IOLDO(1)(3) 2.2 μF

MPU

Device

VDD_MPU

CVDD_MPU

CORE

VDD_CORE

CVDD_CORE

VDDS

CVDDS

VDDSHV2

IOs

CVDDSHV2

VDDSHV3

IOs

CVDDSHV3

VDDSHV5

IOs

CVDDSHV5

VDDSHV6

IOs

CVDDSHV6

VDDS_DDR

IOs

CVDDS_DDR

VDDS_RTC

IOs

CVDDS_RTC

DDR

PLL

VDDS_PLL_DDR

CVDDS_PLL_DDR

MPU

PLL

VDDS_PLL_MPU

CVDDS_PLL_MPU

CORE

PLL

VDDS_PLL_CORE_LCD

CVDDS_PLL_CORE_LCD

LCD

PLL

CAP_VBB_MPU

CCAP_VBB_MPU

MPU SRAM

LDO

VDDS_SRAM_MPU_BB

CVDDS_SRAM_MPU_BB

CAP_VDD_SRAM_MPU

CCAP_VDD_SRAM_MPU

Back Bias

LDO

CORE SRAM

LDO

VDDS_SRAM_CORE_BG

CVDDS_SRAM_CORE_BG

CAP_VDD_SRAM_CORE

CCAP_VDD_SRAM_CORE

Band Gap

Reference

USBPHY0

VDDA_3P3V_USB0

CVDDA_3P3V_USB0

VSSA_USB

VDDA_1P8V_USB0

CVDDA_1P8V_USB0

VSSA_USB

ADC0

VDDA_ADC0

CVDDA_ADC0

VSSA_ADC

VDDS_OSC

CVDDS_OSC

RTC

CAP_VDD_RTC

CCAP_VDD_RTC

VDDSHV1

IOs

CVDDSHV1

VDDSHV7

IOs

CVDDSHV7

VDDSHV8

IOs

CVDDSHV8

VDDSHV9

IOs

CVDDSHV9

VDDSHV10

IOs

CVDDSHV10

VDDSHV11

IOs

CVDDSHV11

ADC1

VDDA_ADC1

CVDDA_ADC1

VSSA_ADC

EXTDEV

PLL

USBPHY1

VDDA_3P3V_USB1

CVDDA_3P3V_USB1

VSSA_USB

VDDA_1P8V_USB1

CVDDA_1P8V_USB1

VSSA_USB

VDDS3P3V_

IOLDO CAP_VDDS1P8V_IOLDO

PER PLL

123

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Figure 5-2 shows an example of the external capacitors.

A. Decoupling capacitors must be placed as closed as possible to the power terminal. Choose the ground closest to the

power pin for each decoupling capacitor. In case of interconnecting powers, first insert the decoupling capacitor and

then interconnect the powers.

B. The decoupling capacitor value depends on the board characteristics.

Figure 5-2. External Capacitors

Supply value

slew rate < 1E + 5 V/s

slew > (supply value) / (1E + 5V/s)

supply value 10 µs´

124

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13 Timing and Switching Characteristics

The data provided in the following timing requirements and switching characteristics tables assumes the

device is operating within the recommended operating conditions defined in Section 5.5, unless otherwise

noted.

5.13.1 Power Supply Sequencing

5.13.1.1 Power Supply Slew Rate Requirement

To maintain the safe operating range of the internal ESD protection devices, TI recommends limiting the

maximum slew rate of supplies to be less than 1.0E + 5 V/s. For instance, as shown in Figure 5-3, TI

recommends having the supply ramp slew for a 1.8-V supply of more than 18 µs.

Figure 5-3. Power Supply Slew and Slew Rate

VDDS_RTC(A)

1.8V

RTC_PWRONRSTn(B)

1.8V

RTC_PMIC_EN

1.8V

VDDSHVx [x=1-11]

3.3V

VDD_CORE(D)

1.1V

VDD_MPU(D)

1.1V

CLK_32K_RTC

CLK_M_OSC

1.8V

VDDS_DDR

1.2V/1.35V/1.5V

PWRONRSTn

1.8V/3.3V(E)

VDDS_CLKOUT

VDDS_PLL_CORE_LCD, VDDS_PLL_MPU,

(F)

VDDA3P3V_USB0/1

VDDS_SRAM_CORE_BG, VDDA1P8V_USB0/1(C)

VDDS_SRAM_MPU_BB,

VDDS_OSC, VDDA_ADC0/1, VDDS_PLL_DDR,

VDDS,

125

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.1.2 Power-Up Sequencing

A. The CAP_VDD_RTC terminal operates as an input to the RTC core voltage domain when the internal RTC LDO is

disabled by connecting the RTC_KALDO_ENn terminal to VDDS_RTC.

If the internal RTC LDO is disabled, CAP_VDD_RTC should be sourced from an external 1.1-V power supply. If

CAP_VDD_RTC is ramped after VDD_CORE, there might be a small amount of additional leakage current on

VDD_CORE.

VDDS_RTC can be ramped independent of other supplies if RTC_PMIC_EN functionality is not required. If

VDDS_RTC is ramped after VDD_CORE when internal RTC LDO is enabled, there might be a small amount of

leakage current on VDD_CORE.

B. RTC_PWRONRSTn should be asserted for at least 1 ms and can be released before the 32-kHz clock is stable.

C. These supplies can be ramped together with VDDS, VDDS_CLKOUT supplies if powered from the same source only.

If a USB port is not used, the respective VDDA1P8V_USB may be connected to any 1.8-V power supply and the

respective VDDA3P3V_USB terminal may be connected to any 3.3-V power supply. If a system does not have a 3.3-

V supply, the VDDA3P3V_USB may be connected to ground.

D. VDD_MPU and VDD_CORE can be supplied from the same power source if OPPs higher than OPP100 are not used.

E. PWRONRSTn input voltage thresholds are not dependent on VDDSHV3 voltage and the terminal is not fail-safe.

PWRONRSTn can accept 1.8-V or 3.3-V input levels when VDDSHV3 is configured as 3.3 V. However,

PWRONRSTn can only accept 1.8 V input levels when VDDSHV3 is configured as 1.8 V. For details on this input

terminal, see Section 5.7.

F. It is required to hold the PWRONRSTn terminal low until all the supplies have ramped and the input clock

CLK_M_OSC is stable.

Figure 5-4. Power Sequencing With RTC Feature Enabled, All Dual-Voltage IOs Configured as 3.3 V

VDDS_RTC(A)

1.8V

RTC_PWRONRSTn(B)

1.8V

RTC_PMIC_EN

1.8V

VDDS_CLKOUT

1.8V

VDDA3P3V_USB0/1

3.3V

VDD_CORE(D)

1.1V

VDD_MPU(D)

1.1V

CLK_32K_RTC

CLK_M_OSC

VDDS_SRAM_CORE_BG, VDDA1P8V_USB0/1(C)

1.8V

VDDS_DDR

1.2V/1.35V/1.5V

PWRONRSTn

1.8V

(E)

VDDS, VDDSHVx [x=1-11]

VDDS_OSC, VDDA_ADC0/1, VDDS_PLL_DDR,

VDDS_PLL_CORE_LCD, VDDS_PLL_MPU,

VDDS_SRAM_MPU_BB,

126

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

A. The CAP_VDD_RTC terminal operates as an input to the RTC core voltage domain when the internal RTC LDO is

disabled by connecting the RTC_KALDO_ENn terminal to VDDS_RTC.

If the internal RTC LDO is disabled, CAP_VDD_RTC should be sourced from an external 1.1-V power supply. If

CAP_VDD_RTC is ramped after VDD_CORE, there might be a small amount of additional leakage current on

VDD_CORE.

B. RTC_PWRONRSTn should be asserted for at least 1 ms and can be released before the 32-kHz clock is stable.

C. These supplies can be ramped together with the VDDS, VDDSHVx [x=1-11], VDDS_CLKOUT supplies if powered

from the same source.

If a USB port is not used, the respective VDDA1P8V_USB may be connected to any 1.8-V power supply and the

respective VDDA3P3V_USB terminal may be connected to any 3.3-V power supply. If a system does not have a 3.3-

V supply, the VDDA3P3V_USB may be connected to ground.

D. VDD_MPU and VDD_CORE can be supplied from the same power source if OPPs higher than OPP100 are not used.

E. It is required to hold the PWRONRSTn terminal low until all the supplies have ramped and the input clock

CLK_M_OSC is stable.

Figure 5-5. Power Sequencing With RTC Feature Enabled, All Dual-Voltage IOs Configured as 1.8 V

VDDS_RTC(A)

1.8V

RTC_PWRONRSTn(B)

1.8V

RTC_PMIC_EN

1.8V

VDDSHVx [x=1-11]

1.8V

VDDSHVx [x=1-11]

3.3V

VDD_CORE(D)

1.1V

VDD_MPU(D)

1.1V

CLK_32K_RTC

CLK_M_OSC

1.8V

VDDS_DDR

1.2V/1.35V/1.5V

PWRONRSTn

1.8V/3.3V(E)

VDDS_SRAM_CORE_BG, VDDA1P8V_USB0/1(C)

(F)

VDDS,

VDDS_CLKOUT

VDDS_OSC, VDDA_ADC0/1, VDDS_PLL_DDR,

VDDS_PLL_CORE_LCD, VDDS_PLL_MPU,

VDDS_SRAM_MPU_BB,

VDDA3P3V_USB0/1

127

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

A. The CAP_VDD_RTC terminal operates as an input to the RTC core voltage domain when the internal RTC LDO is

disabled by connecting the RTC_KALDO_ENn terminal to VDDS_RTC.

If the internal RTC LDO is disabled, CAP_VDD_RTC should be sourced from an external 1.1-V power supply. If

CAP_VDD_RTC is ramped after VDD_CORE, there might be a small amount of additional leakage current on

VDD_CORE.

B. RTC_PWRONRSTn should be asserted for at least 1 ms and can be released before the 32-kHz clock is stable.

C. These supplies can be ramped together with the VDDS, VDDSHVx [x=1-11], VDDS_CLKOUT supplies if powered

from the same source.

If a USB port is not used, the respective VDDA1P8V_USB may be connected to any 1.8-V power supply and the

respective VDDA3P3V_USB terminal may be connected to any 3.3-V power supply. If a system does not have a 3.3-

V supply, the VDDA3P3V_USB may be connected to ground.

D. VDD_MPU and VDD_CORE can be supplied from the same power source if OPPs higher than OPP100 are not used.

E. PWRONRSTn input voltage thresholds are not dependent on VDDSHV3 voltage and the terminal is not fail-safe.

PWRONRSTn can accept 1.8-V or 3.3-V input levels when VDDSHV3 is configured as 3.3 V. However,

PWRONRSTn can only accept 1.8 V input levels when VDDSHV3 is configured as 1.8 V. For details on this input

terminal, see Section 5.7.

F. It is required to hold the PWRONRSTn terminal low until all the supplies have ramped and the input clock

CLK_M_OSC is stable.

Figure 5-6. Power Sequencing With RTC Feature Enabled, Dual-Voltage IOs Configured as 1.8 V, 3.3 V

VDDS,

VDDS_CLKOUT

VDDSHVx [x=1-11]

1.8V

VDDSHVx [x=1-11]

VDDA3P3V_USB0/1

3.3V

VDD_CORE ,

(B)

1.1V

VDD_MPU(B)

1.1V

CLK_M_OSC

1.8V

VDDS_DDR

1.2V/1.35V/1.5V

PWRONRSTn

1.8V/3.3V(D)

VDDS_RTC, VDDS_OSC, VDDA_ADC0/1,

(E)

VDDS_SRAM_CORE_BG, VDDA1P8V_USB0/1(A)

VDDS_PLL_MPU, VDDS_SRAM_MPU_BB,

VDDS_PLL_DDR, VDDS_PLL_CORE_LCD,

CAP_VDD_RTC(C)

128

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

A. These supplies can be ramped together with the VDDS, VDDSHVx [x=1-11], VDDS_CLKOUT supplies if powered

from the same source.

If a USB port is not used, the repsective VDDA1P8V_USB may be connected to any 1.8-V power supply and the

respective VDDA3P3V_USB terminal may be connected to any 3.3-V power supply. If a system does not have a 3.3-

V supply, the VDDA3P3V_USB may be connected to ground.

B. VDD_MPU and VDD_CORE can be supplied from the same power source if OPPs higher than OPP100 are not used.

C. The CAP_VDD_RTC terminal operates as an input to the RTC core voltage domain when the internal RTC LDO is

disabled by connecting the RTC_KALDO_ENn terminal to VDDS_RTC.

If the internal RTC LDO is disabled, CAP_VDD_RTC should be sourced from an external 1.1-V power supply. If

CAP_VDD_RTC is ramped after VDD_CORE, there might be a small amount of additional leakage current on

VDD_CORE.

VDDS_RTC can be ramped independent of other supplies if RTC_PMIC_EN functionality is not required. If

VDDS_RTC is ramped after VDD_CORE when internal RTC LDO is enabled, there might be a small amount of

leakage current on VDD_CORE.

D. PWRONRSTn input voltage thresholds are not dependent on VDDSHV3 voltage and the terminal is not fail-safe.

PWRONRSTn can accept 1.8-V or 3.3-V input levels when VDDSHV3 is configured as 3.3 V. However,

PWRONRSTn can only accept 1.8 V input levels when VDDSHV3 is configured as 1.8 V. For details on this input

terminal, see Section 5.7.

E. It is required to hold the PWRONRSTn terminal low until all the supplies have ramped and the input clock

CLK_M_OSC is stable.

Figure 5-7. Power Sequencing With RTC Feature Disabled, Dual-Voltage IOs Configured as 1.8 V, 3.3 V

VDDS3P3V_IOLDO,

3.3V

VDD_CORE(C)

1.1V

VDD_MPU(C)

1.1V

CLK_M_OSC

1.8V

VDDS_DDR

1.2V/1.35V/1.5V

PWRONRSTn

1.8V/3.3V(E)

VDDS_RTC, VDDS_OSC, VDDA_ADC0/1,

(F)

VDDA3P3V_USB0/1(A)

VDDSHVx [x=1-11]

VDDS_SRAM_CORE_BG, VDDA1P8V_USB0/1(B)

VDDS_PLL_MPU, VDDS_SRAM_MPU_BB,

VDDS_PLL_DDR, VDDS_PLL_CORE_LCD,

CAP_VDD_RTC(D)

129

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

A. Power source supplying VDDS3P3V_IOLDO should have a supply slew of >100us.

CAP_VDDS1P8V_IOLDO is the 1.8-V output of VDDA3P3V_IOLDO. VDDS, VDDS_CLKOUT terminals are powered

by shorting them to CAP_VDDS1P8V_IOLDO on the board.

B. If a USB port is not used, the repsective VDDA1P8V_USB may be connected to any 1.8-V power supply and the

respective VDDA3P3V_USB terminal may be connected to any 3.3-V power supply. If a system does not have a 3.3-

V supply, the VDDA3P3V_USB may be connected to ground.

C. VDD_MPU and VDD_CORE can be supplied from the same power source if OPPs higher than OPP100 are not used.

D. The CAP_VDD_RTC terminal operates as an input to the RTC core voltage domain when the internal RTC LDO is

disabled by connecting the RTC_KALDO_ENn terminal to VDDS_RTC.

If the internal RTC LDO is disabled, CAP_VDD_RTC should be sourced from an external 1.1-V power supply. If

CAP_VDD_RTC is ramped after VDD_CORE, there might be a small amount of additional leakage current on

VDD_CORE.

VDDS_RTC can be ramped independent of other supplies if RTC_PMIC_EN functionality is not required. If

VDDS_RTC is ramped after VDD_CORE when internal RTC LDO is enabled, there might be a small amount of

leakage current on VDD_CORE.

E. PWRONRSTn input voltage thresholds are not dependent on VDDSHV3 voltage and the terminal is not fail-safe.

PWRONRSTn can accept 1.8-V or 3.3-V input levels when VDDSHV3 is configured as 3.3 V. However,

PWRONRSTn can only accept 1.8 V input levels when VDDSHV3 is configured as 1.8 V. For details on this input

terminal, see Section 5.7.

F. The PWRONRSTn terminal must be held low until all the supplies have ramped and the input clock CLK_M_OSC is

stable.

Figure 5-8. Simplified Power Sequencing With RTC Feature Disabled, Dual-Voltage IOs

Configured as 3.3 V

130

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.1.3 Power-Down Sequencing

PWRONRSTn input terminal should be taken low, which stops all internal clocks before power supplies

are turned off. All other external clocks to the device should be shut off.

The preferred way to sequence power down is to have all the power supplies ramped down sequentially in

the exact reverse order of the power-up sequencing. In other words, the power supply that has been

ramped up first should be the last one that is ramped down. This ensures there would be no spurious

current paths during the power-down sequence. The VDDS, VDDS_CLKOUT power supply must ramp

down after all 3.3-V VDDSHVx [x=1-11] power supplies.

If it is desired to ramp down VDDS, VDDS_CLKOUT and VDDSHVx [x=1-11] simultaneously, it should

always be ensured that the difference between VDDS, VDDS_CLKOUT and VDDSHVx [x=1-11] during

the entire power-down sequence is <2 V. Any violation of this could cause reliability risks for the device.

Further, it is recommended to maintain VDDS, VDDS_CLKOUT ≥1.5V as all the other supplies fully ramp

down to minimize in-rush currents.

If none of the VDDSHVx [x=1-11] power supplies are configured as 3.3 V, the VDDS, VDDS_CLKOUT

power supply may ramp down along with the VDDSHVx [x=1-11] supplies or after all the VDDSHVx [x=1-

11] supplies have ramped down. TI recommends maintaining VDDS, VDDS_CLKOUT ≥1.5V as all the

other supplies fully ramp down to minimize in-rush currents.

When using simplified power-down sequence, there are no power-down requirements between the VDDS,

VDDS_CLKOUT and VDDSHVx [x=1-11] supplies and are ramped down together without any reliability

concerns.

MPU

PLL

PER

PLL

DDR

PLL

CORE

PLL

EXTDEV

PLL

VDDS_PLL_MPU

VDDS_PLL_CORE_LCD

VDDA1P8V_USB0

VDDS_PLL_DDR

LCD

PLL

131

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.2 Clock

5.13.2.1 PLLs

5.13.2.1.1 Digital Phase-Locked Loop Power Supply Requirements

The digital phase-locked loop (DPLL) provides all interface clocks and functional clocks to the processor

of the device. The device integrates six different DPLLs:

• Core DPLL

• Per DPLL

• Display DPLL

• DDR DPLL

• MPU DPLL

• EXTDEV DPLL

Figure 5-9 shows the power supply connectivity implemented in the device. Table 5-12 provides the power

supply requirements for the DPLL.

Figure 5-9. DPLL Power Supply Connectivity

Table 5-12. DPLL Power Supply Requirements

SUPPLY NAME DESCRIPTION MIN NOM MAX UNIT

VDDA1P8V_USB0 Supply voltage range for USBPHY and PER DPLL, Analog, 1.8V 1.71 1.8 1.89 V

Max. peak-to-peak supply noise 50 mV (p-p)

VDDS_PLL_MPU Supply voltage range for DPLL MPU, Analog 1.71 1.8 1.89 V

Max. peak-to-peak supply noise 50 mV (p-p)

VDDS_PLL_CORE_LCD Supply voltage range for DPLL CORE, EXTDEV, and LCD, Analog 1.71 1.8 1.89 V

Max. peak-to-peak supply noise 50 mV (p-p)

VDDS_PLL_DDR Supply voltage range for DPLL DDR, Analog 1.71 1.8 1.89 V

Max. peak-to-peak supply noise 50 mV (p-p)

132

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.2.2 Input Clock Specifications

The device has two clock inputs. Each clock input passes through an internal oscillator which can be

connected to an external crystal circuit (oscillator mode) or external LVCMOS square-wave digital clock

source (bypass mode). The oscillators automatically operate in bypass mode when their input is

connected to an external LVCMOS square-wave digital clock source. The oscillator associated with a

specific clock input must be enabled when the clock input is being used in either oscillator mode or bypass

mode.

The OSC1 oscillator provides a 32.768-kHz reference clock to the real-time clock (RTC) and is connected

to the RTC_XTALIN and RTC_XTALOUT terminals. This clock source is referred to as the 32K oscillator

(CLK_32K_RTC) in the device-specific technical reference manual. OSC1 is disabled by default after

power is applied. This clock input is optional and may not be required if the RTC is configured to receive a

clock from the internal 32k RC oscillator (CLK_RC32K) or peripheral PLL (CLK_32KHZ) which receives a

reference clock from the OSC0 input.

The OSC0 oscillator provides a 19.2-MHz, 24-MHz, 25-MHz, or 26-MHz reference clock which is used to

clock all non-RTC functions and is connected to the XTALIN and XTALOUT terminals. This clock source is

referred to as the master oscillator (CLK_M_OSC) in the device-specific technical reference manual.

OSC0 is enabled by default after power is applied.

For more information related to recommended circuit topologies and crystal oscillator circuit requirements

for these clock inputs, see Section 5.13.2.3.

Device

XTALIN VSS_OSC XTALOUT

Optional Rd

Crystal

Optional Rbias

133

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.2.3 Input Clock Requirements

5.13.2.3.1 OSC0 Internal Oscillator Clock Source

Figure 5-10 shows the recommended crystal circuit. It is recommended that preproduction printed-circuit

board (PCB) designs include the two optional resistors Rbias and Rdin case they are required for proper

oscillator operation when combined with production crystal circuit components. In most cases, Rbias is not

required and Rdis a 0-Ωresistor. These resistors may be removed from production PCB designs after

evaluating oscillator performance with production crystal circuit components installed on preproduction

PCBs.

The XTALIN terminal has a 15-kΩto 40-kΩinternal pulldown resistor which is enabled when OSC0 is

disabled. This internal resistor prevents the XTALIN terminal from floating to an invalid logic level which

may increase leakage current through the oscillator input buffer.

A. Oscillator components (Crystal, C1, C2, optional Rbias and Rd) must be located close to the package. Parasitic

capacitance to the printed circuit board (PCB) ground and other signals should be minimized to reduce noise coupled

into the oscillator. The external crystal component grounds should be connected to the VSS_OSC terminal. The

VSS_OSC terminal should be connected to the PCB ground plane as close as possible to the device.

B. C1and C2represent the total capacitance of the respective PCB trace, load capacitor, and other components

(excluding the crystal) connected to each crystal terminal. The value of capacitors C1and C2should be selected to

provide the total load capacitance, CL, specified by the crystal manufacturer. The total load capacitance is CL=

[(C1×C2)/(C1+C2)] + Cshunt, where Cshunt is the crystal shunt capacitance (C0) specified by the crystal manufacturer

plus any mutual capacitance (Cpkg + CPCB) seen across the XTALIN and XTALOUT signals. For recommended values

of crystal circuit components, see Table 5-13.

Figure 5-10. OSC0 Crystal Circuit Schematic

VDDS_OSC

XTALOUT

tsX

VDD_CORE (min.)

Time

Voltage

VSS

VDDS_OSC (min.)

VSS

VDD_CORE

134

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 5-13. OSC0 Crystal Circuit Requirements

NAME DESCRIPTION MIN TYP MAX UNIT

fxtal

Crystal parallel resonance

frequency Fundamental mode oscillation only 19.2, 24.0,

25.0, or

26.0 MHz

Crystal frequency stability

and tolerance –50.0 50.0 ppm

CC1 C1capacitance 12.0 24.0 pF

CC2 C2capacitance 12.0 24.0 pF

Cshunt Shunt capacitance 5.0 pF

ESR

Crystal effective series

resistance fxtal = 19.2 MHz, oscillator has nominal

negative resistance of 272 Ωand worst-

case negative resistance of 163 Ω

54.4

fxtal = 24.0 MHz, oscillator has nominal

negative resistance of 240 Ωand worst-

case negative resistance of 144 Ω

48.0

fxtal = 25.0 MHz, oscillator has nominal

negative resistance of 233 Ωand worst-

case negative resistance of 140 Ω

46.6

fxtal = 26.0 MHz, oscillator has nominal

negative resistance of 227 Ωand worst-

case negative resistance of 137 Ω

45.3

Table 5-14. OSC0 Crystal Circuit Characteristics

NAME DESCRIPTION MIN TYP MAX UNIT

Cpkg Shunt capacitance of

package ZDN package 0.01 pF

Pxtal

The actual values of the ESR, fxtal, and CLshould be used to yield a

typical crystal power dissipation value. Using the maximum values

specified for ESR, fxtal, and CLparameters yields a maximum power

dissipation value.

Pxtal = 0.5 ESR (2 πfxtal

CLVDDS_OSC)2

tsX Start-up time 1.5 ms

Figure 5-11. OSC0 Start-up Time

Device

XTALIN VSS_OSC XTALOUT

LVCMOS

Digital

Clock

Source

VDDS_OSC

135

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

(1) Initial accuracy, temperature drift, and aging effects should be combined when evaluating a reference clock for this requirement.

5.13.2.3.2 OSC0 LVCMOS Digital Clock Source

Figure 5-12 shows the recommended oscillator connections when OSC0 is connected to an LVCMOS

square-wave digital clock source. The LVCMOS clock source is connected to the XTALIN terminal. In this

mode of operation, the XTALOUT terminal should not be used to source any external components. The

printed circuit board design should provide a mechanism to disconnect the XTALOUT terminal from any

external components or signal traces that may couple noise into OSC0 via the XTALOUT terminal.

The XTALIN terminal has a 15-kΩto 40-kΩinternal pulldown resistor which is enabled when OSC0 is

disabled. This internal resistor prevents the XTALIN terminal from floating to an invalid logic level which

may increase leakage current through the oscillator input buffer.

Figure 5-12. OSC0 LVCMOS Circuit Schematic

Table 5-15. OSC0 LVCMOS Reference Clock Requirements

NAME DESCRIPTION MIN TYP MAX UNIT

f(XTALIN) Frequency, LVCMOS reference clock 19.2, 24, 25,

or 26 MHz

Frequency, LVCMOS reference clock stability and tolerance(1) –50 50 ppm

tdc(XTALIN) Duty cycle, LVCMOS reference clock period 45% 55%

tjpp(XTALIN) Jitter peak-to-peak, LVCMOS reference clock period –1% 1%

tR(XTALIN) Time, LVCMOS reference clock rise 5 ns

tF(XTALIN) Time, LVCMOS reference clock fall 5 ns

Device

RTC_XTALIN RTC_XTALOUT

C1C2

Optional Rbias

Optional Rd

Crystal

VSS_RTC

136

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.2.3.3 OSC1 Internal Oscillator Clock Source

Figure 5-13 shows the recommended crystal circuit for OSC1 of the package. It is recommended that pre-

production printed circuit board (PCB) designs include the two optional resistors Rbias and Rdin case they

are required for proper oscillator operation when combined with production crystal circuit components. In

most cases, Rbias is not required and Rdis a 0-Ωresistor. These resistors may be removed from

production PCB designs after evaluating oscillator performance with production crystal circuit components

installed on preproduction PCBs.

The RTC_XTALIN terminal has a 10-kΩto 40-kΩinternal pullup resistor which is enabled when OSC1 is

disabled. This internal resistor prevents the RTC_XTALIN terminal from floating to an invalid logic level

which may increase leakage current through the oscillator input buffer.

A. Oscillator components (Crystal, C1, C2, optional Rbias and Rd) must be located close to the package. Parasitic

capacitance to the printed circuit board (PCB) ground and other signals should be minimized to reduce noise coupled

into the oscillator.

B. C1and C2represent the total capacitance of the respective PCB trace, load capacitor, and other components

(excluding the crystal) connected to each crystal terminal. The value of capacitors C1and C2should be selected to

provide the total load capacitance, CL, specified by the crystal manufacturer. The total load capacitance is CL=

[(C1×C2)/(C1+C2)] + Cshunt, where Cshunt is the crystal shunt capacitance (C0) specified by the crystal manufacturer

plus any mutual capacitance (Cpkg + CPCB) seen across the RTC_XTALIN and RTC_XTALOUT signals. For

recommended values of crystal circuit components, see Table 5-16.

Figure 5-13. OSC1 Crystal Circuit Schematic

Table 5-16. OSC1 Crystal Circuit Requirements

NAME DESCRIPTION MIN TYP MAX UNIT

fxtal

Crystal parallel resonance

frequency Fundamental mode oscillation only 32.768 kHz

Crystal frequency stability

and tolerance Maximum RTC error = 10.512 minutes

per year –20.0 20.0 ppm

Maximum RTC error = 26.28 minutes per

year –50.0 50.0 ppm

CC1 C1capacitance 12.0 24.0 pF

CC2 C2capacitance 12.0 24.0 pF

Cshunt Shunt capacitance 1.5 pF

ESR Crystal effective series

resistance fxtal = 32.768 kHz, oscillator has nominal

negative resistance of 725 kΩand worst-

case negative resistance of 250 kΩ

80 kΩ

Table 5-17. OSC1 Crystal Circuit Characteristics

NAME DESCRIPTION MIN TYP MAX UNIT

Cpkg Shunt capacitance of

package ZDN package 0.17 pF

VDDS_RTC

RTC_XTALOUT

tsX

CAP_VDD_RTC (min.)

Time

Voltage

VSS_RTC

VDDS_RTC (min.)

VSS_RTC

CAP_VDD_RTC

137

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 5-17. OSC1 Crystal Circuit Characteristics (continued)

NAME DESCRIPTION MIN TYP MAX UNIT

Pxtal

The actual values of the ESR, fxtal, and CLshould be used to yield a

typical crystal power dissipation value. Using the maximum values

specified for ESR, fxtal, and CLparameters yields a maximum power

dissipation value.

Pxtal = 0.5 ESR (2 πfxtal

CLVDDS_RTC)2

tsX Start-up time 2 s

Figure 5-14. OSC1 Start-up Time

Device

RTC_XTALIN RTC_XTALOUT

N/C

LVCMOS

Digital

Clock

Source

VDDS_RTC

VSS_RTC

138

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

(1) Initial accuracy, temperature drift, and aging effects should be combined when evaluating a reference clock for this requirement.

5.13.2.3.4 OSC1 LVCMOS Digital Clock Source

Figure 5-15 shows the recommended oscillator connections when OSC1 of the package is connected to

an LVCMOS square-wave digital clock source. The LVCMOS clock source is connected to the

RTC_XTALIN terminal. In this mode of operation, the RTC_XTALOUT terminal should not be used to

source any external components. The printed circuit board design should provide a mechanism to

disconnect the RTC_XTALOUT terminal from any external components or signal traces that may couple

noise into OSC1 via the RTC_XTALOUT terminal.

The RTC_XTALIN terminal has a 10-kΩto 40-kΩinternal pullup resistor which is enabled when OSC1 is

disabled. This internal resistor prevents the RTC_XTALIN terminal from floating to an invalid logic level

which may increase leakage current through the oscillator input buffer.

Figure 5-15. OSC1 LVCMOS Circuit Schematic

Table 5-18. OSC1 LVCMOS Reference Clock Requirements

NAME DESCRIPTION MIN TYP MAX UNIT

f(RTC_XTALIN)

Frequency, LVCMOS reference clock 32.768 kHz

Frequency, LVCMOS reference clock

stability and tolerance(1)

Maximum RTC error =

10.512 minutes/year –20 20 ppm

Maximum RTC error = 26.28

minutes/year –50 50 ppm

tdc(RTC_XTALIN) Duty cycle, LVCMOS reference clock period 45% 55%

tjpp(RTC_XTALIN) Jitter peak-to-peak, LVCMOS reference clock period –1% 1%

tR(RTC_XTALIN) Time, LVCMOS reference clock rise 5 ns

tF(RTC_XTALIN) Time, LVCMOS reference clock fall 5 ns

5.13.2.3.5 OSC1 Not Used

Figure 5-16 shows the recommended oscillator connections when OSC1 is not used. An internal 10-kΩ

pullup on the RTC_XTALIN terminal is turned on when OSC1 is disabled to prevent this input from floating

to an invalid logic level which may increase leakage current through the oscillator input buffer. OSC1 is

disabled by default after power is applied. Therefore, both RTC_XTALIN and RTC_XTALOUT terminals

should be a no connect (NC) when OSC1 is not used.

For more information on disabling OSC1, see the device-specific technical reference manual.

Device

RTC_XTALIN RTC_XTALOUT

N/C

VSS_RTC

139

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Figure 5-16. OSC1 Not Used Schematic

5.13.2.4 Output Clock Specifications

The device has two clock output signals. The CLKOUT1 signal can be configured to output the master

oscillator (CLK_M_OSC), EXTDEV_PLL, 32-kHz, or several other internal clocks. See the device-specific

TRM for more details. The CLKOUT2 signal can be configured to output the OSC1 input clock, which is

referred to as the 32K oscillator (CLK_32K_RTC) in the device-specific technical reference manual, or four

other internal clocks. For more information related to configuring these clock output signals, see the

CLKOUT Signals section of the device-specific technical reference manual.

5.13.2.5 Output Clock Characteristics

5.13.2.5.1 CLKOUT1

The CLKOUT1 signal can be output on the XDMA_EVENT_INTR0 terminal. This terminal connects to one

of seven internal signals through configurable multiplexers. The XDMA_EVENT_INTR0 multiplexer must

be configured for Mode 3 to connect the CLKOUT1 signal to the XDMA_EVENT_INTR0 terminal.

The default reset configuration of the XDMA_EVENT_INTR0 multiplexer is selected by the logic level

applied to the DSS_HSYNC terminal on the rising edge of PWRONRSTn. The XDMA_EVENT_INTR0

multiplexer is configured to Mode 7 if the DSS_HSYNC terminal is low on the rising edge of PWRONRSTn

or Mode 3 if the DSS_HSYNC terminal is high on the rising edge of PWRONRSTn. This allows the

CLKOUT1 signal to be output on the XDMA_EVENT_INTR0 terminal without software intervention. In this

mode, the output is held low while PWRONRSTn is active and begins to toggle after PWRONRSTn is

released.

5.13.2.5.2 CLKOUT2

The CLKOUT2 signal can be output on the XDMA_EVENT_INTR1 terminal. This terminal connects to one

of seven internal signals through configurable multiplexers. The XDMA_EVENT_INTR1 multiplexer must

be configured for Mode 3 to connect the CLKOUT2 signal to the XDMA_EVENT_INTR1 terminal.

The default reset configuration of the XDMA_EVENT_INTR1 multiplexer is always Mode 7. Software must

configure the XDMA_EVENT_INTR1 multiplexer to Mode 3 for the CLKOUT2 signal to be output on the

XDMA_EVENT_INTR1 terminal.

5.13.3 Timing Parameters and Board Routing Analysis

The timing parameter values specified in this data manual do not include delays by board routings. As a

good board design practice, such delays must always be taken into account. Timing values may be

adjusted by increasing or decreasing such delays. TI recommends using the available IO buffer

information specification (IBIS) models to analyze the timing characteristics correctly. If needed, external

logic hardware such as buffers may be used to compensate any timing differences.

The timing parameter values specified in this data manual assume the SLEWCTRL bit in each pad control

140

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

For the LPDDR2, DDR3, and DDR3L memory interfaces, it is not necessary to use the IBIS models to

analyze timing characteristics. TI provides a PCB routing rules solution that describes the routing rules to

ensure the memory interface timings are met.

5.13.4 Recommended Clock and Control Signal Transition Behavior

All clocks and control signals must transition between VIH and VIL (or between VIL and VIH) in a monotonic

manner.

DCANx_RX

DCANx_TX

141

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.5 Controller Area Network (CAN)

For more information, see the Controller Area Network (CAN) section of the AM437x Sitara Processors

Technical Reference Manual.

5.13.5.1 DCAN Electrical Data and Timing

Table 5-19. Timing Requirements for DCANx Receive

(see Figure 5-17)

NO. OPP100 OPP50 UNIT

MIN MAX MIN MAX

fbaud(baud) Maximum programmable baud rate 1 1 Mbps

1 tw(RX) Pulse duration, receive data bit H - 2(1) H + 2(1) H + 2(1) H + 2(1) ns

(1) H = period of baud rate, 1/programmed baud rate.

Table 5-20. Switching Characteristics for DCANx Transmit

(see Figure 5-17)

NO. PARAMETER OPP100 OPP50 UNIT

MIN MAX MIN MAX

fbaud(baud) Maximum programmable baud rate 1 1 Mbps

2 tw(TX) Pulse duration, transmit data bit H - 2(1) H + 2(1) H - 2(1) H + 2(1) ns

(1) H = period of baud rate, 1/programmed baud rate.

Figure 5-17. DCANx Timings

TCLKIN

TIMER[x]

142

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.6 DMTimer

5.13.6.1 DMTimer Electrical Data and Timing

(1) P = period of PICLKOCP (interface clock).

Table 5-21. Timing Requirements for DMTimer [1-11]

(see Figure 5-18)

NO. MIN MAX UNIT

1 tc(TCLKIN) Cycle time, TCLKIN 4P+1(1) ns

(1) P = period of PICLKTIMER (functional clock).

Table 5-22. Switching Characteristics for DMTimer [4-7]

(see Figure 5-18)

NO. PARAMETER MIN MAX UNIT

2 tw(TIMERxH) Pulse duration, high 4P-3(1) ns

3 tw(TIMERxL) Pulse duration, low 4P-3(1) ns

Figure 5-18. Timer Timing

MDIO_CLK (Output)

MDIO_DATA (Input)

143

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.7 Ethernet Media Access Controller (EMAC) and Switch

5.13.7.1 Ethernet MAC and Switch Electrical Data and Timing

The Ethernet MAC and Switch implemented in the device supports GMII mode, but the design does not

pin out 9 of the 24 GMII signals. This was done to reduce the total number of package terminals.

Therefore, the device does not support GMII mode. MII mode is supported with the remaining GMII

signals.

The AM437x Sitara Processors Technical Reference Manual and this document may reference internal

signal names when discussing peripheral input and output signals because many of the package terminals

can be multiplexed to one of several peripheral signals. For example, the terminal names for port 1 of the

Ethernet MAC and switch have been changed from GMII to MII to indicate their Mode 0 function, but the

internal signal is named GMII. However, documents that describe the Ethernet switch reference these

signals by their internal signal name. For a cross-reference of internal signal names to terminal names,

see Table 4-10.

Operation of the Ethernet MAC and switch in RGMII mode is not supported for OPP50.

Table 5-23. Ethernet MAC and Switch Timing Conditions

TIMING CONDITION PARAMETER MIN TYP MAX UNIT

Input Conditions

tRInput signal rise time 1(1) 5(1) ns

tFInput signal fall time 1(1) 5(1) ns

Output Condition

CLOAD Output load capacitance 3 30 pF

(1) Except when specified otherwise.

5.13.7.1.1 Ethernet MAC/Switch MDIO Electrical Data and Timing

Table 5-24. Timing Requirements for MDIO_DATA

(see Figure 5-19)

NO. MIN TYP MAX UNIT

1 tsu(MDIO-MDC) Setup time, MDIO valid before MDC high 90 ns

2 th(MDIO-MDC) Hold time, MDIO valid from MDC high 0 ns

Figure 5-19. MDIO_DATA Timing - Input Mode

Table 5-25. Switching Characteristics for MDIO_CLK

(see Figure 5-20)

NO. PARAMETER MIN TYP MAX UNIT

1 tc(MDC) Cycle time, MDC 400 ns

2 tw(MDCH) Pulse duration, MDC high 160 ns

3 tw(MDCL) Pulse duration, MDC low 160 ns

4 tt(MDC) Transition time, MDC 5 ns

GMII[x]_RXCLK

MDIO_CLK (Output)

MDIO_DATA (Output)

MDIO_CLK

144

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Figure 5-20. MDIO_CLK Timing

Table 5-26. Switching Characteristics for MDIO_DATA

(see Figure 5-21)

NO. PARAMETER MIN TYP MAX UNIT

1 td(MDC-MDIO) Delay time, MDC high to MDIO valid 10 390 ns

Figure 5-21. MDIO_DATA Timing - Output Mode

5.13.7.1.2 Ethernet MAC and Switch MII Electrical Data and Timing

Table 5-27. Timing Requirements for GMII[x]_RXCLK - MII Mode

(see Figure 5-22)

NO. 10 Mbps 100 Mbps UNIT

MIN TYP MAX MIN TYP MAX

1 tc(RX_CLK) Cycle time, RX_CLK 399.96 400.04 39.996 40.004 ns

2 tw(RX_CLKH) Pulse Duration, RX_CLK high 140 260 14 26 ns

3 tw(RX_CLKL) Pulse Duration, RX_CLK low 140 260 14 26 ns

4 tt(RX_CLK) Transition time, RX_CLK 5 5 ns

Figure 5-22. GMII[x]_RXCLK Timing - MII Mode

GMII[x]_MRCLK (Input)

GMII[x]_RXD[3:0], GMII[x]_RXDV,

GMII[x]_RXER (Inputs)

GMII[x]_TXCLK

145

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 5-28. Timing Requirements for GMII[x]_TXCLK - MII Mode

(see Figure 5-23)

NO. 10 Mbps 100 Mbps UNIT

MIN TYP MAX MIN TYP MAX

1 tc(TX_CLK) Cycle time, TX_CLK 399.96 400.04 39.996 40.004 ns

2 tw(TX_CLKH) Pulse Duration, TX_CLK high 140 260 14 26 ns

3 tw(TX_CLKL) Pulse Duration, TX_CLK low 140 260 14 26 ns

4 tt(TX_CLK) Transition time, TX_CLK 5 5 ns

Figure 5-23. GMII[x]_TXCLK Timing - MII Mode

Table 5-29. Timing Requirements for GMII[x]_RXD[3:0], GMII[x]_RXDV, and GMII[x]_RXER - MII Mode

(see Figure 5-24)

NO. 10 Mbps 100 Mbps UNIT

MIN TYP MAX MIN TYP MAX

1tsu(RXD-RX_CLK) Setup time, RXD[3:0] valid before RX_CLK 8 8 nstsu(RX_DV-RX_CLK) Setup time, RX_DV valid before RX_CLK

tsu(RX_ER-RX_CLK) Setup time, RX_ER valid before RX_CLK

2th(RX_CLK-RXD) Hold time RXD[3:0] valid after RX_CLK 8 8 nsth(RX_CLK-RX_DV) Hold time RX_DV valid after RX_CLK

th(RX_CLK-RX_ER) Hold time RX_ER valid after RX_CLK

Figure 5-24. GMII[x]_RXD[3:0], GMII[x]_RXDV, GMII[x]_RXER Timing - MII Mode

GMII[x]_TXCLK (input)

GMII[x]_TXD[3:0],

GMII[x]_TXEN (outputs)

146

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 5-30. Switching Characteristics for GMII[x]_TXD[3:0], and GMII[x]_TXEN - MII Mode

(see Figure 5-25)

NO. PARAMETER 10 Mbps 100 Mbps UNIT

MIN TYP MAX MIN TYP MAX

1td(TX_CLK-TXD) Delay time, TX_CLK high to TXD[3:0] valid 5 25 5 25 ns

td(TX_CLK-TX_EN) Delay time, TX_CLK to TX_EN valid

Figure 5-25. GMII[x]_TXD[3:0], GMII[x]_TXEN Timing - MII Mode

RMII[x]_REFCLK (input)

RMII[x]_RXD[1:0], RMII[x]_CRS_DV,

RMII[x]_RXER (inputs)

RMII[x]_REFCLK

(Input)

147

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.7.1.3 Ethernet MAC and Switch RMII Electrical Data and Timing

Table 5-31. Timing Requirements for RMII[x]_REFCLK - RMII Mode

(see Figure 5-26)

NO. MIN TYP MAX UNIT

1 tc(REF_CLK) Cycle time, REF_CLK 19.999 20.001 ns

2 tw(REF_CLKH) Pulse Duration, REF_CLK high 7 13 ns

3 tw(REF_CLKL) Pulse Duration, REF_CLK low 7 13 ns

Figure 5-26. RMII[x]_REFCLK Timing - RMII Mode

Table 5-32. Timing Requirements for RMII[x]_RXD[1:0], RMII[x]_CRS_DV, and RMII[x]_RXER - RMII Mode

(see Figure 5-27)

NO. MIN TYP MAX UNIT

1tsu(RXD-REF_CLK) Setup time, RXD[1:0] valid before REF_CLK 4 nstsu(CRS_DV-REF_CLK) Setup time, CRS_DV valid before REF_CLK

tsu(RX_ER-REF_CLK) Setup time, RX_ER valid before REF_CLK

2th(REF_CLK-RXD) Hold time RXD[1:0] valid after REF_CLK 2 nsth(REF_CLK-CRS_DV) Hold time, CRS_DV valid after REF_CLK

th(REF_CLK-RX_ER) Hold time, RX_ER valid after REF_CLK

Figure 5-27. RMII[x]_RXD[1:0], RMII[x]_CRS_DV, RMII[x]_RXER Timing - RMII Mode

RMII[x]_REFCLK (Input)

RMII[x]_TXD[1:0],

RMII[x]_TXEN (Outputs)

148

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 5-33. Switching Characteristics for RMII[x]_TXD[1:0], and RMII[x]_TXEN - RMII Mode

(see Figure 5-28)

NO. PARAMETER MIN TYP MAX UNIT

1td(REF_CLK-TXD) Delay time, REF_CLK high to TXD[1:0] valid 2 14.2 ns

td(REF_CLK-TXEN) Delay time, REF_CLK to TXEN valid

2tr(TXD) Rise time, TXD outputs 1 5 ns

tr(TX_EN) Rise time, TX_EN output

3tf(TXD) Fall time, TXD outputs 1 5 ns

tf(TX_EN) Fall time, TX_EN output

Figure 5-28. RMII[x]_TXD[1:0], RMII[x]_TXEN Timing - RMII Mode

RGMII[x]_RD[3:0](B)

RGMII[x]_RCTL(B)

RGMII[x]_RCLK(A)

RXERR

1st Half-byte

2nd Half-byte

RXDV

RGRXD[3:0] RGRXD[7:4]

RGMII[x]_RCLK

149

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.7.1.4 Ethernet MAC and Switch RGMII Electrical Data and Timing

Table 5-34. Timing Requirements for RGMII[x]_RCLK - RGMII Mode

(see Figure 5-29)

NO. 10 Mbps 100 Mbps 1000 Mbps UNIT

MIN TYP MAX MIN TYP MAX MIN TYP MAX

1 tc(RXC) Cycle time, RXC 360 440 36 44 7.2 8.8 ns

2 tw(RXCH) Pulse duration, RXC

high 160 240 16 24 3.6 4.4 ns

3 tw(RXCL) Pulse duration, RXC low 160 240 16 24 3.6 4.4 ns

4 tt(RXC) Transition time, RXC 0.75 0.75 0.75 ns

Figure 5-29. RGMII[x]_RCLK Timing - RGMII Mode

Table 5-35. Timing Requirements for RGMII[x]_RD[3:0], and RGMII[x]_RCTL - RGMII Mode

(see Figure 5-30)

NO. 10 Mbps 100 Mbps 1000 Mbps UNIT

MIN TYP MAX MIN TYP MAX MIN TYP MAX

1tsu(RD-RXC) Setup time, RD[3:0] valid

before RXC high or low 111ns

tsu(RX_CTL-RXC) Setup time, RX_CTL valid

before RXC high or low 111

2th(RXC-RD) Hold time, RD[3:0] valid

after RXC high or low 111ns

th(RXC-RX_CTL) Hold time, RX_CTL valid

after RXC high or low 111

3tt(RD) Transition time, RD 0.75 0.75 0.75 ns

tt(RX_CTL) Transition time, RX_CTL 0.75 0.75 0.75

A. RGMII[x]_RCLK must be externally delayed relative to the RGMII[x]_RD[3:0] and RGMII[x]_RCTL signals to meet the

respective timing requirements.

B. Data and control information is received using both edges of the clocks. RGMII[x]_RD[3:0] carries data bits 3-0 on the

rising edge of RGMII[x]_RCLK and data bits 7-4 on the falling edge of RGMII[x]_RCLK. Similarly, RGMII[x]_RCTL

carries RXDV on rising edge of RGMII[x]_RCLK and RXERR on falling edge of RGMII[x]_RCLK.

Figure 5-30. RGMII[x]_RD[3:0], RGMII[x]_RCTL Timing - RGMII Mode

RGMII[x]_TCLK(A)

RGMII[x]_TD[3:0](B)

RGMII[x]_TCTL(B)

1st Half-byte

TXERRTXEN

2nd Half-byte

RGMII[x]_TCLK

150

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 5-36. Switching Characteristics for RGMII[x]_TCLK - RGMII Mode

(see Figure 5-31)

NO. PARAMETER 10 Mbps 100 Mbps 1000 Mbps UNIT

MIN TYP MAX MIN TYP MAX MIN TYP MAX

1 tc(TXC) Cycle time, TXC 360 440 36 44 7.2 8.8 ns

2 tw(TXCH) Pulse duration, TXC

high 160 240 16 24 3.6 4.4 ns

3 tw(TXCL) Pulse duration, TXC low 160 240 16 24 3.6 4.4 ns

4 tt(TXC) Transition time, TXC 0.75 0.75 0.75 ns

Figure 5-31. RGMII[x]_TCLK Timing - RGMII Mode

Table 5-37. Switching Characteristics for RGMII[x]_TD[3:0], and RGMII[x]_TCTL - RGMII Mode

(see Figure 5-32)

NO. PARAMETER 10 Mbps 100 Mbps 1000 Mbps UNIT

MIN TYP MAX MIN TYP MAX MIN TYP MAX

1tsk(TD-TXC) TD to TXC output skew -0.5 0.5 -0.5 0.5 -0.5 0.5 ns

tsk(TX_CTL-TXC) TX_CTL to TXC output skew -0.5 0.5 -0.5 0.5 -0.5 0.5

2tt(TD) Transition time, TD 0.75 0.75 0.75 ns

tt(TX_CTL) Transition time, TX_CTL 0.75 0.75 0.75

A. The Ethernet MAC and switch implemented in the device supports internal TX delay mode.

B. Data and control information is transmitted using both edges of the clocks. RGMII[x]_TD[3:0] carries data bits 3-0 on

the rising edge of RGMII[x]_TCLK and data bits 7-4 on the falling edge of RGMII[x]_TCLK. Similarly, RGMII[x]_TCTL

carries TXEN on rising edge of RGMII[x]_TCLK and TXERR of falling edge of RGMII[x]_TCLK.

Figure 5-32. RGMII[x]_TD[3:0], RGMII[x]_TCTL Timing - RGMII Mode

151

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.8 External Memory Interfaces

The device includes the following external memory interfaces:

• General-purpose memory controller (GPMC)

• LPDDR2, DDR3, and DDR3L Memory Interface (EMIF)

5.13.8.1 General-Purpose Memory Controller (GPMC)

NOTE

For more information, see the Memory Subsystem and General-Purpose Memory Controller

section of the AM437x Sitara Processors Technical Reference Manual.

The GPMC is the unified memory controller used to interface external memory devices such as:

• Asynchronous SRAM-like memories and ASIC devices

• Asynchronous page mode and synchronous burst NOR flash

• NAND flash

5.13.8.1.1 GPMC and NOR Flash—Synchronous Mode

Table 5-39 and Table 5-40 assume testing over the recommended operating conditions and electrical

characteristic conditions below (see Figure 5-33 through Figure 5-37).

Table 5-38. GPMC and NOR Flash Timing Conditions—Synchronous Mode

TIMING CONDITION PARAMETER MIN TYP MAX UNIT

Input Conditions

tRInput signal rise time 0.3 1.8 ns

tFInput signal fall time 0.3 1.8 ns

Output Condition

CLOAD Output load capacitance 3 30 pF

Table 5-39. GPMC and NOR Flash Timing Requirements—Synchronous Mode

NO. OPP100 OPP50 UNIT

MIN MAX MIN MAX

F12 tsu(dV-clkH) Setup time, input data gpmc_ad[15:0] valid before output clock

gpmc_clk high 3.5 13.2 ns

F13 th(clkH-dV) Hold time, input data gpmc_ad[15:0] valid after output clock

gpmc_clk high 2.5 2.75 ns

F21 tsu(waitV-clkH) Setup time, input wait gpmc_wait[x](1) valid before output clock

gpmc_clk high 3.5 13.2 ns

F22 th(clkH-waitV) Hold time, input wait gpmc_wait[x](1) valid after output clock

gpmc_clk high 2.5 2.5 ns

(1) In gpmc_wait[x], x is equal to 0 or 1.

152

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 5-40. GPMC and NOR Flash Switching Characteristics—Synchronous Mode

NO. PARAMETER OPP100 OPP50 UNIT

MIN MAX MIN MAX

F0 1 / tc(clk) Frequency(1), output clock gpmc_clk 100 50 MHz

F1 tw(clkH) Typical pulse duration, output clock gpmc_clk high 0.5P(2) 0.5P(2) 0.5P(2) 0.5P(2) ns

F1 tw(clkL) Typical pulse duration, output clock gpmc_clk low 0.5P(2) 0.5P(2) 0.5P(2) 0.5P(2) ns

tdc(clk) Duty cycle error, output clock gpmc_clk –500 500 –500 500 ps

tJ(clk) Jitter standard deviation(3), output clock gpmc_clk 33.33 33.33 ps

tR(clk) Rise time, output clock gpmc_clk 2 2 ns

tF(clk) Fall time, output clock gpmc_clk 2 2 ns

tR(do) Rise time, output data gpmc_ad[15:0] 2 2 ns

tF(do) Fall time, output data gpmc_ad[15:0] 2 2 ns

F2 td(clkH-csnV) Delay time, output clock gpmc_clk rising edge to

output chip select gpmc_csn[x](4) transition F(5) – 2.2 F(5) + 4.5 F(5) – 3.2 F(5) + 9.5 ns

F3 td(clkH-csnIV) Delay time, output clock gpmc_clk rising edge to

output chip select gpmc_csn[x](4) invalid E(6) – 2.2 E(6) + 4.5 E(6) – 3.2 E(6) + 9.5 ns

F4 td(aV-clk) Delay time, output address gpmc_a[27:1] valid to

output clock gpmc_clk first edge B(7) – 4.5 B(7) + 3.1 B(7) – 5.5 B(7) + 13.1 ns

F5 td(clkH-aIV) Delay time, output clock gpmc_clk rising edge to

output address gpmc_a[27:1] invalid -2.3 4.5 -3.3 15.3 ns

F6 td(be[x]nV-clk) Delay time, output lower byte enable and command

latch enable gpmc_be0n_cle, output upper byte

enable gpmc_be1n valid to output clock gpmc_clk

first edge

B(7) - 1.9 B(7) + 2.3 B(7) – 2.9 B(7) + 12.3 ns

F7 td(clkH-be[x]nIV) Delay time, output clock gpmc_clk rising edge to

output lower byte enable and command latch enable

gpmc_be0n_cle, output upper byte enable

gpmc_be1n invalid(8)

D(9) – 2.3 D(9) + 1.9 D(9) – 3.3 D(9) + 6.9 ns

F7 td(clkL-be[x]nIV) Delay time, gpmc_clk falling edge to

gpmc_nbe0_cle, gpmc_nbe1 invalid(10) D(9) – 2.3 D(9) + 1.9 D(9) – 3.3 D(9) + 6.9 ns

F7 td(clkL-be[x]nIV) Delay time, gpmc_clk falling edge to

gpmc_nbe0_cle, gpmc_nbe1 invalid(11) D(9) – 2.3 D(9) + 1.9 D(9) – 3.3 D(9) + 11.9 ns

F8 td(clkH-advn) Delay time, output clock gpmc_clk rising edge to

output address valid and address latch enable

gpmc_advn_ale transition

G(12) – 2.3 G(12) + 4.5 G(12) – 3.3 G(12) + 9.5 ns

F9 td(clkH-advnIV) Delay time, output clock gpmc_clk rising edge to

output address valid and address latch enable

gpmc_advn_ale invalid

D(9) – 2.3 D(9) + 4.5 D(9) – 3.3 D(9) + 9.5 ns

F10 td(clkH-oen) Delay time, output clock gpmc_clk rising edge to

output enable gpmc_oen transition H(13) – 2.3 H(13) + 3.5 H(13) – 3.3 H(13) + 8.5 ns

F11 td(clkH-oenIV) Delay time, output clock gpmc_clk rising edge to

output enable gpmc_oen invalid H(13) – 2.3 H(13) + 3.5 H(13) – 3.3 H(13) + 8.5 ns

F14 td(clkH-wen) Delay time, output clock gpmc_clk rising edge to

output write enable gpmc_wen transition I(14) – 2.3 I(14) + 4.5 I(14) – 3.3 I(14) + 9.5 ns

F15 td(clkH-do) Delay time, output clock gpmc_clk rising edge to

output data gpmc_ad[15:0] transition(8) J(15) – 2.3 J(15) + 2.7 J(15) – 3.3 J(15) + 7.7 ns

F15 td(clkL-do) Delay time, gpmc_clk falling edge to gpmc_ad[15:0]

data bus transition(10) J(15) – 2.3 J(15) + 2.7 J(15) – 3.3 J(15) + 7.7 ns

F15 td(clkL-do) Delay time, gpmc_clk falling edge to gpmc_ad[15:0]

data bus transition(11) J(15) – 2.3 J(15) + 2.7 J(15) – 3.3 J(15) + 12.7 ns

F17 td(clkH-be[x]n) Delay time, output clock gpmc_clk rising edge to

output lower byte enable and command latch enable

gpmc_be0n_cle transition(8)

J(15) – 2.3 J(15) + 1.9 J(15) – 3.3 J(15) + 6.9 ns

F17 td(clkL-be[x]n) Delay time, gpmc_clk falling edge to

gpmc_nbe0_cle, gpmc_nbe1 transition(10) J(15) – 2.3 J(15) + 1.9 J(15) – 3.3 J(15) + 6.9 ns

F17 td(clkL-be[x]n) Delay time, gpmc_clk falling edge to

gpmc_nbe0_cle, gpmc_nbe1 transition(11) J(15) – 2.3 J(15) + 1.9 J(15) – 3.3 J(15) + 11.9 ns

153

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 5-40. GPMC and NOR Flash Switching Characteristics—Synchronous Mode (continued)

NO. PARAMETER OPP100 OPP50 UNIT

MIN MAX MIN MAX

F18 tw(csnV) Pulse duration, output chip select

gpmc_csn[x](4) low Read A(16) A(16) ns

Write A(16) A(16) ns

F19 tw(be[x]nV) Pulse duration, output lower byte enable

and command latch enable

gpmc_be0n_cle, output upper byte enable

gpmc_be1n low

Read C(17) C(17) ns

Write C(17) C(17) ns

F20 tw(advnV) Pulse duration, output address valid and

address latch enable gpmc_advn_ale low Read K(18) K(18) ns

Write K(18) K(18) ns

(1) Related to the gpmc_clk output clock maximum and minimum frequencies programmable in the GPMC module by setting the

GPMC_CONFIG1_CSx configuration register bit field GpmcFCLKDivider.

(2) P = gpmc_clk period in ns

(3) The jitter probability density can be approximated by a Gaussian function.

(4) In gpmc_csn[x], x is equal to 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6. In gpmc_wait[x], x is equal to 0 or 1.

(5) For csn falling edge (CS activated):

– Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 0:

– F = 0.5 × CSExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK(19)

– Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 1:

– F = 0.5 × CSExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK(19) if (ClkActivationTime and CSOnTime are odd) or (ClkActivationTime and

CSOnTime are even)

– F = (1 + 0.5 × CSExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK(19) otherwise

– Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 2:

– F = 0.5 × CSExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK(19) if ((CSOnTime – ClkActivationTime) is a multiple of 3)

– F = (1 + 0.5 × CSExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK(19) if ((CSOnTime – ClkActivationTime – 1) is a multiple of 3)

– F = (2 + 0.5 × CSExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK(19) if ((CSOnTime – ClkActivationTime – 2) is a multiple of 3)

(6) For single read: E = (CSRdOffTime – AccessTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK(19)

For burst read: E = (CSRdOffTime – AccessTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK(19)

For burst write: E = (CSWrOffTime – AccessTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK(19)

(7) B = ClkActivationTime × GPMC_FCLK(19)

(8) First transfer only for CLK DIV 1 mode.

(9) For single read: D = (RdCycleTime – AccessTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK(19)

For burst read: D = (RdCycleTime – AccessTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK(19)

For burst write: D = (WrCycleTime – AccessTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK(19)

(10) Half cycle; for all data after initial transfer for CLK DIV 1 mode.

(11) Half cycle of GPMC_CLK_OUT; for all data for modes other than CLK DIV 1 mode. GPMC_CLK_OUT divide down from GPMC_FCLK.

(12) For ADV falling edge (ADV activated):

– Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 0:

– G = 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK(19)

– Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 1:

– G = 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK(19) if (ClkActivationTime and ADVOnTime are odd) or (ClkActivationTime and

ADVOnTime are even)

– G = (1 + 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK(19) otherwise

– Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 2:

– G = 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK(19) if ((ADVOnTime – ClkActivationTime) is a multiple of 3)

– G = (1 + 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK(19) if ((ADVOnTime – ClkActivationTime – 1) is a multiple of 3)

– G = (2 + 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK(19) if ((ADVOnTime – ClkActivationTime – 2) is a multiple of 3)

For ADV rising edge (ADV deactivated) in Reading mode:

– Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 0:

– G = 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK(19)

– Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 1:

– G = 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK(19) if (ClkActivationTime and ADVRdOffTime are odd) or (ClkActivationTime and

ADVRdOffTime are even)

– G = (1 + 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK(19) otherwise

– Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 2:

– G = 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK(19) if ((ADVRdOffTime – ClkActivationTime) is a multiple of 3)

– G = (1 + 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK(19) if ((ADVRdOffTime – ClkActivationTime – 1) is a multiple of 3)

– G = (2 + 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK(19) if ((ADVRdOffTime – ClkActivationTime – 2) is a multiple of 3)

For ADV rising edge (ADV deactivated) in Writing mode:

– Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 0:

154

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

– G = 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK(19)

– Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 1:

– G = 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK(19) if (ClkActivationTime and ADVWrOffTime are odd) or (ClkActivationTime and

ADVWrOffTime are even)

– G = (1 + 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK(19) otherwise

– Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 2:

– G = 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK(19) if ((ADVWrOffTime – ClkActivationTime) is a multiple of 3)

– G = (1 + 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK(19) if ((ADVWrOffTime – ClkActivationTime – 1) is a multiple of 3)

– G = (2 + 0.5 × ADVExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK(19) if ((ADVWrOffTime – ClkActivationTime – 2) is a multiple of 3)

(13) For OE falling edge (OE activated) and IO DIR rising edge (Data Bus input direction):

– Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 0:

– H = 0.5 × OEExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK(19)

– Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 1:

– H = 0.5 × OEExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK(19) if (ClkActivationTime and OEOnTime are odd) or (ClkActivationTime and

OEOnTime are even)

– H = (1 + 0.5 × OEExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK(19) otherwise

– Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 2:

– H = 0.5 × OEExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK(19) if ((OEOnTime – ClkActivationTime) is a multiple of 3)

– H = (1 + 0.5 × OEExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK(19) if ((OEOnTime – ClkActivationTime – 1) is a multiple of 3)

– H = (2 + 0.5 × OEExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK(19) if ((OEOnTime – ClkActivationTime – 2) is a multiple of 3)

For OE rising edge (OE deactivated):

– Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 0:

– H = 0.5 × OEExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK(19)

– Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 1:

– H = 0.5 × OEExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK(19) if (ClkActivationTime and OEOffTime are odd) or (ClkActivationTime and

OEOffTime are even)

– H = (1 + 0.5 × OEExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK(19) otherwise

– Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 2:

– H = 0.5 × OEExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK(19) if ((OEOffTime – ClkActivationTime) is a multiple of 3)

– H = (1 + 0.5 × OEExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK(19) if ((OEOffTime – ClkActivationTime – 1) is a multiple of 3)

– H = (2 + 0.5 × OEExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK(19) if ((OEOffTime – ClkActivationTime – 2) is a multiple of 3)

(14) For WE falling edge (WE activated):

– Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 0:

– I = 0.5 × WEExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK(19)

– Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 1:

– I = 0.5 × WEExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK(19) if (ClkActivationTime and WEOnTime are odd) or (ClkActivationTime and

WEOnTime are even)

– I = (1 + 0.5 × WEExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK(19) otherwise

– Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 2:

– I = 0.5 × WEExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK(19) if ((WEOnTime – ClkActivationTime) is a multiple of 3)

– I = (1 + 0.5 × WEExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK(19) if ((WEOnTime – ClkActivationTime – 1) is a multiple of 3)

– I = (2 + 0.5 × WEExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK(19) if ((WEOnTime – ClkActivationTime – 2) is a multiple of 3)

For WE rising edge (WE deactivated):

– Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 0:

– I = 0.5 × WEExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK (19)

– Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 1:

– I = 0.5 × WEExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK(19) if (ClkActivationTime and WEOffTime are odd) or (ClkActivationTime and

WEOffTime are even)

– I = (1 + 0.5 × WEExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK(19) otherwise

– Case GpmcFCLKDivider = 2:

– I = 0.5 × WEExtraDelay × GPMC_FCLK(19) if ((WEOffTime – ClkActivationTime) is a multiple of 3)

– I = (1 + 0.5 × WEExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK(19) if ((WEOffTime – ClkActivationTime – 1) is a multiple of 3)

– I = (2 + 0.5 × WEExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK(19) if ((WEOffTime – ClkActivationTime – 2) is a multiple of 3)

(15) J = GPMC_FCLK(19)

(16) For single read: A = (CSRdOffTime – CSOnTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK(19)

For burst read: A = (CSRdOffTime – CSOnTime + (n – 1) × PageBurstAccessTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK(19)

For burst write: A = (CSWrOffTime – CSOnTime + (n – 1) × PageBurstAccessTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK(19)

With n being the page burst access number.

(17) For single read: C = RdCycleTime × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK(19)

For burst read: C = (RdCycleTime + (n – 1) × PageBurstAccessTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK(19)

For burst write: C = (WrCycleTime + (n – 1) × PageBurstAccessTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK(19)

With n being the page burst access number.

(18) For read: K = (ADVRdOffTime – ADVOnTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK(19)

For write: K = (ADVWrOffTime – ADVOnTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK(19)

(19) GPMC_FCLK is general-purpose memory controller internal functional clock period in ns.

gpmc_clk

gpmc_csn[x](A)

gpmc_a[10:1]

gpmc_be0n_cle

gpmc_be1n

gpmc_advn_ale

gpmc_oen

gpmc_ad[15:0]

gpmc_wait[x](B)

Valid Address

D 0

F12

F13

F11

F19

F18

F20

F10

F19

155

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

A. In gpmc_csn[x], x is equal to 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6.

B. In gpmc_wait[x], x is equal to 0 or 1.

Figure 5-33. GPMC and NOR Flash—Synchronous Single Read—(GpmcFCLKDivider = 0)

gpmc_clk

gpmc_csn[x](A)

gpmc_a[10:1]

gpmc_be0n_cle

gpmc_be1n

gpmc_advn_ale

gpmc_oen

gpmc_ad[15:0]

gpmc_wait[x](B)

Valid Address

D 0 D 1 D 2

F12

F13 F13

F12

F8 F8 F9

F10 F11

F21 F22

D 3

156

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

A. In gpmc_csn[x], x is equal to 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6.

B. In gpmc_wait[x], x is equal to 0 or 1.

Figure 5-34. GPMC and NOR Flash—Synchronous Burst Read—4x16-bit (GpmcFCLKDivider = 0)

gpmc_clk

gpmc_csn[x](A)

gpmc_a[10:1]

gpmc_be0n_cle

gpmc_be1n

gpmc_advn_ale

gpmc_wen

gpmc_ad[15:0]

gpmc_wait[x](B)

D 0 D 1 D 2 D 3

F15 F15 F15

F8F8

F14F14

F17

F9F6

F17

Valid Address

157

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

A. In gpmc_csn[x], x is equal to 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6.

B. In gpmc_wait[x], x is equal to 0 or 1.

Figure 5-35. GPMC and NOR Flash—Synchronous Burst Write—(GpmcFCLKDivider > 0)

gpmc_clk

gpmc_csn[x](A)

gpmc_be0n_cle

gpmc_be1n

gpmc_a[27:17]

gpmc_ad[15:0]

gpmc_advn_ale

gpmc_oen

gpmc_wait[x](B)

Valid

Address (MSB)

Address (LSB) D0 D1 D2 D3

F8 F8

F10

F13

F12

F11

F0 F1

F6 F7

158

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

A. In gpmc_csn[x], x is equal to 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6.

B. In gpmc_wait[x], x is equal to 0 or 1.

Figure 5-36. GPMC and Multiplexed NOR Flash—Synchronous Burst Read

gpmc_clk

gpmc_csn[x](A)

gpmc_a[27:17]

gpmc_be1n

gpmc_be0n_cle

gpmc_advn_ale

gpmc_wen

gpmc_wait[x](B)

Address (LSB) D 0 D 1 D 2 D 3

F15 F15 F15

F8F8

F17

F6 F17

F17

F18

F20

F14

F22 F21

Address (MSB)

gpmc_ad[15:0]

F14

159

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

A. In gpmc_csn[x], x is equal to 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6.

B. In gpmc_wait[x], x is equal to 0 or 1.

Figure 5-37. GPMC and Multiplexed NOR Flash—Synchronous Burst Write

160

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.8.1.2 GPMC and NOR Flash—Asynchronous Mode

Table 5-42 and Table 5-43 assume testing over the recommended operating conditions and electrical

characteristic conditions below (see Figure 5-38 through Figure 5-43).

Table 5-41. GPMC and NOR Flash Timing Conditions—Asynchronous Mode

TIMING CONDITION PARAMETER MIN TYP MAX UNIT

Input Conditions

tRInput signal rise time 0.3 1.8 ns

tFInput signal fall time 0.3 1.8 ns

Output Condition

CLOAD Output load capacitance 3 30 pF

Table 5-42. GPMC and NOR Flash Internal Timing Parameters—Asynchronous Mode(1)(2)

NO. OPP100 OPP50 UNIT

MIN MAX MIN MAX

FI1 Delay time, output data gpmc_ad[15:0] generation from internal functional clock

GPMC_FCLK(3) 6.5 6.5 ns

FI2 Delay time, input data gpmc_ad[15:0] capture from internal functional clock

GPMC_FCLK(3) 4 4 ns

FI3 Delay time, output chip select gpmc_csn[x] generation from internal functional

clock GPMC_FCLK(3) 6.5 6.5 ns

FI4 Delay time, output address gpmc_a[27:1] generation from internal functional clock

GPMC_FCLK(3) 6.5 6.5 ns

FI5 Delay time, output address gpmc_a[27:1] valid from internal functional clock

GPMC_FCLK(3) 6.5 6.5 ns

FI6 Delay time, output lower-byte enable and command latch enable gpmc_be0n_cle,

output upper-byte enable gpmc_be1n generation from internal functional clock

GPMC_FCLK(3) 6.5 6.5 ns

FI7 Delay time, output enable gpmc_oen generation from internal functional clock

GPMC_FCLK(3) 6.5 6.5 ns

FI8 Delay time, output write enable gpmc_wen generation from internal functional

clock GPMC_FCLK(3) 6.5 6.5 ns

FI9 Skew, internal functional clock GPMC_FCLK(3) 100 100 ps

(1) The internal parameters table must be used to calculate data access time stored in the corresponding CS register bit field.

(2) Internal parameters are referred to the GPMC functional internal clock which is not provided externally.

(3) GPMC_FCLK is general-purpose memory controller internal functional clock.

161

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 5-43. GPMC and NOR Flash Timing Requirements—Asynchronous Mode

NO. OPP100 OPP50 UNIT

MIN MAX MIN MAX

FA5(1) tacc(d) Data access time H(4) H(4) ns

FA20(2) tacc1-pgmode(d) Page mode successive data access time P(5) P(5) ns

FA21(3) tacc2-pgmode(d) Page mode first data access time H(4) H(4) ns

(1) The FA5 parameter illustrates the amount of time required to internally sample input data. It is expressed in number of GPMC functional

clock cycles. From start of read cycle and after FA5 functional clock cycles, input data is internally sampled by active functional clock

edge. FA5 value must be stored inside the AccessTime register bit field.

(2) The FA20 parameter illustrates amount of time required to internally sample successive input page data. It is expressed in number of

GPMC functional clock cycles. After each access to input page data, next input page data is internally sampled by active functional clock

edge after FA20 functional clock cycles. The FA20 value must be stored in the PageBurstAccessTime register bit field.

(3) The FA21 parameter illustrates amount of time required to internally sample first input page data. It is expressed in number of GPMC

functional clock cycles. From start of read cycle and after FA21 functional clock cycles, first input page data is internally sampled by

active functional clock edge. FA21 value must be stored inside the AccessTime register bit field.

(4) H = AccessTime × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK(6)

(5) P = PageBurstAccessTime × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK(6)

(6) GPMC_FCLK is general-purpose memory controller internal functional clock period in ns.

Table 5-44. GPMC and NOR Flash Switching Characteristics—Asynchronous Mode

NO. PARAMETER OPP100 OPP50 UNIT

MIN MAX MIN MAX

tR(d) Rise time, output data gpmc_ad[15:0] 2 2 ns

tF(d) Fall time, output data gpmc_ad[15:0] 2 2 ns

FA0 tw(be[x]nV)

Pulse duration, output lower-byte

enable and command latch enable

gpmc_be0n_cle, output upper-byte

enable gpmc_be1n valid time

Read N(1) N(1)

Write N(1) N(1)

FA1 tw(csnV) Pulse duration, output chip select

gpmc_csn[x](2) low Read A(3) A(3) ns

Write A(3) A(3)

FA3 td(csnV-advnIV)

Delay time, output chip select

gpmc_csn[x](2) valid to output address

valid and address latch enable

gpmc_advn_ale invalid

Read B(4) – 0.2 B(4) + 2.0 B(4) – 0.2 B(4) + 2.0 ns

Write B(4) – 0.2 B(4) + 2.0 B(4) – 0.2 B(4) + 2.0

FA4 td(csnV-oenIV) Delay time, output chip select gpmc_csn[x](2)

valid to output enable gpmc_oen invalid (Single

read) C(5) – 0.2 C(5) + 2.0 C(5) – 0.2 C(5) + 2.0 ns

FA9 td(aV-csnV) Delay time, output address gpmc_a[27:1] valid

to output chip select gpmc_csn[x](2) valid J(6) – 0.2 J(6) + 2.0 J(6) – 0.2 J(6) + 2.0 ns

FA10 td(be[x]nV-csnV)

Delay time, output lower-byte enable and

command latch enable gpmc_be0n_cle, output

upper-byte enable gpmc_be1n valid to output

chip select gpmc_csn[x](2) valid J(6) – 0.2 J(6) + 2.0 J(6) – 0.2 J(6) + 2.0 ns

FA12 td(csnV-advnV) Delay time, output chip select gpmc_csn[x](2)

valid to output address valid and address latch

enable gpmc_advn_ale valid K(7) – 0.2 K(7) + 2.0 K(7) – 0.2 K(7) + 2.0 ns

FA13 td(csnV-oenV) Delay time, output chip select gpmc_csn[x](2)

valid to output enable gpmc_oen valid L(8) – 0.2 L(8) + 2.0 L (8) – 0.2 L(8) + 2.0 ns

FA16 tw(aIV) Pulse durationm output address gpmc_a[26:1]

invalid between 2 successive read and write

accesses G(9) G(9) ns

FA18 td(csnV-oenIV) Delay time, output chip select gpmc_csn[x](2)

valid to output enable gpmc_oen invalid (Burst

read) I(10) – 0.2 I(10) + 2.0 I(10) – 0.2 I(10) + 2.0 ns

FA20 tw(aV) Pulse duration, output address gpmc_a[27:1]

valid — 2nd, 3rd, and 4th accesses D(11) D(11) ns

FA25 td(csnV-wenV) Delay time, output chip select gpmc_csn[x](2)

valid to output write enable gpmc_wen valid E(12) – 0.2 E(12) + 2.0 E(12) – 0.2 E(12) + 2.0 ns

162

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 5-44. GPMC and NOR Flash Switching Characteristics—Asynchronous Mode (continued)

NO. PARAMETER OPP100 OPP50 UNIT

MIN MAX MIN MAX

FA27 td(csnV-wenIV) Delay time, output chip select gpmc_csn[x](2)

valid to output write enable gpmc_wen invalid F(13) – 0.2 F(13) + 2.0 F(13) – 0.2 F(13) + 2.0 ns

FA28 td(wenV-dV) Delay time, output write enable gpmc_ wen

valid to output data gpmc_ad[15:0] valid 2.8 5 ns

FA29 td(dV-csnV) Delay time, output data gpmc_ad[15:0] valid to

output chip select gpmc_csn[x](2) valid J(6) – 0.2 J(6) + 2.8 J(6) – 0.2 J(6) + 2.8 ns

FA37 td(oenV-aIV) Delay time, output enable gpmc_oen valid to

output address gpmc_ad[15:0] phase end 2.8 2.8 ns

(1) For single read: N = RdCycleTime × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK(14)

For single write: N = WrCycleTime × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK(14)

For burst read: N = (RdCycleTime + (n – 1) × PageBurstAccessTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK(14)

For burst write: N = (WrCycleTime + (n – 1) × PageBurstAccessTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK(14)

(2) In gpmc_csn[x], x is equal to 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6.

(3) For single read: A = (CSRdOffTime – CSOnTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK(14)

For single write: A = (CSWrOffTime – CSOnTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK(14)

For burst read: A = (CSRdOffTime – CSOnTime + (n – 1) × PageBurstAccessTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK(14)

For burst write: A = (CSWrOffTime – CSOnTime + (n – 1) × PageBurstAccessTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK(14)

with n being the page burst access number

(4) For reading: B = ((ADVRdOffTime – CSOnTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 × (ADVExtraDelay – CSExtraDelay)) ×

GPMC_FCLK(14)

For writing: B = ((ADVWrOffTime – CSOnTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 × (ADVExtraDelay – CSExtraDelay)) ×

GPMC_FCLK(14)

(5) C = ((OEOffTime – CSOnTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 × (OEExtraDelay – CSExtraDelay)) × GPMC_FCLK(14)

(6) J = (CSOnTime × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 × CSExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK(14)

(7) K = ((ADVOnTime – CSOnTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 × (ADVExtraDelay – CSExtraDelay)) × GPMC_FCLK(14)

(8) L = ((OEOnTime – CSOnTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 × (OEExtraDelay – CSExtraDelay)) × GPMC_FCLK(14)

(9) G = Cycle2CycleDelay × GPMC_FCLK(14)

(10) I = ((OEOffTime + (n – 1) × PageBurstAccessTime – CSOnTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 × (OEExtraDelay – CSExtraDelay))

× GPMC_FCLK(14)

(11) D = PageBurstAccessTime × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK(14)

(12) E = ((WEOnTime – CSOnTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 × (WEExtraDelay – CSExtraDelay)) × GPMC_FCLK(14)

(13) F = ((WEOffTime – CSOnTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 × (WEExtraDelay – CSExtraDelay)) × GPMC_FCLK(14)

(14) GPMC_FCLK is general-purpose memory controller internal functional clock period in ns.

GPMC_FCLK(A)

gpmc_clk

gpmc_csn[x](C)

gpmc_a[10:1]

gpmc_be0n_cle

gpmc_be1n

gpmc_advn_ale

gpmc_oen

gpmc_ad[15:0]

gpmc_wait[x](C)

Valid Address

Valid

Data IN 0 Data IN 0

FA0

FA9

FA10

FA3

FA1

FA4

FA12

FA13

FA0

FA10

FA5(B)

163

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

A. GPMC_FCLK is an internal clock (GPMC functional clock) not provided externally.

B. FA5 parameter illustrates amount of time required to internally sample input data. It is expressed in number of GPMC

functional clock cycles. From start of read cycle and after FA5 functional clock cycles, input data will be internally

sampled by active functional clock edge. FA5 value must be stored inside AccessTime register bits field.

C. In gpmc_csn[x], x is equal to 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6. In gpmc_wait[x], x is equal to 0 or 1.

Figure 5-38. GPMC and NOR Flash—Asynchronous Read—Single Word

GPMC_FCLK(A)

gpmc_clk

gpmc_csn[x](C)

gpmc_a[10:1]

gpmc_be0n_cle

gpmc_be1n

gpmc_advn_ale

gpmc_oen

gpmc_ad[15:0]

gpmc_wait[x](C)

Address 0 Address 1

Valid Valid

Data Upper

FA9

FA10

FA3

FA9

FA3

FA13 FA13

FA1 FA1

FA4 FA4

FA12 FA12

FA10

FA0 FA0

FA16

FA0 FA0

FA10 FA10

FA5(B) FA5(B)

164

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

A. GPMC_FCLK is an internal clock (GPMC functional clock) not provided externally.

B. FA5 parameter illustrates amount of time required to internally sample input data. It is expressed in number of GPMC

functional clock cycles. From start of read cycle and after FA5 functional clock cycles, input data will be internally

sampled by active functional clock edge. FA5 value must be stored inside AccessTime register bits field.

C. In gpmc_csn[x], x is equal to 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6. In gpmc_wait[x], x is equal to 0 or 1.

Figure 5-39. GPMC and NOR Flash—Asynchronous Read—32-Bit

GPMC_FCLK(A)

gpmc_clk

gpmc_csn[x](D)

gpmc_a[10:1]

gpmc_be0n_cle

gpmc_be1n

gpmc_advn_ale

gpmc_oen

gpmc_ad[15:0]

gpmc_wait[x](D)

Add0 Add1 Add2 Add3

Add4

D0 D1 D2 D3 D3

FA1

FA0

FA18

FA13

FA12

FA0

FA9

FA10

FA21(B) FA20(C) FA20(C)

FA20(C)

165

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

A. GPMC_FCLK is an internal clock (GPMC functional clock) not provided externally.

B. FA21 parameter illustrates amount of time required to internally sample first input page data. It is expressed in

number of GPMC functional clock cycles. From start of read cycle and after FA21 functional clock cycles, first input

page data will be internally sampled by active functional clock edge. FA21 calculation must be stored inside

AccessTime register bits field.

C. FA20 parameter illustrates amount of time required to internally sample successive input page data. It is expressed in

number of GPMC functional clock cycles. After each access to input page data, next input page data will be internally

sampled by active functional clock edge after FA20 functional clock cycles. FA20 is also the duration of address

phases for successive input page data (excluding first input page data). FA20 value must be stored in

PageBurstAccessTime register bits field.

D. In gpmc_csn[x], x is equal to 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6. In gpmc_wait[x], x is equal to 0 or 1.

Figure 5-40. GPMC and NOR Flash—Asynchronous Read—Page Mode 4x16-Bit

gpmc_fclk

gpmc_clk

gpmc_csn[x](A)

gpmc_a[10:1]

gpmc_be0n_cle

gpmc_be1n

gpmc_advn_ale

gpmc_wen

gpmc_ad[15:0]

gpmc_wait[x](A)

Valid Address

Data OUT

FA0

FA1

FA10

FA3

FA25

FA29

FA9

FA12

FA27

FA0

FA10

166

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

A. In gpmc_csn[x], x is equal to 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6. In gpmc_wait[x], x is equal to 0 or 1.

Figure 5-41. GPMC and NOR Flash—Asynchronous Write—Single Word

GPMC_FCLK(A)

gpmc_clk

gpmc_csn[x](C)

gpmc_be0n_cle

gpmc_be1n

gpmc_advn_ale

gpmc_oen

gpmc_wait[x](C)

Address (MSB)

Valid

Address (LSB) Data IN Data IN

FA0

FA9

FA10

FA3

FA13

FA29

FA1

FA37

FA12

FA4

FA10

FA0

FA5(B)

gpmc_a[27:17]

gpmc_ad[15:0]

167

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

A. GPMC_FCLK is an internal clock (GPMC functional clock) not provided externally.

B. FA5 parameter illustrates amount of time required to internally sample input data. It is expressed in number of GPMC

functional clock cycles. From start of read cycle and after FA5 functional clock cycles, input data will be internally

sampled by active functional clock edge. FA5 value must be stored inside AccessTime register bits field.

C. In gpmc_csn[x], x is equal to 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6. In gpmc_wait[x], x is equal to 0 or 1.

Figure 5-42. GPMC and Multiplexed NOR Flash—Asynchronous Read—Single Word

gpmc_fclk

gpmc_clk

gpmc_csn[x](A)

gpmc_a[27:17]

gpmc_be0n_cle

gpmc_be1n

gpmc_advn_ale

gpmc_wen

gpmc_ad[15:0]

gpmc_wait[x](A)

Address (MSB)

Valid Address (LSB) Data OUT

FA0

FA1

FA9

FA10

FA3

FA25

FA29

FA12

FA27

FA28

FA0

FA10

168

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

A. In gpmc_csn[x], x is equal to 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6. In gpmc_wait[x], x is equal to 0 or 1.

Figure 5-43. GPMC and Multiplexed NOR Flash—Asynchronous Write—Single Word

169

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.8.1.3 GPMC and NAND Flash—Asynchronous Mode

Table 5-46 and Table 5-47 assume testing over the recommended operating conditions and electrical

characteristic conditions below (see Figure 5-44 through Figure 5-47).

Table 5-45. GPMC and NAND Flash Timing Conditions—Asynchronous Mode

TIMING CONDITION PARAMETER MIN TYP MAX UNIT

Input Conditions

tRInput signal rise time 0.3 1.8 ns

tFInput signal fall time 0.3 1.8 ns

Output Condition

CLOAD Output load capacitance 3 30 pF

Table 5-46. GPMC and NAND Flash Internal Timing Parameters—Asynchronous Mode(1)(2)

NO. OPP100 OPP50 UNIT

MIN MAX MIN MAX

GNFI1 Delay time, output data gpmc_ad[15:0] generation from internal

functional clock GPMC_FCLK(3) 6.5 6.5 ns

GNFI2 Delay time, input data gpmc_ad[15:0] capture from internal functional

clock GPMC_FCLK(3) 4.0 4.0 ns

GNFI3 Delay time, output chip select gpmc_csn[x] generation from internal

functional clock GPMC_FCLK(3) 6.5 6.5 ns

GNFI4 Delay time, output address valid and address latch enable

gpmc_advn_ale generation from internal functional clock

GPMC_FCLK(3)

6.5 6.5 ns

GNFI5 Delay time, output lower-byte enable and command latch enable

gpmc_be0n_cle generation from internal functional clock

GPMC_FCLK(3)

6.5 6.5 ns

GNFI6 Delay time, output enable gpmc_oen generation from internal functional

clock GPMC_FCLK(3) 6.5 6.5 ns

GNFI7 Delay time, output write enable gpmc_wen generation from internal

functional clock GPMC_FCLK(3) 6.5 6.5 ns

GNFI8 Skew, functional clock GPMC_FCLK(3) 100 100 ps

(1) Internal parameters table must be used to calculate data access time stored in the corresponding CS register bit field.

(2) Internal parameters are referred to the GPMC functional internal clock which is not provided externally.

(3) GPMC_FCLK is general-purpose memory controller internal functional clock.

Table 5-47. GPMC and NAND Flash Timing Requirements—Asynchronous Mode

NO. OPP100 OPP50 UNIT

MIN MAX MIN MAX

GNF12(1) tacc(d) Access time, input data gpmc_ad[15:0] J(2) J(2) ns

(1) The GNF12 parameter illustrates the amount of time required to internally sample input data. It is expressed in number of GPMC

functional clock cycles. From start of the read cycle and after GNF12 functional clock cycles, input data is internally sampled by the

active functional clock edge. The GNF12 value must be stored inside AccessTime register bit field.

(2) J = AccessTime × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK(3)

(3) GPMC_FCLK is general-purpose memory controller internal functional clock period in ns.

170

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 5-48. GPMC and NAND Flash Switching Characteristics—Asynchronous Mode

NO. PARAMETER OPP100 OPP50 UNIT

MIN MAX MIN MAX

tR(d) Rise time, output data gpmc_ad[15:0] 2 2 ns

tF(d) Fall time, output data gpmc_ad[15:0] 2 2 ns

GNF0 tw(wenV) Pulse duration, output write enable gpmc_wen

valid A(1) A(1) ns

GNF1 td(csnV-wenV) Delay time, output chip select gpmc_csn[x](2)

valid to output write enable gpmc_wen valid B(3) - 0.2 B(3) + 2.0 B(3) - 0.2 B(3) + 2.0 ns

GNF2 tw(cleH-wenV) Delay time, output lower-byte enable and

command latch enable gpmc_be0n_cle high to

output write enable gpmc_wen valid

C(4) - 0.2 C(4) + 2.0 C(4) - 0.2 C(4) + 2.0 ns

GNF3 tw(wenV-dV) Delay time, output data gpmc_ad[15:0] valid to

output write enable gpmc_wen valid D(5) - 0.2 D(5) + 2.8 D(5) - 0.2 D(5) + 2.0 ns

GNF4 tw(wenIV-dIV) Delay time, output write enable gpmc_wen

invalid to output data gpmc_ad[15:0] invalid E(6) - 0.2 E(6) + 2.8 E(6) - 0.2 E(6) + 2.0 ns

GNF5 tw(wenIV-cleIV) Delay time, output write enable gpmc_wen

invalid to output lower-byte enable and command

latch enable gpmc_be0n_cle invalid

F(7) - 0.2 F(7) + 2.0 F(7) - 0.2 F(7) + 2.0 ns

GNF6 tw(wenIV-csnIV) Delay time, output write enable gpmc_wen

invalid to output chip select gpmc_csn[x](2)

invalid

G(8) - 0.2 G(8) + 2.0 G(8) - 0.2 G(8) + 2.0 ns

GNF7 tw(aleH-wenV) Delay time, output address valid and address

latch enable gpmc_advn_ale high to output write

enable gpmc_wen valid

C(4) - 0.2 C(4) + 2.0 C(4) - 0.2 C(4) + 2.0 ns

GNF8 tw(wenIV-aleIV) Delay time, output write enable gpmc_wen

invalid to output address valid and address latch

enable gpmc_advn_ale invalid

F(7) - 0.2 F(7) + 2.0 F(7) - 0.2 F(7) + 2.0 ns

GNF9 tc(wen) Cycle time, write H(9) H(9) ns

GNF10 td(csnV-oenV) Delay time, output chip select gpmc_csn[x](2)

valid to output enable gpmc_oen valid I(10) - 0.2 I(10) + 2.0 I(10) - 0.2 I(10) + 2.0 ns

GNF13 tw(oenV) Pulse duration, output enable gpmc_oen valid K(11) K(11) ns

GNF14 tc(oen) Cycle time, read L(12) L(12) ns

GNF15 tw(oenIV-csnIV) Delay time, output enable gpmc_oen invalid to

output chip select gpmc_csn[x](2) invalid M(13) - 0.2 M(13) + 2.0 M(13) - 0.2 M(13) + 2.0 ns

(1) A = (WEOffTime - WEOnTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × GPMC_FCLK(14)

(2) In gpmc_csn[x], x is equal to 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6.

(3) B = ((WEOnTime - CSOnTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 × (WEExtraDelay - CSExtraDelay)) × GPMC_FCLK(14)

(4) C = ((WEOnTime - ADVOnTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 × (WEExtraDelay - ADVExtraDelay)) × GPMC_FCLK(14)

(5) D = (WEOnTime × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 × WEExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK(14)

(6) E = ((WrCycleTime - WEOffTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) - 0.5 × WEExtraDelay) × GPMC_FCLK(14)

(7) F = ((ADVWrOffTime - WEOffTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 × (ADVExtraDelay - WEExtraDelay)) × GPMC_FCLK(14)

(8) G = ((CSWrOffTime - WEOffTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 × (CSExtraDelay - WEExtraDelay)) × GPMC_FCLK(14)

(9) H = WrCycleTime × (1 + TimeParaGranularity) × GPMC_FCLK(14)

(10) I = ((OEOnTime - CSOnTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 × (OEExtraDelay - CSExtraDelay)) × GPMC_FCLK(14)

(11) K = (OEOffTime - OEOnTime) × (1 + TimeParaGranularity) × GPMC_FCLK(14)

(12) L = RdCycleTime × (1 + TimeParaGranularity) × GPMC_FCLK(14)

(13) M = ((CSRdOffTime - OEOffTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) + 0.5 × (CSExtraDelay - OEExtraDelay)) × GPMC_FCLK(14)

(14) GPMC_FCLK is general-purpose memory controller internal functional clock period in ns.

GPMC_FCLK

gpmc_csn[x](A)

gpmc_be0n_cle

gpmc_advn_ale

gpmc_oen

gpmc_wen

gpmc_ad[15:0]

Address

GNF0

GNF1

GNF7

GNF3 GNF4

GNF6

GNF8

GNF9

GPMC_FCLK

gpmc_csn[x](A)

gpmc_be0n_cle

gpmc_advn_ale

gpmc_oen

gpmc_wen

gpmc_ad[15:0] Command

GNF0

GNF1

GNF2

GNF3 GNF4

GNF5

GNF6

171

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

A. In gpmc_csn[x], x is equal to 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6.

Figure 5-44. GPMC and NAND Flash—Command Latch Cycle

A. In gpmc_csn[x], x is equal to 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6.

Figure 5-45. GPMC and NAND Flash—Address Latch Cycle

GPMC_FCLK

gpmc_csn[x](A)

gpmc_be0n_cle

gpmc_advn_ale

gpmc_oen

gpmc_wen

DATA

GNF0

GNF1

GNF4

GNF9

GNF3

GNF6

gpmc_ad[15:0]

GPMC_FCLK(A)

gpmc_csn[x](C)

gpmc_be0n_cle

gpmc_advn_ale

gpmc_oen

gpmc_wait[x](C)

DATA

GNF10

GNF14

GNF15

GNF12(B)

GNF13

gpmc_ad[15:0]

172

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

A. GPMC_FCLK is an internal clock (GPMC functional clock) not provided externally.

B. GNF12 parameter illustrates amount of time required to internally sample input data. It is expressed in number of

GPMC functional clock cycles. From start of read cycle and after GNF12 functional clock cycles, input data will be

internally sampled by active functional clock edge. GNF12 value must be stored inside AccessTime register bits field.

C. In gpmc_csn[x], x is equal to 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6. In gpmc_wait[x], x is equal to 0 or 1.

Figure 5-46. GPMC and NAND Flash—Data Read Cycle

A. In gpmc_csn[x], x is equal to 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6.

Figure 5-47. GPMC and NAND Flash—Data Write Cycle

DDR_CK

DDR_CKn

173

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.8.2 Memory Interface

The device has a dedicated interface to LPDDR2, DDR3, and DDR3L SDRAM. It supports JEDEC

standard compliant LPDDR2, DDR3, and DDR3L SDRAM devices with a 16- or 32-bit data path to

external SDRAM memory.

For more details on the LPDDR2, DDR3, and DDR3L memory interface, see the EMIF section of the

AM437x Sitara Processors Technical Reference Manual.

5.13.8.2.1 DDR3 and DDR3L Routing Guidelines

This section provides the timing specification for the DDR3 and DDR3L interface as a PCB design and

manufacturing specification. The design rules constrain PCB trace length, PCB trace skew, signal

integrity, cross-talk, and signal timing. These rules, when followed, result in a reliable DDR3 or DDR3L

memory system without the need for a complex timing closure process. For more information regarding

the guidelines, see Understanding TI’s PCB Routing Rule-Based DDR Timing Specification. This

application report provides generic guidelines and approach. All the specifications provided in the data

manual take precedence over the generic guidelines and must be adhered to for a reliable DDR3 or

DDR3L interface operation.

NOTE

All references to DDR3 in this section apply to DDR3 and DDR3L devices, unless otherwise

noted.

5.13.8.2.1.1 Board Designs

TI only supports board designs using DDR3 memory that follow the guidelines in this document. The

switching characteristics and timing diagram for the DDR3 memory interface are shown in Table 5-49 and

Figure 5-48.

Table 5-49. Switching Characteristics for DDR3 Memory Interface

NO. PARAMETER MIN MAX UNIT

1tc(DDR_CK)

tc(DDR_CKn) Cycle time, DDR_CK and DDR_CKn 2.5 3.3(1) ns

(1) The JEDEC JESD79-3F Standard defines the maximum clock period of 3.3 ns for all standard-speed bin DDR3 and DDR3L memory

devices. Therefore, all standard-speed bin DDR3 and DDR3L memory devices are required to operate at 303 MHz.

Figure 5-48. DDR3 Memory Interface Clock Timing

174

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

(1) DDR3 devices are mirrored when half of the devices are placed on the top of the board and the other half are placed on the bottom of

the board.

5.13.8.2.1.2 DDR3 Device Combinations

Because there are several possible combinations of device counts and single-side or dual-side mounting,

Table 5-50 summarizes the supported device configurations.

Table 5-50. Supported DDR3 Device Combinations

NUMBER OF DDR3 DEVICES DDR3 DEVICE WIDTH (BITS) MIRRORED? DDR3 EMIF WIDTH (BITS)

1 16 N 16

2 8 Y(1) 16

2 16 Y(1) 32

4 8 Y(1) 32

5.13.8.2.1.3 DDR3 Interface

5.13.8.2.1.3.1 DDR3 Interface Schematic

The DDR3 interface schematic varies, depending upon the width of the DDR3 devices used.

Figure 5-49 shows the schematic connections for 16-bit interface using one x16 DDR3 device. Figure 5-50

shows the schematic connections for 16-bit interface without using VTT termination for the ADDR_CTRL

net class signals. Figure 5-51 shows the schematic connections for 16-bit interface using two x8 DDR3

devices.

Figure 5-52 shows the schematic connections for 32-bit interface using two x16 DDR3 device and

Figure 5-53 shows the schematic connections for 32-bit interface using four x8 DDR3 devices.

When not using all or part of a DDR3 interface, the proper method of handling the unused pins is to tie off

the DDR_DQS[x] pins to the VDDS_DDR supply via a 1-kΩresistor and pulling the DDR_DQSn[x] pins to

ground via a 1k-Ωresistor. This must be done for each byte not used. Although these signals have

internal pullup and pulldown, external pullup and pulldown provide additional protection against external

electrical noise causing activity on the signals. Also, include the 49.9-Ωpulldown for DDR_VTP. The

VDDS_DDR and DDR_VREF power supply terminals need to be connected to their respective power

supplies even if the DDR3 interface is not being used. All other DDR3 interface pins can be left

unconnected. The supported modes for use of the DDR3 EMIF are 32 bits wide, 16 bits wide, or not used.

The device can only source one load connected to the DQS[x] and DQ[x] net class signals and up to four

loads connected to the CK and ADDR_CTRL net class signals. For more information related to net

classes, see Section 5.13.8.2.1.3.9.

DQU7

DQU0

DMU

DQSU

DQSUn

DQL7

DQL0

DML

DQSL

DQSLn

CKn

16-Bit DDR3

Device

0.1 µF

49.9

1 , 20 mW

(± % )

0.1 µF 0.1 µF

16-Bit DDR3

Interface

DDR_D15

DDR_D8

DDR_DQM1

DDR_DQS1

DDR_DQSn1

DDR_D7

DDR_D0

DDR_DQM0

DDR_DQS0

DDR_DQSn0

DDR_CK

DDR_CKn

DDR_ODT0

DDR_CSn0

DDR_BA0

DDR_BA1

DDR_BA2

DDR_A0

DDR_A15

DDR_CASn

DDR_RASn

DDR_WEn

DDR_CKE0

DDR_RESETn

DDR_VREF

DDR_VTP

ODT

BA1

BA0

BA2

CSn

A15

CASn

RASn

WEn

RESETn

CKE

VREFDQ

VREFCA

DDR_VREF

DDR_VTT

VDDS_DDR

Termination is required. See terminator comments.

Value determined according to the DDR3 memory device data sheet.

0.1 µF

175

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Figure 5-49. 16-Bit DDR3 Interface Using One 16-Bit DDR3 Device With VTT Termination

DQU7

DQU0

DMU

DQSU

DQSUn

DQL7

DQL0

DML

DQSL

DQSLn

CKn

16-Bit DDR3

Device

0.1 µF

49.9

1 , 20 mW

(± % )

0.1 µF

16-Bit DDR3

Interface

DDR_D15

DDR_D8

DDR_DQM1

DDR_DQS1

DDR_DQSn1

DDR_D7

DDR_D0

DDR_DQM0

DDR_DQS0

DDR_DQSn0

DDR_CK

DDR_CKn

DDR_ODT0

DDR_CSn0

DDR_BA0

DDR_BA1

DDR_BA2

DDR_A0

DDR_A15

DDR_CASn

DDR_RASn

DDR_WEn

DDR_CKE0

DDR_RESETn

DDR_VREF

DDR_VTP

ODT

BA1

BA0

BA2

CSn

A15

CASn

RASn

WEn

RESETn

CKE

VREFDQ

VREFCA

Value determined according to the DDR3 memory device data sheet.

1 K Ω 1%

VDDS_DDR(A)

0.1 µF

0.1 µF 1 K Ω 1%

DDR_VREF

176

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

A. VDDS_DDR is the power supply for the DDR3 memories and the DDR3 interface.

Figure 5-50. 16-Bit DDR3 Interface Using One 16-Bit DDR3 Device Without VTT Termination

DQ7

DQ0

DQS

DQSn

DQ7

DQ0

DQS

DQSn

CKn

8-Bit DDR3

Devices

0.1 µF

49.9

1 , 20 mW

(± % )

0.1 µF 0.1 µF

16-Bit DDR3

Interface

DDR_D15

DDR_D8

DDR_DQS1

DDR_DQSn1

DDR_D7

DDR_D0

DDR_DQS0

DDR_DQSn0

DDR_CK

DDR_CKn

DDR_ODT0

DDR_CSn0

DDR_BA0

DDR_BA1

DDR_BA2

DDR_A0

DDR_A15

DDR_CASn

DDR_RASn

DDR_WEn

DDR_CKE0

DDR_RESETn

DDR_VREF

DDR_VTP

ODT

BA1

BA0

BA2

CSn

A15

CASn

RASn

WEn

RESETn

CKE

VREFDQ

VREFCA

CKn

ODT

BA1

BA0

BA2

CSn

A15

CASn

RASn

WEn

RESETn

CKE

VREFDQ

VREFCA

Termination is required. See terminator comments.

Value determined according to the DDR3 memory device data sheet.

0.1 µF

DDR_VREF

DDR_VTT

VDDS_DDR

TDQSn

NC TDQSn

0.1 µF

DM/TDQS

DDR_DQM1

DM/TDQS

DDR_DQM0

177

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Figure 5-51. 16-Bit DDR3 Interface Using Two 8-Bit DDR3 Devices With VTT Termination

DQU7

DQU0

DMU

DQSU

DQSUn

DQL7

DQL0

DML

DQSL

DQSLn

CKn

DQU7

DMU

DQSU

DQSUn

DDR_D31

DDR_D24

16-Bit DDR3

Devices

0.1 µF

49.9 1 20mWΩ (± % )

0.1 µF 0.1 µF

32-bit DDR3 EMIF

DDR_ODT1

DDR_CSn1

DDR_DQM3

DDR_DQS3

DDR_DQSn3

DDR_D23

DDR_D16

DDR_DQM2

DDR_DQS2

DDR_DQSn2

DDR_D15

DDR_D8

DDR_DQM1

DDR_DQS1

DDR_DQSn1

DDR_D7

DDR_D0

DDR_DQM0

DDR_DQS0

DDR_DQSn0

DDR_CLK

DDR_CLKn

DDR_ODT0

DDR_CSn0

DDR_BA0

DDR_BA1

DDR_BA2

DDR_A0

DDR_A15

DDR_CASn

DDR_RASn

DDR_WEn

DDR_CKE0

DDR_RESETn

DDR_VREF

DDR_VTP

DQU0

DQL7

DQL0

DML

DQSL

DQSLn

ODT

BA1

BA0

BA2

CSn

A15

CASn

RASn

WEn

RSTn

CKE

VREFDQ

VREFCA

CKn

ODT

BA1

BA0

BA2

CSn

A15

CASn

RASn

WEn

RSTn

CKE

VREFDQ

VREFCA

DDR_VREF

DDR_VTT

VDDS_DDR

Termination is required. See terminator comments.

Value determined according to the DDR memory device data sheet.

0.1 µF

DDR_CKE1 NC

178

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Figure 5-52. 32-Bit DDR3 Interface Using Two 16-Bit DDR3 Devices With VTT Termination

DQ7

DQ0

DM/TQS

DQS

DQSn

DQ7

DQ0

DM/TQS

DQS

DQSn

CKn

DDR_D31

DDR_D24

8-Bit DDR3

Devices

0.1 µF

49.9 1 20mWΩ (± % )

0.1 µF 0.1 µF

32-bit DDR3 EMIF

DDR_ODT1

DDR_CSn1

DDR_DQM3

DDR_DQS3

DDR_DQSn3

DDR_D23

DDR_D16

DDR_DQM2

DDR_DQS2

DDR_DQSn2

DDR_D15

DDR_D8

DDR_DQM1

DDR_DQS1

DDR_DQSn1

DDR_D7

DDR_D0

DDR_DQM0

DDR_DQS0

DDR_DQSn0

DDR_CLK

DDR_CLKn

DDR_ODT0

DDR_CSn0

DDR_BA0

DDR_BA1

DDR_BA2

DDR_A0

DDR_A15

DDR_CASn

DDR_RASn

DDR_WEn

DDR_CKE0

DDR_RESETn

DDR_VREF

DDR_VTP

ODT

BA1

BA0

BA2

CSn

A15

CASn

RASn

WEn

RSTn

CKE

VREFDQ

VREFCA

CKn

ODT

BA1

BA0

BA2

CSn

A15

CASn

RASn

WEn

RSTn

CKE

VREFDQ

VREFCA

Termination is required. See terminator comments.

Value determined according to the DDR memory device data sheet.

DQ7

DQ0

DM/TQS

DQS

DQSn

CKn

DQ7

DM/TQS

DQS

DQSn

8-Bit DDR3

Devices

0.1 µF 0.1 µF

DQ0

ODT

BA1

BA0

BA2

CSn

A15

CASn

RASn

WEn

RSTn

CKE

VREFDQ

VREFCA

CKn

ODT

BA1

BA0

BA2

CSn

A15

CASn

RASn

WEn

RSTn

CKE

VREFDQ

VREFCA

DDR_VREF

DDR_VTT

VDDS_DDR

ZQ ZQ

TDQSn

NC TDQSn

TDQSn

0.1 µF

DDR_CKE1 NC

179

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Figure 5-53. 32-Bit DDR3 Interface Using Four 8-Bit DDR3 Devices With VTT Termination

180

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.8.2.1.3.2 Compatible JEDEC DDR3 Devices

Table 5-51 shows the parameters of the JEDEC DDR3 devices that are compatible with this interface.

Table 5-51. Compatible JEDEC DDR3 Devices (Per Interface)

NO. PARAMETER CONDITION MIN MAX UNIT

1 JEDEC DDR3 device speed grade tC(DDR_CK) and

tC(DDR_CKn) = 2.5ns DDR3-1600

2 JEDEC DDR3 device bit width x8 x32

3 JEDEC DDR3 device count(1) 1 4 Devices

(1) For valid DDR3 device configurations and device counts, see Section 5.13.8.2.1.3.1,Figure 5-49, and Figure 5-51.

5.13.8.2.1.3.3 DDR3 PCB Stackup

The minimum stackup for routing the DDR3 interface is a four-layer stack up as shown in Table 5-52.

Additional layers may be added to the PCB stackup to accommodate other circuitry, enhance signal

integrity and electromagnetic interference performance, or to reduce the size of the PCB footprint.

Table 5-52. Minimum PCB Stackup(1)

LAYER TYPE DESCRIPTION

1 Signal Top signal routing

2 Plane Ground

3 Plane Split Power Plane

4 Signal Bottom signal routing

(1) All signals that have critical signal integrity requirements should be routed first on layer 1. It may not be possible to route all of these

signals on layer 1 which requires some to be routed on layer 4. When this is done, the signal routes on layer 4 should not cross splits in

the power plane.

Table 5-53. PCB Stackup Specifications(1)

NO. PARAMETER MIN TYP MAX UNIT

1 PCB routing and plane layers 4

2 Signal routing layers 2

3 Full ground reference layers under DDR3 routing region(2) 1

4 Full VDDS_DDR power reference layers under the DDR3 routing region(2) 1

5 Number of reference plane cuts allowed within DDR3 routing region(3) 0

6 Number of layers between DDR3 routing layer and reference plane(4) 0

7 PCB routing feature size 4 mils

8 PCB trace width, w 4 mils

9 PCB BGA escape via pad size(5) 18 20 mils

10 PCB BGA escape via hole size 10 mils

13 Single-ended impedance, Zo(6) 50 75 Ω

14 Impedance control(7)(8) Zo-5 Zo Zo+5 Ω

(1) For the DDR3 device BGA pad size, see the DDR3 device manufacturer documentation.

(2) Ground reference layers are preferred over power reference layers. Be sure to include bypass caps to accommodate reference layer

return current as the trace routes switch routing layers.

(3) No traces should cross reference plane cuts within the DDR3 routing region. High-speed signal traces crossing reference plane cuts

create large return current paths which can lead to excessive crosstalk and EMI radiation.

(4) Reference planes are to be directly adjacent to the signal plane to minimize the size of the return current loop.

(5) An 18-mil pad assumes Via Channel is the most economical BGA escape. A 20-mil pad may be used if additional layers are available

for power routing. An 18-mil pad is required for minimum layer count escape.

(6) Zo is the nominal singled-ended impedance selected for the PCB.

(7) This parameter specifies the AC characteristic impedance tolerance for each segment of a PCB signal trace relative to the chosen Zo

defined by the single-ended impedance parameter.

(8) Tighter impedance control is required to ensure flight time skew is minimal.

DDR3

Controller

X2 X2 X2

181

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.8.2.1.3.4 DDR3 Placement

Figure 5-54 shows the required placement for the device as well as the DDR3 devices. The dimensions

for this figure are defined in Table 5-54. The placement does not restrict the side of the PCB on which the

devices are mounted. The ultimate purpose of the placement is to limit the maximum trace lengths and

allow for proper routing space.

Figure 5-54. Placement Specifications

Table 5-54. Placement Specifications(1)

NO. PARAMETER MIN MAX UNIT

1 X1(2)(3)(4) 1000 mils

2 X2(2)(3) 600 mils

3 Y Offset(2)(3)(4) 1500 mils

4 Clearance from non-DDR3 signal to DDR3 keepout region(5)(6) 4 w

(1) DDR3 keepout region to encompass entire DDR3 routing area.

(2) For dimension definitions, see Figure 5-54.

(3) Measurements from center of device to center of DDR3 device.

(4) Minimizing X1 and Y improves timing margins.

(5) w is defined as the signal trace width.

(6) Non-DDR3 signals allowed within DDR3 keepout region provided they are separated from DDR3 routing layers by a ground plane.

DDR3 Keepout Region

Encompasses Entire DDR3 Routing Area

DDR3 Controller

182

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.8.2.1.3.5 DDR3 Keepout Region

The region of the PCB used for DDR3 circuitry must be isolated from other signals. The DDR3 keepout

region is defined for this purpose and is shown in Figure 5-55. This region should encompass all DDR3

circuitry and the region size varies with component placement and DDR3 routing. Additional clearances

required for the keepout region are shown in Table 5-54. Non-DDR3 signals should not be routed on the

same signal layer as DDR3 signals within the DDR3 keepout region. Non-DDR3 signals may be routed in

the region provided they are routed on layers separated from DDR3 signal layers by a ground layer. No

breaks should be allowed in the reference ground or VDDS_DDR power plane in this region. In addition,

the VDDS_DDR power plane should cover the entire keepout region.

Figure 5-55. DDR3 Keepout Region

5.13.8.2.1.3.6 DDR3 Bulk Bypass Capacitors

Bulk bypass capacitors are required for moderate speed bypassing of the DDR3 and other circuitry.

Table 5-55 contains the minimum numbers and capacitance required for the bulk bypass capacitors. Note

that this table only covers the bypass needs of the DDR3 interface and DDR3 devices. Additional bulk

bypass capacitance may be needed for other circuitry.

Table 5-55. Bulk Bypass Capacitors(1)

NO. PARAMETER MIN MAX UNIT

1 VDDS_DDR bulk bypass capacitor count 2 Devices

2 VDDS_DDR bulk bypass total capacitance 20 μF

3 DDR3#1 bulk bypass capacitor count 2 Devices

4 DDR3#1 bulk bypass total capacitance 20 μF

5 DDR3#2 bulk bypass capacitor count(2) 2 Devices

6 DDR3#2 bulk bypass total capacitance(2) 20 μF

7 DDR3#3 bulk bypass capacitor count(3) 2 Devices

8 DDR3#3 bulk bypass total capacitance(3) 20 μF

9 DDR3#4bulk bypass capacitor count(3) 2 Devices

10 DDR3#4 bulk bypass total capacitance(3) 20 μF

(1) These devices should be placed near the devices they are bypassing, but preference should be given to the placement of the high-

speed (HS) bypass capacitors and DDR3 signal routing.

(2) Only used when two DDR3 devices are used.

(3) Only used when four DDR3 devices are used.

183

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.8.2.1.3.7 DDR3 High-Speed Bypass Capacitors

High-speed (HS) bypass capacitors are critical for proper DDR3 interface operation. It is particularly

important to minimize the parasitic series inductance of the HS bypass capacitors, device DDR3 power,

and device DDR3 ground connections. Table 5-56 contains the specification for the HS bypass capacitors

as well as for the power connections on the PCB. Generally speaking, it is good to:

1. Fit as many HS bypass capacitors as possible.

2. Minimize the distance from the bypass cap to the power terminals being bypassed.

3. Use the smallest physical sized capacitors possible with the highest capacitance readily available.

4. Connect the bypass capacitor pads to their vias using the widest traces possible and using the largest

hole size via possible.

5. Minimize via sharing. Note the limites on via sharing shown in Table 5-56.

Table 5-56. High-Speed Bypass Capacitors

NO. PARAMETER MIN TYP MAX UNIT

1 HS bypass capacitor package size(1) 0201 0402 10 mils

2 Distance, HS bypass capacitor to VDDS_DDR and VSS terminal being

bypassed(2)(3)(4) 400 mils

3 VDDS_DDR HS bypass capacitor count 20 Devices

4 VDDS_DDR HS bypass capacitor total capacitance 1 μF

5 Trace length from VDDS_DDR and VSS terminal to connection via(2) 35 70 mils

6 Distance, HS bypass capacitor to DDR3 device being bypassed(5) 150 mils

7 DDR3 device HS bypass capacitor count(6) 12 Devices

8 DDR3 device HS bypass capacitor total capacitance(6) 0.85 μF

9 Number of connection vias for each HS bypass capacitor(7)(8) 2 Vias

10 Trace length from bypass capacitor connect to connection via(2)(8) 35 100 mils

11 Number of connection vias for each DDR3 device power and ground

terminal(9) 1 Vias

12 Trace length from DDR3 device power and ground terminal to connection

via(2)(7) 35 60 mils

(1) LxW, 10-mil units; for example, a 0402 is a 40x20-mil surface-mount capacitor.

(2) Closer and shorter is better.

(3) Measured from the nearest VDDS_DDR and ground terminal to the center of the capacitor package.

(4) Three of these capacitors should be underneath the device, between the cluster of VDDS_DDR and ground terminals, between the

DDR3 interfaces on the package.

(5) Measured from the DDR3 device power and ground terminal to the center of the capacitor package.

(6) Per DDR3 device.

(7) An additional HS bypass capacitor can share the connection vias only if it is mounted on the opposite side of the board. No sharing of

vias is permitted on the same side of the board.

(8) An HS bypass capacitor may share a via with a DDR3 device mounted on the same side of the PCB. A wide trace should be used for

the connection and the length from the capacitor pad to the DDR3 device pad should be less than 150 mils.

(9) Up to two pairs of DDR3 power and ground terminals may share a via.

5.13.8.2.1.3.8 Return Current Bypass Capacitors

Use additional bypass capacitors if the return current reference plane changes due to DDR3 signals

hopping from one signal layer to another. The bypass capacitor here provides a path for the return current

to hop planes along with the signal. As many of these return current bypass capacitors should be used as

possible. Because these are returns for signal current, the signal via size may be used for these

capacitors.

184

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.8.2.1.3.9 DDR3 Net Classes

Table 5-57 lists the clock net classes for the DDR3 interface. Table 5-58 lists the signal net classes, and

associated clock net classes, for signals in the DDR3 interface. These net classes are used for the

termination and routing rules that follow.

Table 5-57. Clock Net Class Definitions

CLOCK NET CLASS PIN NAMES

CK DDR_CK and DDR_CKn

DQS0 DDR_DQS0 and DDR_DQSn0

DQS1 DDR_DQS1 and DDR_DQSn1

DQS2 DDR_DQS2 and DDR_DQSn2

DQS3 DDR_DQS3 and DDR_DQSn3

Table 5-58. Signal Net Class Definitions

SIGNAL NET CLASS ASSOCIATED CLOCK

NET CLASS PIN NAMES

ADDR_CTRL CK DDR_BA[2:0], DDR_A[15:0], DDR_CSn0, DDR_CSn1, DDR_CASn,

DDR_RASn, DDR_WEn, DDR_CKE0, DDR_CKE1, DDR_ODT0,

DDR_ODT1

DQ0 DQS0 DDR_D[7:0], DDR_DQM0

DQ1 DQS1 DDR_D[15:8], DDR_DQM1

DQ2 DQS2 DDR_D[23:16], DDR_DQM2

DQ3 DQS3 DDR_D[31:24], DDR_DQM3

5.13.8.2.1.3.10 DDR3 Signal Termination

Signal terminations are required for the CK and ADDR_CTRL net class signals. On-device terminations

(ODTs) are required on the DQS[x] and DQ[x] net class signals. Detailed termination specifications are

covered in the routing rules in the following sections.

Figure 5-50 provides an example DDR3 schematic with one 16-bit DDR3 memory device that does not

have VTT termination on the address and control signals. A typical DDR3 point-to-point topology may

provide acceptable signal integrity without VTT termination. System performance should be verified by

performing signal integrity analysis using specific PCB design details before implementing this topology.

5.13.8.2.1.3.11 DDR3 DDR_VREF Routing

DDR_VREF is used as a reference by the input buffers of the DDR3 memories as well as the device.

DDR_VREF is intended to be half the DDR3 power supply voltage and is typically generated with a

voltage divider connected to the VDDS_DDR power supply. It should be routed as a nominal 20-mil wide

trace with 0.1 µF bypass capacitors near each device connection. Narrowing of DDR_VREF is allowed to

accommodate routing congestion.

5.13.8.2.1.3.12 DDR3 VTT

Like DDR_VREF, the nominal value of the VTT supply is half the DDR3 supply voltage. Unlike

DDR_VREF, VTT is expected to source and sink current, specifically the termination current for the

ADDR_CTRL net class Thevinen terminators. VTT is needed at the end of the address bus and it should

be routed as a power subplane. VTT should be bypassed near the terminator resistors.

A1 A2

Device

Address and Control

Output Buffer

DDR3 Address and Control Input Buffers

A3 AT Vtt

Address and Control

Terminator

Rtt

AS-

AS+

A1 A2

Device

Differential Clock

Output Buffer

DDR3 Differential CK Input Buffers

Routed as Differential Pair

A3 AT

Rcp

Clock Parallel

Terminator

A1 A2 A3 AT

AS-

AS+

Rcp

Cac

VDDS_DDR

0.1 µF

–

+–+–

185

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.8.2.1.4 DDR3 CK and ADDR_CTRL Topologies and Routing Definition

The CK and ADDR_CTRL net classes are routed similarly and are length matched to minimize skew

between them. CK is a bit more complicated because it runs at a higher transition rate and is differential.

The following subsections show the topology and routing for various DDR3 configurations for CK and

ADDR_CTRL. The figures in the following subsections define the terms for the routing specification

detailed in Table 5-59.

5.13.8.2.1.4.1 Using Two DDR3 Devices (x8 or x16)

Two DDR3 devices are supported on the DDR3 interface consisting of two x8 DDR3 devices arranged as

one 16-bit bank or two x16 DDR3 devices arranged as one 32-bit bank. These two devices may be

mounted on one side of the PCB, or may be mirrored in a pair to save board space at a cost of increased

routing complexity and parts on the backside of the PCB.

5.13.8.2.1.4.2 CK and ADDR_CTRL Topologies, Two DDR3 Devices

Figure 5-56 shows the topology of the CK net classes and Figure 5-57 shows the topology for the

corresponding ADDR_CTRL net classes.

NOTE: For routing definitions, see Table 5-59,CK and ADDR_CTRL Routing Specification.

Figure 5-56. CK Topology for Two DDR3 Devices

NOTE: For routing definitions, see Table 5-59,CK and ADDR_CTRL Routing Specification.

Figure 5-57. ADDR_CTRL Topology for Two DDR3 Devices

Rtt

A2 A3 AT Vtt

AS+

AS-

Rcp

Cac

VDDS_DDR

0.1 µF

A2 A3 AT

186

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.8.2.1.4.3 CK and ADDR_CTRL Routing, Two DDR3 Devices

Figure 5-58 shows the CK routing for two DDR3 devices placed on the same side of the PCB. Figure 5-59

shows the corresponding ADDR_CTRL routing.

NOTE: For routing definitions, see Table 5-59,CK and ADDR_CTRL Routing Specification.

Figure 5-58. CK Routing for Two Single-Side DDR3 Devices

NOTE: For routing definitions, see Table 5-59,CK and ADDR_CTRL Routing Specification.

Figure 5-59. ADDR_CTRL Routing for Two Single-Side DDR3 Devices

Rtt

A2 A3 AT Vtt

AS+

AS-

Rcp

Cac

VDDS_DDR

0.1 µF

A2 A3 AT

187

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

To save PCB space, the two DDR3 memories may be mounted as a mirrored pair at a cost of increased

routing and assembly complexity. Figure 5-60 and Figure 5-61 show the routing for CK and ADDR_CTRL,

respectively, for two DDR3 devices mirrored in a single-pair configuration.

NOTE: For routing definitions, see Table 5-59,CK and ADDR_CTRL Routing Specification.

Figure 5-60. CK Routing for Two Mirrored DDR3 Devices

NOTE: For routing definitions, see Table 5-59,CK and ADDR_CTRL Routing Specification.

Figure 5-61. ADDR_CTRL Routing for Two Mirrored DDR3 Devices

A1 A2

Device

Address and Control

Output Buffer

DDR Address and Control Input Buffers

A3 A4 A3 AT Vtt

Address and Control

Terminator

Rtt

AS-

AS+

AS-

AS+

AS-

AS+

A1 A2

Device

Differential Clock

Output Buffer

DDR Differential CK Input Buffers

Routed as Differential Pair

A3 A4 A3 AT

Rcp

Clock Parallel

Terminator

A1 A2 A3 A4 A3 AT

AS-

AS+

Rcp

Cac

VDDS_DDR

0.1 µF

–

+–+–+–+–

188

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.8.2.1.4.4 Using Four 8-Bit DDR3 Devices

Two DDR3 devices are supported on the DDR3 interface consisting of four x8 DDR3 devices arranged as

one 32-bit bank. These four devices may be mounted on one side of the PCB, or may be mirrored in pairs

to save board space at a cost of increased routing complexity and parts on the backside of the PCB.

5.13.8.2.1.4.5 CK and ADDR_CTRL Topologies, Four DDR3 Devices

Figure 5-62 shows the topology of the CK net classes and Figure 5-63 shows the topology for the

corresponding ADDR_CTRL net classes.

NOTE: For routing definitions, see Table 5-59,CK and ADDR_CTRL Routing Specification.

Figure 5-62. CK Topology for Four DDR3 Devices

NOTE: For routing definitions, see Table 5-59,CK and ADDR_CTRL Routing Specification.

Figure 5-63. ADDR_CTRL Topology for Four DDR3 Devices

5.13.8.2.1.4.6 CK and ADDR_CTRL Routing, Four DDR3 Devices

Figure 5-64 shows the CK routing for four DDR3 devices placed on the same side of the PCB. Figure 5-65

shows the corresponding ADDR_CTRL routing.

Rtt

A2 A3 A4 A3 AT Vtt

AS+

AS-

Rcp

Cac

VDDS_DDR

0.1 µF

A2 A3 A4 A3

189

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

NOTE: For routing definitions, see Table 5-59,CK and ADDR_CTRL Routing Specification.

Figure 5-64. CK Routing for Four Single-Side DDR3 Devices

NOTE: For routing definitions, see Table 5-59,CK and ADDR_CTRL Routing Specification.

Figure 5-65. ADDR_CTRL Routing for Four Single-Side DDR3 Devices

Rtt

A2 A3 A4 AT Vtt

AS+

AS-

Rcp

Cac

VDDS_DDR

0.1 µF

A2 A3 A4

190

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

To save PCB space, the four DDR3 memories may be mounted as a mirrored pair at a cost of increased

routing and assembly complexity. Figure 5-66 and Figure 5-67 show the routing for CK and ADDR_CTRL,

respectively, for four DDR3 devices mirrored in a single-pair configuration.

Figure 5-66. CK Routing for Four Mirrored DDR3 Devices

Figure 5-67. ADDR_CTRL Routing for Four Mirrored DDR3 Devices

A1 A2

Device

Address and Control

Output Buffer

DDR3 Address and Control Input Buffers

AT Vtt

Address and Control

Terminator

Rtt

A1 A2

Device

Differential Clock

Output Buffer

DDR3 Differential CK Input Buffer

Routed as Differential Pair

Rcp

Clock Parallel

Terminator

A1 A2 AT

AS-

AS+

Rcp

Cac

VDDS_DDR

0.1 µF

–

+–

191

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.8.2.1.4.7 One 16-Bit DDR3 Device

One DDR3 device is supported on the DDR3 interface consisting of one x16 DDR3 device arranged as

one 16-bit bank.

5.13.8.2.1.4.8 CK and ADDR_CTRL Topologies, One DDR3 Device

Figure 5-68 shows the topology of the CK net classes and Figure 5-69 shows the topology for the

corresponding ADDR_CTRL net classes.

Figure 5-68. CK Topology for One DDR3 Device

Figure 5-69. ADDR_CTRL Topology for One DDR3 Device

Rtt

A2 AT Vtt

AS+

AS-

Rcp

Cac

VDDS_DDR

0.1 µF

A2 AT

192

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.8.2.1.4.9 CK and ADDR_CTRL Routing, One DDR3 Device

Figure 5-70 shows the CK routing for one DDR3 device. Figure 5-71 shows the corresponding

ADDR_CTRL routing.

Figure 5-70. CK Routing for One DDR3 Device

Figure 5-71. ADDR_CTRL Routing for One DDR3 Device

5.13.8.2.1.5 Data Topologies and Routing Definition

No matter the number of DDR3 devices used, the data line topology is always point to point, so its

definition is simple.

5.13.8.2.1.5.1 DQS[x] and DQ[x] Topologies, Any Number of Allowed DDR3 Devices

DQS[x] lines are point-to-point differential, and DQ[x] lines are point-to-point singled ended. Figure 5-72

and Figure 5-73 show these topologies.

DQ[x]

DQS[x]+

DQS[x]-

Routed Differentially

DQS[x]

DQ[x]

Device

DQ[x]

IO Buffer

DDR3

DQ[x]

IO Buffer

Device

DQS[x]

IO Buffer

DDR3

DQS[x]

IO Buffer

Routed Differentially

DQS[x]-

DQS[x]+

193

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

x = 0, 1, 2, 3

Figure 5-72. DQS[x] Topology

x = 0, 1, 2, 3

Figure 5-73. DQ[x] Topology

5.13.8.2.1.5.2 DQS[x] and DQ[x] Routing, Any Number of Allowed DDR3 Devices

Figure 5-74 and Figure 5-75 show the DQS[x] and DQ[x] routing.

x = 0, 1, 2, 3

Figure 5-74. DQS[x] Routing With Any Number of Allowed DDR3 Devices

x = 0, 1, 2, 3

Figure 5-75. DQ[x] Routing With Any Number of Allowed DDR3 Devices

194

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.8.2.1.6 Routing Specification

5.13.8.2.1.6.1 CK and ADDR_CTRL Routing Specification

Skew within the CK and ADDR_CTRL net classes directly reduces setup and hold margin and, thus, this

skew must be controlled. The only way to practically match lengths on a PCB is to lengthen the shorter

traces up to the length of the longest net in the net class and its associated clock. A metric to establish

this maximum length is Manhattan distance. The Manhattan distance between two points on a PCB is the

length between the points when connecting them only with horizontal or vertical segments. A reasonable

trace route length is to within a percentage of its Manhattan distance. CACLM is defined as Clock Address

Control Longest Manhattan distance.

Given the clock and address pin locations on the device and the DDR3 memories, the maximum possible

Manhattan distance can be determined given the placement. Figure 5-76 shows this distance for two

loads. It is from this distance that the specifications on the lengths of the transmission lines for the

address bus are determined. CACLM is determined similarly for other address bus configurations; that is,

it is based on the longest net of the CK and ADDR_CTRL net class. For CK and ADDR_CTRL routing,

these specifications are contained in Table 5-59.

Rtt

A2 A3 AT Vtt

A8(A)

CACLMX

CACLMY

Rtt

A2 A3 A4 A3 AT Vtt

A8(A)

CACLMX

CACLMY

195

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

A. It is very likely that the longest CK and ADDR_CTRL Manhattan distance will be for Address Input 8 (A8) on the

DDR3 memories. CACLM is based on the longest Manhattan distance due to the device placement. Verify the net

class that satisfies this criteria and use as the baseline for CK and ADDR_CTRL skew matching and length control.

The length of shorter CK and ADDR_CTRL stubs as well as the length of the terminator stub are not included in this

length calculation. Nonincluded lengths are grayed out in the figure.

Assuming A8 is the longest, CACLM = CACLMY + CACLMX + 300 mils.

The extra 300 mils allows for routing down lower than the DDR3 memories and returning up to reach A8.

Figure 5-76. CACLM for Two or Four Address Loads on One Side of PCB

Table 5-59. CK and ADDR_CTRL Routing Specification(1)(2)(3)

NO. PARAMETER MIN TYP MAX UNIT

1 A1+A2 length 2500 mils

2 A1+A2 skew 25 mils

3 A3 length 660 mils

4 A3 skew(4) 25 mils

5 A3 skew(5) 125 mils

196

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 5-59. CK and ADDR_CTRL Routing Specification(1)(2)(3) (continued)

NO. PARAMETER MIN TYP MAX UNIT

6 A4 length 660 mils

7 A4 skew 25 mils

8 AS length 100 mils

9 AS skew 25 mils

10 AS+ and AS- length 70 mils

11 AS+ and AS- skew 5 mils

12 AT length(6) 500 mils

13 AT skew(7) 100 mils

14 AT skew(8) 5 mils

15 CK and ADDR_CTRL nominal trace length(9) CACLM-50 CACLM CACLM+50 mils

16 Center-to-center CK to other DDR3 trace spacing(10) 4 w

17 Center-to-center ADDR_CTRL to other DDR3 trace spacing(10)(11) 4 w

18 Center-to-center ADDR_CTRL to other ADDR_CTRL trace spacing(10) 3 w

19 CK center-to-center spacing(12)

20 CK spacing to other net(10) 4 w

21 Rcp(13) Zo-1 Zo Zo+1 Ω

22 Rtt(13)(14) Zo-5 Zo Zo+5 Ω

(1) CK represents the clock net class, and ADDR_CTRL represents the address and control signal net class.

(2) The use of vias should be minimized.

(3) Additional bypass capacitors are required when using the VDDS_DDR plane as the reference plane to allow the return current to jump

between the VDDS_DDR plane and the ground plane when the net class switches layers at a via.

(4) Mirrored configuration (one DDR3 device on top of the board and one DDR3 device on the bottom).

(5) Nonmirrored configuration (all DDR3 memories on same side of PCB).

(6) While this length can be increased for convenience, its length should be minimized.

(7) ADDR_CTRL net class only (not CK net class). Minimizing this skew is recommended, but not required.

(8) CK net class only.

(9) CACLM is the longest Manhattan distance of the CK and ADDR_CTRL net classes + 300 mils. For definition, see Section 5.13.8.2.1.6.1

and Figure 5-76.

(10) Center-to-center spacing is allowed to fall to minimum (w) for up to 1250 mils of routed length.

(11) Signals from one DQ net class should be considered other DDR3 traces to another DQ net class.

(12) CK spacing set to ensure proper differential impedance. Differential impedance should be Zo x 2, where Zo is the single-ended

impedance defined in Table 5-53.

(13) Source termination (series resistor at driver) is specifically not allowed.

(14) Termination values should be uniform across the net class.

5.13.8.2.1.6.2 DQS[x] and DQ[x] Routing Specification

Skew within the DQS[x] and DQ[x] net classes directly reduces setup and hold margin and, thus, this skew

must be controlled. The only way to practically match lengths on a PCB is to lengthen the shorter traces

up to the length of the longest net in the net class and its associated clock. DQLMn is defined as DQ

Longest Manhattan distance n, where n is the byte number. For a 16-bit interface, there are two DQLMs,

DQLM0 and DQLM1.

NOTE

It is not required, nor is it recommended, to match the lengths across all bytes. Length

matching is only required within each byte.

DQLMY0

3 2

DQLMX1

DQ1

DQ0

DQLMX0

DQ[8:15], DM1, DQS1

DQ[0:7], DM0, DQS0

DQLMY1

DQ0 - DQ3 represent data bytes 0 - 3.

1 0

DQ2 DQ[16:23], DM2, DQS2

DQLMX2

DQ3 DQ[24:31], DM3, DQS3

DQLMX3

DQLMY3 DQLMY2

197

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Given the DQS[x] and DQ[x] pin locations on the device and the DDR3 memories, the maximum possible

Manhattan distance can be determined given the placement. Figure 5-77 shows this distance for a two-

load case. It is from this distance that the specifications on the lengths of the transmission lines for the

data bus are determined. For DQS[x] and DQ[x] routing, these specifications are contained in Table 5-60.

There are four DQLMs, one for each byte (16-bit interface). Each DQLM is the longest Manhattan distance of the

byte; therefore:

DQLM0 = DQLMX0 + DQLMY0

DQLM1 = DQLMX1 + DQLMY1

DQLM2 = DQLMX2 + DQLMY2

DQLM3 = DQLMX3 + DQLMY3

Figure 5-77. DQLM for Any Number of Allowed DDR3 Devices

Table 5-60. DQS[x] and DQ[x] Routing Specification(1)(2)

NO. PARAMETER MIN TYP MAX UNIT

1 DQ0 nominal length(3)(4) DQLM0 mils

2 DQ1 nominal length(3)(5) DQLM1 mils

3 DQ2 nominal length DQLM2 mils

4 DQ3 nominal length DQLM3 mils

5 DQ[x] skew(6) 25 mils

6 DQS[x] skew 5 mils

7 DQS[x]-to-DQ[x] skew(6)(7) 25 mils

8 Center-to-center DQ[x] to other DDR3 trace spacing(8)(9) 4 w

9 Center-to-center DQ[x] to other DQ[x] trace spacing(8)(10) 3 w

10 DQS[x] center-to-center spacing(11)

11 DQS[x] center-to-center spacing to other net(8) 4 w

(1) DQS[x] represents the DQS0 and DQS1 clock net classes, and DQ[x] represents the DQ0 and DQ1 signal net classes.

(2) External termination disallowed. Data termination should use built-in ODT functionality.

(3) DQLMn is the longest Manhattan distance of a byte. For definition, see Section 5.13.8.2.1.6.2 and Figure 5-77.

(4) DQLM0 is the longest Manhattan length for the DQ0 net class.

(5) DQLM1 is the longest Manhattan length for the DQ1 net class.

(6) Length matching is only done within a byte. Length matching across bytes is not required. To maintain tighter delay skew, route the

DQ[x] and DQS[x] signals within a byte to have same number of VIA and layer transitions.

(7) Each DQS clock net class is length matched to its associated DQ signal net class.

(8) Center-to-center spacing is allowed to fall to minimum for up to 1250 mils of routed length.

(9) Other DDR3 trace spacing means signals that are not part of the same DQ[x] signal net class.

(10) This applies to spacing within same DQ[x] signal net class.

(11) DQS[x] pair spacing is set to ensure proper differential impedance. Differential impedance should be Zo × 2, where Zo is the single-

ended impedance defined in Table 5-53.

DDR_CK

DDR_CKn

198

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.8.2.2 LPDDR2 Routing Guidelines

This section provides the timing specification for the LPDDR2 interface as a PCB design and

manufacturing specification. The design rules constrain PCB trace length, PCB trace skew, signal

integrity, cross-talk, and signal timing. These rules, when followed, result in a reliable LPDDR2 memory

system without the need for a complex timing closure process. For more information regarding guidelines

for using this LPDDR2 specification, see Understanding TI's PCB Routing Rule-Based DDR Timing

Specification. This application report provides generic guidelines and approach. All the specifications

provided in the data manual take precedence over the generic guidelines and must be adhered to for a

reliable LPDDR2 interface operation.

5.13.8.2.2.1 LPDDR2 Board Designs

TI only supports board designs using LPDDR2 memory that follow the guidelines in this document. The

switching characteristics and timing diagram for the LPDDR2 memory interface are shown in Table 5-61

and Figure 5-78.

Table 5-61. Switching Characteristics for LPDDR2 Memory Interface

NO. PARAMETER MIN MAX UNIT

1 tc(DDR_CK) Cycle time, DDR_CK and DDR_CKn 7.52 3.76(1) ns

(1) The JEDEC JESD209-2F standard defines the maximum clock period of 100 ns for all standard-speed bin LPDDR2 memory. The

device has only been tested per the limits published in this table.

Figure 5-78. LPDDR2 Memory Interface Clock Timing

5.13.8.2.2.2 LPDDR2 Device Configurations

There are several possible combinations of device counts and single-side or dual-side mounting. Table 5-

62 lists all the supported configurations.

Table 5-62. Supported LPDDR2 Device Combinations

NUMBER OF LPDDR2

DEVICES LPDDR2 DEVICE WIDTH (BITS) MIRRORED?(1) LPDDR2 EMIF WIDTH (BITS)

1 32 N 32

2(2) 32 N 32

1 16 N 16

2(2) 16 N 16

(1) Two LPDDR2 devices are mirrored when one device is placed on the top of the board and the second device is placed on the bottom of

the board.

(2) Two devices are supported only with twin-die configuration which embeds two devices in the same package.

Details on treating unused pins are listed in Section 5.13.8.2.2.3.1.

DQ15

DQ8

DM1

DQS1_t

DQS1_c

DQ7

DQ0

DM0

DQS0_t

DQS0_c

CK_c

16-Bit LPDDR2

Device

0.1 µF

49.9

1 , 20 mW

(± % )

0.1 µF

16-Bit LPDDR2

Interface

DDR_D15

DDR_D8

DDR_DQM1

DDR_DQS1

DDR_DQSn1

DDR_D7

DDR_D0

DDR_DQM1

DDR_DQS1

DDR_DQSn1

DDR_CK

DDR_CKn

DDR_CKE1

DDR_CSn0

DDR_CSn1

DDR_RASn

DDR_CASn

DDR_WEn

DDR_BA0

DDR_BA1

DDR_VREF

DDR_VTP

CK_t

CS1_n

CS0_n

CA0

CKE1

CA1

CA2

CA7

CA8

ZQ0/1

Vref(CA)

Vref(DQ)

DDR_CKE0 CKE0

DDR_BA2

DDR_A1

DDR_A2

DDR_A10

DDR_A13

CA9

CA5

CA6

CA4

CA3

1 K

VDDS_DDR

0.1 µF

0.1 µF 1 K

DDR_VREF

199

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.8.2.2.3 LPDDR2 Interface

5.13.8.2.2.3.1 LPDDR2 Interface Schematic

The LPDDR2 interface schematic varies, depending upon the width of the LPDDR2 devices used.

Figure 5-79 shows the schematic connections for 16-bit interface using one x16 LPDDR2 device. Two x16

LPDDR2 devices are supported for twin-die configuration which embeds two devices in the same

package.

Figure 5-79. 16-Bit Interface Using One 16-Bit LPDDR2 Device

Figure 5-80 shows the schematic connections for 32-bit interface using one x32 LPDDR2 device.

DQ31

DM31

DQS3_t

DQS3_c

DDR_D31

DDR_D24

32-Bit LPDDR2

Device

0.1 µF

49.9 1 20mWΩ (± % )

0.1 µF

32-Bit LPDDR2

Interface

DDR_DQM3

DDR_DQS3

DDR_DQSn3

DDR_D23

DDR_D16

DDR_DQM2

DDR_DQS2

DDR_DQSn2

DDR_D15

DDR_D8

DDR_DQM1

DDR_DQS1

DDR_DQSn1

DDR_D7

DDR_D0

DDR_DQM0

DDR_DQS0

DDR_DQSn0

DDR_VREF

DDR_VTP

DQ24

DQ23

DQ16

DM2

DQS2_t

DQS2_c

ZQ0/1

Vref(CA)

Vref(DQ)

DQ15

DQ8

DQ7

DQ0

DM1

DM0

DQS1_t

DQS1_c

DQS0_t

DQS0_c

CK_c

DDR_CK

DDR_CKn

DDR_CKE1

DDR_CSn0

DDR_CSn1

DDR_RASn

DDR_CASn

DDR_WEn

DDR_BA0

DDR_BA1

CK_t

CS1_n

CS0_n

CA0

CKE1

CA1

CA2

CA7

CA8

DDR_CKE0 CKE0

DDR_BA2

DDR_A1

DDR_A2

DDR_A10

DDR_A13

CA9

CA5

CA6

CA4

CA3

1 K

VDDS_DDR

0.1 µF

0.1 µF 1 K

DDR_VREF

200

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Figure 5-80. 32-Bit Interface Using One 32-Bit LPDDR2 Device

When not using a part of LPDDR2 interface (using x16 or not using the LPDDR2 interface):

• Connect the VDDS_DDR supply to 1.8 V

• Connect the DDR_VREF supply to 0.9 V

• Tie off DDR_DQS[x] (x=0,1,2,3) that are unused to VSS via 1 kΩ

• Tie off DDR_DQSn[x] (x=0,1,2,3) that are unused to VDDS_DDR via 1 kΩ

• All other unused pins can be left as NC.

Note: All the unused DDR ADDR_CTRL lines used for DDR3 operation should be left as NC.

201

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.8.2.2.3.2 Compatible JEDEC LPDDR2 Devices

Table 5-63 shows the supported LPDDR2 device configurations which are compatible with this interface.

Table 5-63. Compatible JEDEC LPDDR2 Devices (Per Interface)

NO. PARAMETER CONDITION MIN MAX UNIT

1 JEDEC LPDDR2 device speed grade tc(DDR_CK) and tc(DDR_CKn) LPDDR2-533

2 JEDEC LPDDR2 device bit width x16 x32 Bits

3 JEDEC LPDDR2 device count 1 2(1) Devices

(1) Two devices are supported only with twin-die configuration which embeds two devices in the same package.

5.13.8.2.2.3.3 LPDDR2 PCB Stackup

Table 5-64 shows the minimum stackup requirements. Additional layers may be added to the PCB

stackup to accommodate other circuitry, enhance signal integrity and electromagnetic interference

performance, or to reduce the size of the PCB footprint.

Table 5-64. Minimum PCB Stackup

LAYER TYPE DESCRIPTION

1 Signal Top signal routing

2 Plane Ground

3 Plane Power

4 Signal Bottom signal routing

PCB stackup specifications for LPDDR2 interface are listed in Table 5-65.

Table 5-65. PCB Stackup Specifications(1)

NO. PARAMETER MIN TYP MAX UNIT

1 PCB routing and plane layers 4

2 Signal routing layers 2

3 Full ground reference layers under LPDDR2 routing region(1) 1

4 Full VDDS_DDR power reference layers under the LPDDR2 routing

region(1) 1

5 Number of reference plane cuts allowed within LPDDR2 routing region(2) 0

6 Number of layers between LPDDR2 routing layer and reference plane(3) 0

7 PCB routing feature size 4 mils

8 PCB trace width, w 4 mils

9 PCB BGA escape via pad size(4) 18 20 mils

10 PCB BGA escape via hole size 10 mils

11 Single-ended impedance, Zo(5) 50 75 Ω

12 Impedance control(6)(7) Zo-5 Zo Zo+5 Ω

(1) Ground reference layers are preferred over power reference layers. Be sure to include bypass caps to accommodate reference layer

return current as the trace routes switch routing layers.

(2) No traces should cross reference plane cuts within the LPDDR2 routing region. High-speed signal traces crossing reference plane cuts

create large return current paths which can lead to excessive crosstalk and EMI radiation.

(3) Reference planes are to be directly adjacent to the signal plane to minimize the size of the return current loop.

(4) An 18-mil pad assumes Via Channel is the most economical BGA escape. A 20-mil pad may be used if additional layers are available

for power routing. An 18-mil pad is required for minimum layer count escape.

(5) Zo is the nominal singled-ended impedance selected for the PCB.

(6) This parameter specifies the AC characteristic impedance tolerance for each segment of a PCB signal trace relative to the chosen Zo

defined by the single-ended impedance parameter.

(7) Tighter impedance control is required to ensure flight time skew is minimal.

LPDDR2

interface

202

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.8.2.2.3.4 LPDDR2 Placement

Figure 5-81 shows the placement rules for the device as well as the LPDDR2 memory device. Placement

restrictions are provided as a guidance to restrict maximum trace lengths and allow for proper routing

space.

Figure 5-81. Placement Specifications

Table 5-66. Placement Specifications(1)

NO. PARAMETER MIN MAX UNIT

1 X1 Offset(2)(3) 1500 mils

2 Y Offset(2)(3)(4) 1500 mils

3 Clearance from non-LPDDR2 signal to LPDDR2 keepout region(4)(5) 4 w

(1) LPDDR2 keepout region to encompass entire LPDDR2 routing area.

(2) Measurements from center of device to center of LPDDR2 device.

(3) Minimizing X1 and Y improves timing margins.

(4) w is defined as the signal trace width.

(5) Non-LPDDR2 signals allowed within LPDDR2 keepout region provided they are separated from LPDDR2 routing layers by a ground

plane.

5.13.8.2.2.3.5 LPDDR2 Keepout Region

The region of the PCB used for LPDDR2 circuitry must be isolated from other signals. The LPDDR2

keepout region is defined for this purpose and is shown in Figure 5-82. This region should encompass all

LPDDR2 circuitry and the region size varies with component placement and LPDDR2 routing. Non-

LPDDR2 signals should not be routed on the same signal layer as LPDDR2 signals within the LPDDR2

keepout region. Non-LPDDR2 signals may be routed in the region provided they are routed on layers

separated from LPDDR2 signal layers by a ground layer. No breaks should be allowed in the reference

ground or VDDS_DDR power plane in this region. In addition, the VDDS_DDR power plane should cover

the entire keepout region.

LPDDR2 Keepout Region

Encompasses Entire

LPDDR2 Routing Area

LPDDR2

interface

203

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Figure 5-82. LPDDR2 Keepout Region

5.13.8.2.2.3.6 LPDDR2 Net Classes

Table 5-67. Clock Net Class Definitions for the LPDDR2

Interface

CLOCK NET CLASS PIN NAMES

CK DDR_CK and DDR_CKn

DQS0 DDR_DQS0 and DDR_DQSn0

DQS1 DDR_DQS1 and DDR_DQSn1

DQS2 DDR_DQS2 and DDR_DQSn2

DQS3 DDR_DQS3 and DDR_DQSn3

Table 5-68. Signal Net Class and Associated Clock Net Class for LPDDR2 Interface

SIGNAL NET CLASS ASSOCIATED CLOCK

NET CLASS PIN NAMES

ADDR_CTRL CK DDR_BA[2:0], DDR_CSn0, DDR_CSn1, DDR_CKE0, DDR_CKE1,

DDR_RASn, DDR_CASn, DDR_WEn, DDR_A1, DDR_A2, DDR_A10,

DDR_A13

DQ0 DQS0 DDR_D[7:0], DDR_DQM0

DQ1 DQS1 DDR_D[15:8], DDR_DQM1

DQ2 DQS2 DDR_D[23:16], DDR_DQM2

DQ3 DQS3 DDR_D[31:24], DDR_DQM3

5.13.8.2.2.3.7 LPDDR2 Signal Termination

On-device termination (ODT) is available for DQ[3:0] signal net classes, but is not specifically required for

normal operation. System designers may evaluate the need for additional series termination if required

based on signal integrity, EMI and overshoot/undershoot reduction.

5.13.8.2.2.3.8 LPDDR2 DDR_VREF Routing

DDR_VREF is the reference voltage for the input buffers on the LPDDR2 memory as well as the device.

DDR_VREF is intended to be half the LPDDR2 power supply voltage and is typically generated with a

voltage divider connected to the VDDS_DDR power supply. It should be routed as a nominal 20-mil wide

trace with 0.1-µF bypass capacitors near each device connection. Narrowing of DDR_VREF is allowed to

accommodate routing congestion.

DQS[x]+

DQS[x]-

Routed Differentially

DQS[x]

DQ[x]

Device

DQ[x]

IO Buffer

DDR3

DQ[x]

IO Buffer

Device

DQS[x]

IO Buffer

DDR3

DQS[x]

IO Buffer

Routed Differentially

DQS[x]-

DQS[x]+

204

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.8.2.2.4 Routing Specification

5.13.8.2.2.4.1 DQS[x] and DQ[x] Routing Specification

DQS[x] lines are point-to-point differential and DQ[x] lines are point-to-point single ended. Figure 5-83 and

Figure 5-84 represent the supported topologies. Figure 5-85 and Figure 5-86 show the DQS[x] and DQ[x]

routing. Figure 5-87 shows the DQLM for the LPDDR2 interface.

x = 0, 1, 2, 3

Figure 5-83. DQS[x] Topology

x = 0, 1, 2, 3

Figure 5-84. DQ[x] Topology

x = 0, 1, 2, 3

Figure 5-85. DQS[x] Routing

DQLMYi

DQi

DQLMXi

i = 0, 1, 2, 3

LPDDR2

interface

DQLM0 = DQLMX0 + DQLMY0

DQLM2 = DQLMX2 + DQLMY2

DQLM3 = DQLMX3 + DQLMY3

DQLM1 = DQLMX1 + DQLMY1

DQ0 - DQ3 represent data bytes 0 - 3.

DQ[x]

205

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

x = 0, 1, 2, 3

Figure 5-86. DQ[x] Routing

There are four DQLMs, one for each data byte, in a 32-bit interface and two DQLMs, one for each data byte, in a 16-

bit interface. Each DQLM is the longest Manhattan distance of the byte.

Figure 5-87. DQLM for LPDDR2 Interface

Trace routing specifications for the DQ[x] and the DQS[x] are specified in Table 5-69.

Table 5-69. DQS[x] and DQ[x] Routing Specification(1)(2)

NO. PARAMETER MIN TYP MAX UNIT

1 DQ0 nominal length(3)(4) DQLM0 mils

2 DQ1 nominal length(3)(5) DQLM1 mils

3 DQ2 nominal length (3)(6) DQLM2 mils

4 DQ3 nominal length (3)(7) DQLM3 mils

5 DQ[x] skew(8) 50 mils

6 DQS[x] skew 10 mils

7 Via count per each trace in DQ[x], DQS[x] 2

8 Via count difference across a given DQ[x], DQS[x] 0

9 DQS[x]-to-DQ[x] skew(8)(9) 50 mils

10 Center-to-center DQ[x] to other LPDDR2 trace spacing(10)(11) 4 w

11 Center-to-center DQ[x] to other DQ[x] trace spacing(10)(12) 3 w

12 DQS[x] center-to-center spacing(13)

13 DQS[x] center-to-center spacing to other net(10) 4 w

CK+

CK-

Routed Differentially

CK-

ADDR_CTRL

Device

ADDR_CTRL

Output Buffer

LPDDR2

ADDR_CTRL

Input Buffer

Device CK

Output Buffer

LPDDR2

Input Buffer

Routed Differentially

CK-

CK+

206

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

(1) DQS[x] represents the DQS0, DQS1, DQS2, DQS3 clock net classes, and DQ[x] represents the DQ0, DQ1, DQ2, DQ3 signal net

classes.

(2) External termination disallowed. Data termination should use built-in ODT functionality.

(3) DQLMn is the longest Manhattan distance of a byte.

(4) DQLM0 is the longest Manhattan length for the DQ0 net class.

(5) DQLM1 is the longest Manhattan length for the DQ1 net class.

(6) DQLM2 is the longest Manhattan length for the DQ2 net class.

(7) DQLM3 is the longest Manhattan length for the DQ3 net class.

(8) Length matching is only done within a byte. Length matching across bytes is not required.

(9) Each DQS clock net class is length matched to its associated DQ signal net class.

(10) Center-to-center spacing is allowed to fall to minimum for up to 1000 mils of routed length.

(11) Other LPDDR2 trace spacing means signals that are not part of the same DQ[x] signal net class.

(12) This applies to spacing within same DQ[x] signal net class.

(13) DQS[x] pair spacing is set to ensure proper differential impedance. Differential impedance should be Zo x 2, where Zo is the single-

ended impedance.

5.13.8.2.2.4.2 CK and ADDR_CTRL Routing Specification

CK signals are routed as point-to-point differential, and ADDR_CTRL signals are routed as point-to-point

single ended. The supported topology for CK and ADDR_CTRL are shown in Figure 5-88 through

Figure 5-91. ADDR_CTRL are routed very similar to DQ and CK is routed very similar to DQS.

Figure 5-88. CK Signals Topology

Figure 5-89. ADDR_CTRL Signals Topology

Figure 5-90. CK Signals Routing

CACLMY

CACLMX

CACLM = CACLMX + CACLMY

LPDDR2

interface

ADDR_CTRL

207

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Figure 5-91. ADDR_CTRL Signals Routing

CACLM is the longest Manhattan distance of the CK/ADDR_CTRL signal class.

Figure 5-92. CACLM for LPDDR2 Interface

Trace routing specifications for the CK and the ADD_CTRL are specified in Table 5-70.

Table 5-70. CK and ADDR_CTRL Routing Specification

NO. PARAMETER MIN TYP MAX UNIT

1 CK and ADDR_CTRL nominal trace length(1) CACLM mils

2 ADDR_CTRL skew 50 mils

3 CK skew 10 mils

4 Via count per each trace ADDR_CTRL, CK 2

5 Via count difference across ADDR_CTRL, CK 0

6 ADDR_CTRL-to-CK skew 50 mils

7 Center-to-center ADDR_CTRL to other LPDDR2 trace spacing(2)(3) 4 w

8 Center-to-center ADDR_CTRL to other ADDR_CTRL trace spacing(2) 3 w

9 CK center-to-center spacing(4)

10 CK center-to-center spacing to other net(2) 4 w

(1) CACLM is the longest Manhattan distance of ADDR_CTRL and CK.

(2) Center-to-center spacing is allowed to fall to minimum for up to 1000 mils of routed length.

(3) Other LPDDR2 trace spacing means signals that are not part of the same CK, ADDR_CTRL signal net class.

(4) CK pair spacing is set to ensure proper differential impedance. Differential impedance should be Zo x 2, where Zo is the single ended

impedance.

208

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.9 Display Subsystem (DSS)

NOTE

For more information, see the Display Subsystem chapter of the AM437x Sitara Processors

Technical Reference Manual.

The display subsystem (DSS) provides the logic to display the video frame from external (SDRAM) or

internal (SRAM) memory on an LCD panel or a TV set. The display subsystem integrates the following

elements:

• Display controller (DISPC) module

• Remote frame buffer interface (RFBI) module

The DSS can be used in the following configuration: LCD display with parallel interface

5.13.9.1 DSS—Parallel Interface

In parallel interface, the paths of the display subsystem modules are the display controller and the RFBI.

The display controller has two I/O pad modes and could be in the following configuration:

• Bypass mode (RFBI disabled), which implements the MIPI DPI protocol

• RFBI mode (RFBI enabled), which implements MIPI DBI 2.0 type B protocol

5.13.9.1.1 DSS—Parallel Interface—Bypass Mode

Two types of LCD panel are supported:

• Thin film transistor (TFT) or active matrix technology

• Supertwisted nematic (STN) or passive matrix technology

Both configurations are discussed in the following paragraphs.

5.13.9.1.1.1 DSS—Parallel Interface—Bypass Mode—TFT Mode

Table 5-72 assumes testing over the recommended operating conditions and electrical characteristic

conditions below (see Figure 5-93).

Table 5-71. DSS Timing Conditions—TFT Mode

TIMING CONDITION PARAMETER VALUE UNIT

MIN MAX

Output Condition

CLOAD Output load capacitance 10 pF

Table 5-72. DSS Switching Characteristics—TFT Mode

NO. PARAMETER OPP100 OPP50 UNIT

MIN MAX MIN MAX

DL0 td(pclkA-hsync) Delay time, output pixel clock dss_pclk active edge to

output horizontal synchronization dss_hsync transition -2.4 2.4 -3.5 2.5 ns

DL1 td(pclkA-vsync) Delay time, output pixel clock dss_pclk active edge to

output vertical synchronization dss_vsync transition -2.4 2.4 -3.5 2.5 ns

DL2 td(pclkA-acbiasA) Delay time, output pixel clock dss_pclk active edge to

output data enable dss_acbias active level -2.4 2.4 -3.5 2.5 ns

DL3 td(pclkA-dV) Delay time, output pixel clock dss_pclk active edge to

output data dss_data[23:0] valid -2.4 2.4 -3.5 2.5 ns

DL4 1 / tc(pclk) Frequency(1), output pixel clock dss_pclk 100 75 MHz

dss_pclk

dss_vsync

dss_hsync

dss_acbias

dss_data[23:0]

DL4 DL5

DL3

DL0

DL2

DL1

209

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 5-72. DSS Switching Characteristics—TFT Mode (continued)

NO. PARAMETER OPP100 OPP50 UNIT

MIN MAX MIN MAX

DL5 tw(pclk) Pulse duration, output pixel clock dss_pclk low or high 0.45P(2) 0.55P(2)(3) 0.45P(2) 0.55P(2)(3) ns

tJ(pclk) Peak-peak jitter, output pixel clock dss_pclk 200 200 ps

(1) The pixel clock frequency is software programmable via the pixel clock DISPC_DIVISOR register.

(2) P = dss_pclk period in ns

(3) tw(pclk) = 0.66P when DISPC_DIVISOR[7:0] PCD = 3

A. The pixel data bus depends on the use of 8-, 9-, 12-, 16-, 18-, or 24-bit per pixel data output pins.

B. The pixel clock frequency is programmable.

C. All timings not illustrated in the waveform are progammable by software, and control signal polarity and driven edge of

dss_pclk too.

D. For more information, see the DSS chapter in the AM437x Sitara Processors Technical Reference Manual.

Figure 5-93. DSS—TFT Mode

5.13.9.1.1.2 DSS—Parallel Interface—Bypass Mode—STN Mode

Table 5-74 assumes testing over the recommended operating conditions and electrical characteristic

conditions below (see Figure 5-94).

Table 5-73. DSS Timing Conditions—STN Mode

TIMING CONDITION PARAMETER VALUE UNIT

MIN MAX

Output Condition

CLOAD Output load capacitance 40 pF

(1) The DSS in STN mode is used with 4 or 8 pins only; unused pixel data bits always remain low.

(2) The pixel clock frequency is software programmable via the pixel clock divider DISPC_DIVISOR register.

(3) P = dss_pclk period in ns

(4) tW(pclk) = 0.66P when DISPC_DIVISOR[7:0] PCD = 3

Table 5-74. DSS Switching Characteristics—STN Mode(1)

NO. PARAMETER OPP100 OPP50 UNIT

MIN MAX MIN MAX

DL3 td(pclkA-dV) Delay time, output pixel clock dss_pclk active edge to

output data dss_data[7:0] valid -6 6 -6 6 ns

DL4 1 / tc(pclk) Frequency(2), output pixel clock dss_pclk 45 45 MHz

DL5 tw(pclk) Pulse duration, output pixel clock dss_pclk low or high 0.45P(3) 0.55P(3)(4) 0.45P(3) 0.55P(3)(4) ns

dss_pclk

dss_vsync

dss_hsync

dss_acbias

dss_data[23:0]

DL4

DL5

DL3

210

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 5-74. DSS Switching Characteristics—STN Mode(1) (continued)

NO. PARAMETER OPP100 OPP50 UNIT

MIN MAX MIN MAX

tJ(pclk) Peak-peak jitter, output pixel clock dss_pclk 200 200 ps

(1) For any information regarding the RFBI registers configuration, see the Display Subsystem / Display Subsystem Environment / LCD

Support / Parallel Interface / Parallel Interface in RFBI Mode (MIPI DBI Protocol) / Transaction Timing Diagrams section of the AM437x

Sitara Processors Technical Reference Manual.

A. The pixel data bus depends on the use of 4-, 8-, 12-, 16-, 18-, or 24-bit per pixel data output pins.

B. All timings not illustrated in the waveform are progammable by software, and control signal polarity and driven edge of

dss_pclk too.

C. dss_vsync width must be programmed to be as small as possible.

D. The pixel clock frequency is programmable.

E. For more information, see the DSS chapter in the AM437x Sitara Processors Technical Reference Manual.

Figure 5-94. DSS—STN Mode

5.13.9.1.2 DSS—Parallel Interface—RFBI Mode—Applications

5.13.9.1.2.1 DSS—Parallel Interface—RFBI Mode—MIPI DBI 2.0—LCD Panel

The Remote Frame Buffer Interface (RFBI) module provides the necessary control signals and data

(MIPI®DBI 2.0 type B protocol) to interface to the LCD driver of the LCD panel.

Table 5-76 and Table 5-77 assume testing over the recommended operating conditions and electrical

characteristic conditions below (see Figure 5-95,Figure 5-96, and Figure 5-97).

Table 5-75. DSS Timing Conditions—RFBI Mode—MIPI DBI 2.0—LCD Panel(1)

TIMING CONDITION PARAMETER VALUE UNIT

MIN MAX

Input Conditions

tRInput signal rise time 7 ns

tFInput signal fall time 7 ns

Output Condition

CLOAD Output load capacitance 30 pF

211

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 5-76. DSS Timing Requirements—RFBI Mode—MIPI DBI 2.0—LCD Panel

NO. PARAMETER OPP100 OPP50 UNIT

MIN MAX MIN MAX

DR0 tsu(dV-rdH) Setup time, input data rfbi_da[15:0] valid to output

read enable rfbi_rd high 7 7 ns

DR1 th(rdH-dIV) Hold time, output read enable rfbi_rd high to input data

rfbi_da[15:0] invalid 5 5 ns

td(Data sampled) Input data rfbi_da[15:0] sampled at the end of the

access time N(1) N(1) ns

(1) N = (AccessTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × L4CLK

Table 5-77. DSS Switching Characteristics—RFBI Mode—MIPI DBI 2.0—LCD Panel

PARAMETER OPP100 OPP50 UNIT

MIN MAX MIN MAX

tw(wrH) Pulse duration, output write enable rfbi_wr high A(1) A(1) ns

tw(wrL) Pulse duration, output write enable rfbi_wr low B(2) B(2) ns

td(a0-wrL) Delay time, output command/data control rfbi_a0 transition to

output write enable rfbi_wr low C(3) C(3) ns

td(wrH-a0) Delay time, output write enable rfbi_wr high to output

command/data control rfbi_a0 transition D(4) D(4) ns

td(csx-wrL) Delay time, output chip select rfbi_csx(14) low to output write

enable rfbi_wr low E(5) E(5) ns

td(wrH-csxH) Delay time, output write enable rfbi_wr high to output chip select

rfbi_csx(14) high F(6) F(6) ns

td(dV) Output data rfbi_da[15:0] valid G(7) G(7) ns

td(a0H-rdL) Delay time, output command/data control rfbi_a0 high to output

read enable rfbi_rd low H(8) H(8) ns

td(rdlH-a0) Delay time, output read enable rfbi_rd high to output

command/data control rfbi_a0 transition I(9) I(9) ns

tw(rdH) Pulse duration, output read enable rfbi_rd high J(10) J(10) ns

tw(rdL) Pulse duration, output read enable rfbi_rd low K(11) K(11) ns

td(rdL-csxL) Delay time, output read enable rfbi_rd low to output chip select

rfbi_csx(14) low L(12) L(12) ns

td(rdH-csxH) Delay time, output read enable rfbi_rd high to output chip select

rfbi_csx(14) high M(13) M(13) ns

tR(wr) Rise time, output write enable rfbi_wr 7 7 ns

tF(wr) Fall time, output write enable rfbi_wr 7 7 ns

tR(a0) Rise time, output command/data control rfbi_a0 7 7 ns

tF(a0) Fall time, output command/data control rfbi_a0 7 7 ns

tR(csx) Rise time, output chip select rfbi_csx(14) 7 7 ns

tF(csx) Fall time, output chip select rfbi_csx(14) 7 7 ns

tR(d) Rise time, output data rfbi_da[15:0] 7 7 ns

tF(d) Fall time, output data rfbi_da[15:0] 7 7 ns

tR(rd) Rise time, output read enable rfbi_rd 7 7 ns

tF(rd) Fall time, output read enable rfbi_rd 7 7 ns

(1) A = (WECycleTime – WEOffTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × L4CLK

(2) B = (WEOffTime – WEOntime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × L4CLK

(3) C = WEOnTime × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × L4CLK

(4) D = (WECycleTime + CSPulseWidth – WEOffTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × L4CLK if mode Write to Read or Read to Write is

enabled

(5) E = (WEOnTime – CSOnTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × L4CLK

(6) F = (CSOffTime – WEOffTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × L4CLK

(7) G = WECycleTime × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × L4CLK

rfbi_a0

rfbi_csx(A)

rfbi_rd

rfbi_da[n:0](B)

rfbi_wr

rfbi_te_vsync[1:0]

rfbi_hsync[1:0]

DATA0 DATA1

CsOnTime

ReOffTime

CsPulseWidth

AccessTime

CsOnTime

CsOffTime

ReOnTime

ReOffTime

AccessTime

ReCycleTime

DR1

ReCycleTime

CsOffTime

ReOnTime

DR0

rfbi_a0

rfbi_csx(A)

rfbi_wr

rfbi_da[n:0](B)

rfbi_rd

rfbi_te_vsync[1:0]

rfbi_hsync[1:0]

DATA0 DATA1

CsOnTime

CsOffTime

WeOnTime

WeOffTime

CsOnTime

CsOffTime

WeOnTime

WeOffTime

CsPulseWidth

WeCycleTime WeCycleTime

212

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

(8) H = REOnTime × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × L4CLK

(9) I = (RECycleTime + CSPulseWidth – REOffTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × L4CLK if mode Write to Read or Read to Write is

enabled

(10) J = (RECycleTime – REOffTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × L4CLK

(11) K = (REOffTime – REOntime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × L4CLK

(12) L = (REOnTime – CSOnTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × L4CLK

(13) M = (CSOffTime – REOffTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × L4CLK

(14) In rfbi_csx, x is equal to 0 or 1.

A. In rfbi_csx, x is equal to 0 or 1.

B. rfbi_da[n:0], n up to 15

C. For more information, see the DSS chapter in the AM437x Sitara Processors Technical Reference Manual.

Figure 5-95. DSS—RFBI Mode—MIPI DBI 2.0—LCD Panel—Command / Data Write

A. In rfbi_csx, x is equal to 0 or 1.

B. rfbi_da[n:0], n up to 15

C. For more information, see the DSS chapter in the AM437x Sitara Processors Technical Reference Manual.

Figure 5-96. DSS—RFBI Mode—MIPI DBI 2.0—LCD Panel—Command / Data Read

rfbi_a0

rfbi_csx(A)

rfbi_wr

rfbi_rd

rfbi_da[n:0](B)

rfbi_te_vsync[1:0]

rfbi_hsync[1:0]

WRITE READ WRITE

CsOnTime

CsOffTime

WEOffTime

WECycleTime

CsPulseWidth

ReCycleTime

AccessTime

CsOnTime

CsOffTime

ReOffTime

CsPulseWidth

CsOnTime

WEOffTime

CsOffTime

WECycleTime

WEOnTime

ReOnTime

WEOnTime

213

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

A. In rfbi_csx, x is equal to 0 or 1.

B. rfbi_da[n:0], n up to 15

C. For more information, see the DSS chapter in the AM437x Sitara Processors Technical Reference Manual.

Figure 5-97. DSS—RFBI Mode—MIPI DBI 2.0—LCD Panel—Command / Data Write to Read and Read to

Write Modes

5.13.9.1.2.2 DSS—Parallel Interface—RFBI Mode—Pico DLP

The Remote Frame Buffer Interface (RFBI) module can provide also the necessary control signals and

data to interface to the Pico DLP driver of the Pico DLP panel. Table 5-78 assumes testing over the

recommended operating conditions and electrical characteristic conditions below (see Figure 5-98).

Table 5-78. DSS Timing Conditions—RFBI Mode—Pico DLP

TIMING CONDITION PARAMETER VALUE UNIT

MIN MAX

Output Condition

CLOAD Output load capacitance 5 pF

To use Pico DLP application, RFBI register must be configured as shown in Table 5-79:

Table 5-79. DSS Register Configuration—RFBI Mode—Pico DLP

DESCRIPTION REGISTER AND BIT FIELD(1) BIT VALUES

Selection parallel mode RFBI_CONFIGi and

ParallelMode [1:0] 0b11: 16-bit parallel output interface

selected

Time Granularity (multiplies signal timing

latencies by 2). RFBI_CONFIGi

andTimeGranularity [4] 0b0: x2 latency disable

CS signal assertion time from Start Access

Time RFBI_ONOFF_TIMEi and

CSOnTime [3:0] 0b0000

CS signal deassertion time from Start Access

Time RFBI_ONOFF_TIMEi and

CSOffTime [9:4] 0b000100: 4 cycles

WE signal assertion time from Start Access

Time RFBI_ONOFF_TIMEi and

WEOnTime [13:10] 0b0000

WE signal deassertion time from Start Access

Time RFBI_ONOFF_TIMEi and

WEOffTime [19:14] 0b000010: 2 cycles

RE signal assertion time from Start Access

Time RFBI_ONOFF_TIMEi and

REOnTime [23:20] 0b0000

214

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 5-79. DSS Register Configuration—RFBI Mode—Pico DLP (continued)

DESCRIPTION REGISTER AND BIT FIELD(1) BIT VALUES

RE signal deassertion time from Start Access

Time RFBI_ONOFF_TIMEi and

REOffTime [29:24] 0b0000

Write cycle time RFBI_CYCLE_TIMEi and

WECycleTime [5:0] 0b000100: 4 cycles

Read cycle time RFBI_CYCLE_TIMEi and

ReCycleTime [11:6] 0b000000

CS pulse width RFBI_CYCLE_TIMEi and

CSPulseWidth [17:12] 0b000000

Read to Write CS pulse width enable RFBI_CYCLE_TIMEi and

RWEnable [18] 0b0

Read to Read CS pulse width enable RFBI_CYCLE_TIMEi and

RREnable [19] 0b0

Write to Write CS pulse width enable RFBI_CYCLE_TIMEi and

WWEnable [20] 0b0

Write to Read CS pulse width enable RFBI_CYCLE_TIMEi and

WREnable [21] 0b0

From Start Access Time to CLK rising edge

used for the first data capture RFBI_CYCLE_TIMEi and

AccessTime [27:22] 0b000000

(1) i is equal to 0 or 1. For more information, see the DSS chapter in the AM437x Sitara Processors Technical Reference Manual.

215

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 5-80. DSS Switching Characteristics—RFBI Mode—Pico DLP(1)(2)(3)

PARAMETER OPP100 OPP50 UNIT

MIN MAX MIN MAX

tw(wrH) Pulse duration, output write enable rfbi_wr high A(4) A(4) ns

tw(wrL) Pulse duration, output write enable rfbi_wr low B(5) B(5) ns

td(a0-wrL) Delay time, output command/data control rfbi_a0

transition to output write enable rfbi_wr low C(6) C(6) ns

td(wrH-a0) Delay time, output write enable rfbi_wr high to output

command/data control rfbi_a0 transition D(7) D(7) ns

td(csx-wrL) Delay time, output chip select rfbi_csx(8) low to output

write enable rfbi_wr low E(9) E(9) ns

td(wrH-csxH) Delay time, output write enable rfbi_wr high to output

chip select rfbi_csx(8) high F(10) F(10) ns

td(dataV) Output data rfbi_da[15:0](11) valid G(12) G(12) ns

td(Skew) Skew between output write enable falling rfbi_wr and

output data rfbi_da[15:0](11) high or low 15.5 15.5 ns

td(a0H-rdL) Delay time, output command/data control rfbi_a0 high to

output read enable rfbi_rd low H(13) H(13) ns

td(rdlH-a0) Delay time, output read enable rfbi_rd high to output

command/data control rfbi_a0 transition I(14) I(14) ns

tw(rdH) Pulse duration, output read enable rfbi_rd high J(15) J(15) ns

tw(rdL) Pulse duration, output read enable rfbi_rd low K(16) K(16) ns

td(rdL-csxL) Delay time, output read enable rfbi_rd low to output chip

select rfbi_csx(8) low L(17) L(17) ns

td(rdL-csxH) Delay time, output read enable rfbi_rd low to output chip

select rfbi_csx(8) high M(18) M(18) ns

tR(wr) Rise time, output write enable rfbi_wr 7 7 ns

tF(wr) Fall time, output write enable rfbi_wr 7 7 ns

tR(a0) Rise time, output command/data control rfbi_a0 7 7 ns

tF(a0) Fall time, output command/data control rfbi_a0 7 7 ns

tR(csx) Rise time, output chip select rfbi_csx(8) 7 7 ns

tF(csx) Fall time, output chip select rfbi_csx(8) 7 7 ns

tR(d) Rise time, output data rfbi_da[15:0](11) 7 7 ns

tF(d) Fall time, output data rfbi_da[15:0](11) 7 7 ns

tR(rd) Rise time, output read enable rfbi_rd 7 7 ns

tF(rd) Fall time, output read enable rfbi_rd 7 7 ns

CsOnTime CS signal assertion time from Start Access Time –

RFBI_ONOFF_TIMEi Register 0(19) ns

CsOffTime CS signal deassertion time from Start Access Time –

RFBI_ONOFF_TIMEi Register 40(19) ns

WeOnTime WE signal assertion time from Start Access Time –

RFBI_ONOFF_TIMEi Register 0(19) ns

WeOffTime WE signal deassertion time from Start Access Time –

RFBI_ONOFF_TIMEi Register 20(19) ns

ReOnTime RE signal assertion time from Start Access Time –

RFBI_ONOFF_TIMEi Register - ns

ReOffTime RE signal deassertion time from Start Access Time –

RFBI_ONOFF_TIMEi Register - ns

WeCycleTime Write cycle time – RFBI_CYCLE_TIMEi Register 40(19) ns

ReCycleTime Read cycle time – RFBI_CYCLE_TIMEi Register - ns

CsPulseWidth CS pulse width – RFBI_CYCLE_TIMEi Register 0(19) ns

rfbi_hsync[1:0]

rfbi_a0

rfbi_csx(A)

rfbi_wr

rfbi_da[n:0](B)

rfbi_rd

rfbi_te_vsync[1:0]

DATA0 DATA1

CsOnTime

CsOffTime

WeOffTime

CsOnTime

CsOffTime

WeOnTime

WeOffTime

CsPulseWidth

WeCycleTime

WeOnTime

WeCycleTime

216

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

(1) See DM Operating Condition Addendum for OPP voltages.

(2) At OPP100, L4 clock is 100 MHz and at OPP50, L4 clock is 50 MHz.

(3) rfbi_wr must be at 25 MHz.

(4) A = (WECycleTime – WEOffTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × L4CLK

(5) B = (WEOffTime – WEOntime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × L4CLK

(6) C = WEOnTime × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × L4CLK

(7) D = (WECycleTime + CSPulseWidth – WEOffTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × L4CLK if mode Write to Read or Read to Write is

enabled.

(8) In rfbi_csx, x is equal to 0 or 1.

(9) E = (WEOnTime – CSOnTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × L4CLK

(10) F = (CSOffTime – WEOffTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × L4CLK

(11) 16-bit parallel output interface is selected in DSS register.

(12) G = WECycleTime × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × L4CLK

(13) H = REOnTime × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × L4CLK

(14) I = (RECycleTime + CSPulseWidth – REOffTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × L4CLK if mode Write to Read or Read to Write is

enabled.

(15) J = (RECycleTime – REOffTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × L4CLK

(16) K = (REOffTime – REOntime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × L4CLK

(17) L = (REOnTime – CSOnTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × L4CLK

(18) M = (CSOffTime – REOffTime) × (TimeParaGranularity + 1) × L4CLK

(19) These values are calculated by the following formula: RFBI Register (Value) × L4 Clock (ns).

A. In rfbi_csx, x is equal to 0 or 1.

B. rfbi_da[n:0], n up to 15

Figure 5-98. DSS—RFBI Mode—Pico DLP—Command / Data Write

217

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.10 Camera (VPFE)

The camera (VPFE) controller receives input video/image data from external capture devices and stores it

to external memory which is transferred into the external memory via a built-in DMA engine. An internal

buffer block provides a high bandwidth path between the module and the external memory. The Cortex-A9

will process the image data based on application requirements.

5.13.10.1 Camera (VPFE) Timing

The following tables assume testing over recommended operating conditions.

Table 5-81. VPFE Timing Requirements

NO.

1.8 V, 3.3 V

UNITOPP50 OPP100

MIN MAX MIN MAX

VF1 tc(CAMx_CLK) Cycle time, pixel clock input, CAMx_CLK 20 13.3 ns

VF2 tsu(CAMx_D-

CAMx_CLK) Setup time, CAMx_D to CAMx_CLK rising edge 7.5 3.5 ns

VF3 tsu(CAMx_HD-

CAMx_CLK) Setup time, CAMx_HD to CAMx_CLK rising edge 7.5 3.5 ns

VF4 tsu(CAMx_VD-

CAMx_CLK) Setup time, CAMx_VD to CAMx_CLK rising edge 7.5 3.5 ns

VF5 tsu(CAMx_WEN-

CAMx_CLK) Setup time, CAMx_WEN to CAMx_CLK rising edge 7.5 3.5 ns

VF6 tsu(C_FLD-CAMx_CLK) Setup time, CAMx_FIELD to CAMx_CLK rising edge 7.5 3.5 ns

VF7 th(CAMx_CLK-

CAMx_D) Hold time, CAMx_D valid after CAMx_CLK rising edge 6.5 2.5 ns

VF8 th(VDIN-HD-

CAMx_CLK) Hold time, CAMx_HD to CAMx_CLK rising edge 6.5 2.5 ns

VF9 th(CAMx_VD-

CAMx_CLK) Hold time, CAMx_VD to CAMx_CLK rising edge 6.5 2.5 ns

VF10 th(CAMx_WEN-

CAMx_CLK) Hold time, CAMx_WEN to CAMx_CLK rising edge 6.5 2.5 ns

VF11 th(C_FLD-CAMx_CLK) Hold time, CAMx_FIELD to CAMx_CLK rising edge 6.5 2.5 ns

Table 5-82. VPFE Output Switching Characteristics

NO. PARAMETER

1.8 V, 3.3 V

OPP50 OPP100 UNIT

MIN MAX MIN MAX

VF12 td(CAMx_HD-

CAMx_CLK) Output delay time, CAMx_HD to CLK rising edge 9 15 2 9 ns

VF13 td(CAMx_VD-

CAMx_CLK) Output delay time, CAMx_VD to CLK rising edge 9 15 2 9 ns

VF14 td(CAMx_WEN-

CAMx_CLK) Output delay time, CAMx_WEN to CLK rising edge 9 15 2 9 ns

CAMx_D[xx]

CAMx_HD

(Falling Edge)

CAMx_HD

(Rising Edge)

VF19 VF20

VF18

CAMx_CLK

(Falling Edge)

VF12,

VF13, VF14

CAMx_CLK

(Rising Edge)

CAMx_HD,

CAMx_VD,

CAMx_FIELD

VF15, VF16,

VF17 VF12, VF13, VF14

VF15, VF16,

VF17

VF1

CAMx_CLK

(Falling Edge)

VF2 VF7 VF7

VF10

VF8, VF9, VF11

VF3, VF4, VF6

VF5

CAMx_CLK

(Rising Edge)

CAMx_D[xx]

CAMx_HD,

CAMx_VD,

CAMx_FIELD

CAMx_WEN

218

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Figure 5-99. Camera Input Timings

Figure 5-100. Camera Output Timings

Figure 5-101. Camera Input Timings With VDIN0_HD as Pixel Clock

219

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.11 Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C)

For more information, see the Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) section of the AM437x ARM Cortex-A9

Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual.

5.13.11.1 I2C Electrical Data and Timing

Table 5-83. I2C Timing Conditions - Slave Mode

TIMING CONDITION PARAMETER STANDARD MODE FAST MODE UNIT

MIN MAX MIN MAX

Output Condition

CbCapacitive load for each bus line 400 400 pF

Table 5-84. Timing Requirements for I2C Input Timings

(see Figure 5-102)

NO. STANDARD MODE FAST MODE UNIT

MIN MAX MIN MAX

1 tc(SCL) Cycle time, SCL 10 2.5 us

2 tsu(SCLH-SDAL) Setup Time, SCL high before SDA low (for a repeated

START condition) 4.7 0.6 us

3 th(SDAL-SCLL) Hold time, SCL low after SDA low (for a START and a

repeated START condition) 4 0.6 us

4 tw(SCLL) Pulse duration, SCL low 4.7 1.3 us

5 tw(SCLH) Pulse duration, SCL high 4 0.6 us

6 tsu(SDAV-SCLH) Setup time, SDA valid before SCL high 250 100(1) ns

7 th(SCLL-SDAV) Hold time, SDA valid after SCL low 0(2) 3.45(3) 0(2) 0.9(3) us

8 tw(SDAH) Pulse duration, SDA high between STOP and START

conditions 4.7 1.3 us

9 tr(SDA) Rise time, SDA 1000 20 + 0.1Cb(4) 300 ns

10 tr(SCL) Rise time, SCL 1000 20 + 0.1Cb(4) 300 ns

11 tf(SDA) Fall time, SDA 300 20 + 0.1Cb(4) 300 ns

12 tf(SCL) Fall time, SCL 300 20 + 0.1Cb(4) 300 ns

13 tsu(SCLH-SDAH) Setup time, high before SDA high (for STOP condition) 4 0.6 us

14 tw(SP) Pulse duration, spike (must be suppressed) 0 50 0 50 ns

(1) A fast-mode I2C-bus™ device can be used in a standard-mode I2C-bus system, but the requirement tsu(SDA-SCLH)≥250 ns must then be

met. This is automatically the case if the device does not stretch the LOW period of the SCL signal. If such a device stretches the LOW

period of the SCL signal, it must output the next data bit to the SDA line tr max + tsu(SDA-SCLH) = 1000 + 250 = 1250 ns (according to the

standard-mode I2C-Bus Specification) before the SCL line is released.

(2) A device must internally provide a hold time of at least 300 ns for the SDA signal (referred to the VIHmin of the SCL signal) to bridge the

undefined region of the falling edge of SCL.

(3) The maximum th(SDA-SCLL) has only to be met if the device does not stretch the low period [tw(SCLL)] of the SCL signal.

(4) Cb is line load in pF.

Stop Start Repeated

Start

Stop

I2C[x]_SDA

I2C[x]_SCL

26 24

614

Stop Start Repeated

Start

Stop

I2C[x]_SDA

I2C[x]_SCL

11 9

220

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Figure 5-102. I2C Receive Timing

Table 5-85. Switching Characteristics for I2C Output Timings

(see Figure 5-120)

NO. PARAMETER STANDARD MODE FAST MODE UNIT

MIN MAX MIN MAX

15 tc(SCL) Cycle time, SCL 10 2.5 us

16 tsu(SCLH-SDAL) Setup Time, SCL high before SDA low (for a repeated

START condition) 4.7 0.6 us

17 th(SDAL-SCLL) Hold time, SCL low after SDA low (for a START and a

repeated START condition) 4 0.6 us

18 tw(SCLL) Pulse duration, SCL low 4.7 1.3 us

19 tw(SCLH) Pulse duration, SCL high 4 0.6 us

20 tsu(SDAV-SCLH) Setup time, SDA valid before SCL high 250 100 ns

21 th(SCLL-SDAV) Hold time, SDA valid after SCL low 0 3.45 0 0.9 us

22 tw(SDAH) Pulse duration, SDA high between STOP and START

conditions 4.7 1.3 us

23 tr(SDA) Rise time, SDA 1000 20 + 0.1Cb(1) 300 ns

24 tr(SCL) Rise time, SCL 1000 20 + 0.1Cb(1) 300 ns

25 tf(SDA) Fall time, SDA 300 20 + 0.1Cb(1) 300 ns

26 tf(SCL) Fall time, SCL 300 20 + 0.1Cb(1) 300 ns

27 tsu(SCLH-SDAH) Setup time, high before SDA high (for STOP condition) 4 0.6 us

(1) Cb is line load in pF.

Figure 5-103. I2C Transmit Timing

221

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.12 Multichannel Audio Serial Port (McASP)

The multichannel audio serial port (McASP) functions as a general-purpose audio serial port optimized for

the needs of multichannel audio applications. The McASP is useful for time-division multiplexed (TDM)

stream, Inter-Integrated Sound (I2S) protocols, and inter-component digital audio interface transmission

(DIT).

5.13.12.1 McASP Device-Specific Information

The device includes two multichannel audio serial port (McASP) interface peripherals (McASP0 and

McASP1). The McASP module consists of a transmit and receive section. These sections can operate

completely independently with different data formats, separate master clocks, bit clocks, and frame syncs

or, alternatively, the transmit and receive sections may be synchronized. The McASP module also

includes shift registers that may be configured to operate as either transmit data or receive data.

The transmit section of the McASP can transmit data in either a time-division-multiplexed (TDM)

synchronous serial format or in a DIT format where the bit stream is encoded for SPDIF, AES-3, IEC-

60958, CP-430 transmission. The receive section of the McASP peripheral supports the TDM

synchronous serial format.

The McASP module can support one transmit data format (either a TDM format or DIT format) and one

receive format at a time. All transmit shift registers use the same format and all receive shift registers use

the same format; however, the transmit and receive formats need not be the same. Both the transmit and

receive sections of the McASP also support burst mode, which is useful for nonaudio data (for example,

passing control information between two devices).

The McASP peripheral has additional capability for flexible clock generation and error detection/handling,

as well as error management.

The device McASP0 and McASP1 modules have up to four serial data pins each. The McASP FIFO size

is 256 bytes and two DMA and two interrupt requests are supported. Buffers are used transparently to

better manage DMA, which can be leveraged to manage data flow more efficiently.

For more detailed information on and the functionality of the McASP peripheral, see the Multichannel

Audio Serial Port (McASP) section of the AM437x ARM Cortex-A9 Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical

Reference Manual.

222

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.12.2 McASP Electrical Data and Timing

Table 5-86. McASP Timing Conditions

TIMING CONDITION PARAMETER MIN TYP MAX UNIT

Input Conditions

tRInput signal rise time 1(1) 4(1) ns

tFInput signal fall time 1(1) 4(1) ns

Output Condition

CLOAD Output load capacitance 15 30 pF

(1) Except when specified otherwise.

Table 5-87. Timing Requirements for McASP(1)

(see Figure 5-104)

NO. OPP100 OPP50 UNIT

MIN MAX MIN MAX

1 tc(AHCLKRX) Cycle time, McASP[x]_AHCLKR and

McASP[x]_AHCLKX 20 38.46 ns

2 tw(AHCLKRX) Pulse duration, McASP[x]_AHCLKR and

McASP[x]_AHCLKX high or low 0.5P - 2.5(2) 0.5P - 2.5(2) ns

3 tc(ACLKRX) Cycle time, McASP[x]_ACLKR and

McASP[x]_ACLKX 20 38.46 ns

4 tw(ACLKRX) Pulse duration, McASP[x]_ACLKR and

McASP[x]_ACLKX high or low 0.5R - 2.5(3) 0.5R - 2.5(3) ns

5tsu(AFSRX-

ACLKRX)

Setup time, McASP[x]_AFSR and

McASP[x]_AFSX input valid before

McASP[x]_ACLKR and

McASP[x]_ACLKX

ACLKR and

ACLKX int 12.3 15.5

ACLKR and

ACLKX ext in 4 6

ACLKR and

ACLKX ext out 4 6

6th(ACLKRX-

AFSRX)

Hold time, McASP[x]_AFSR and

McASP[x]_AFSX input valid after

McASP[x]_ACLKR and

McASP[x]_ACLKX

ACLKR and

ACLKX int -1 -1

ACLKR and

ACLKX ext in 1.6 2.3

ACLKR and

ACLKX ext out 1.6 2.3

7 tsu(AXR-ACLKRX) Setup time, McASP[x]_AXR input

valid before McASP[x]_ACLKR and

McASP[x]_ACLKX

ACLKR and

ACLKX int 12.3 15.5

ACLKR and

ACLKX ext in 4 6

ACLKR and

ACLKX ext out 4 6

8 th(ACLKRX-AXR) Hold time, McASP[x]_AXR input

valid after McASP[x]_ACLKR and

McASP[x]_ACLKX

ACLKR and

ACLKX int -1 -1

ACLKR and

ACLKX ext in 1.6 2.3

ACLKR and

ACLKX ext out 1.6 2.3

(1) ACLKR internal: ACLKRCTL.CLKRM = 1, PDIR.ACLKR = 1

ACLKR external input: ACLKRCTL.CLKRM = 0, PDIR.ACLKR = 0

ACLKR external output: ACLKRCTL.CLKRM = 0, PDIR.ACLKR=1

ACLKX internal: ACLKXCTL.CLKXM = 1, PDIR.ACLKX = 1

ACLKX external input: ACLKXCTL.CLKXM = 0, PDIR.ACLKX = 0

ACLKX external output: ACLKXCTL.CLKXM = 0, PDIR.ACLKX = 1

(2) P = McASP[x]_AHCLKR and McASP[x]_AHCLKX period in nano seconds (ns).

(3) R = McASP[x]_ACLKR and McASP[x]_ACLKX period in ns.

A0 A1 B0 B1A30 A31 B30 B31 C0 C1 C2 C3 C31

McASP[x]_ACLKR/X (Falling Edge Polarity)

McASP[x]_AHCLKR/X (Rising Edge Polarity)

McASP[x]_AFSR/X (Bit Width, 0 Bit Delay)

McASP[x]_AFSR/X (Bit Width, 1 Bit Delay)

McASP[x]_AFSR/X (Bit Width, 2 Bit Delay)

McASP[x]_AFSR/X (Slot Width, 0 Bit Delay)

McASP[x]_AFSR/X (Slot Width, 1 Bit Delay)

McASP[x]_AFSR/X (Slot Width, 2 Bit Delay)

McASP[x]_AXR[x] (Data In/Receive)

McASP[x]_ACLKR/X (CLKRP = CLKXP = 0)(A)

McASP[x]_ACLKR/X (CLKRP = CLKXP = 1)(B)

223

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

A. For CLKRP = CLKXP = 0, the McASP transmitter is configured for rising edge (to shift data out) and the McASP

receiver is configured for falling edge (to shift data in).

B. For CLKRP = CLKXP = 1, the McASP transmitter is configured for falling edge (to shift data out) and the McASP

receiver is configured for rising edge (to shift data in).

Figure 5-104. McASP Input Timing

224

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 5-88. Switching Characteristics for McASP(1)

(see Figure 5-105)

NO. OPP100 OPP50 UNIT

MIN MAX MIN MAX

9 tc(AHCLKRX) Cycle time, McASP[x]_AHCLKR and

McASP[x]_AHCLKX 20(2) 38.46 ns

10 tw(AHCLKRX) Pulse duration, McASP[x]_AHCLKR and

McASP[x]_AHCLKX high or low 0.5P - 2.5(3) 0.5P - 2.5(3) ns

11 tc(ACLKRX) Cycle time, McASP[x]_ACLKR and

McASP[x]_ACLKX 20 38.46 ns

12 tw(ACLKRX) Pulse duration, McASP[x]_ACLKR and

McASP[x]_ACLKX high or low 0.5P - 2.5(3) 0.5P - 2.5(3) ns

13 td(ACLKRX-AFSRX)

Delay time, McASP[x]_ACLKR and

McASP[x]_ACLKX transmit edge to

McASP[x]_AFSR and

McASP[x]_AFSX output valid

ACLKR and

ACLKX int 0 7.25 0 8.5

ACLKR and

ACLKX ext in 2 14 2.7 18

Delay time, McASP[x]_ACLKR and

McASP[x]_ACLKX transmit edge to

McASP[x]_AFSR and

McASP[x]_AFSX output valid with

Pad Loopback

ACLKR and

ACLKX ext

out 2 14 2.7 18

14 td(ACLKX-AXR)

Delay time, McASP[x]_ACLKX

transmit edge to McASP[x]_AXR

output valid

ACLKX int 0 7.25 0 8.5

ACLKX ext in 2 14 2.7 18

Delay time, McASP[x]_ACLKX

transmit edge to McASP[x]_AXR

output valid with Pad Loopback ACLKX ext

out 2 14 2.7 18

15 tdis(ACLKX-AXR)

Disable time, McASP[x]_ACLKX

transmit edge to McASP[x]_AXR

output high impedance

ACLKX int 0 7.25 0 8.5

ACLKX ext in 2 14 2.7 18

Disable time, McASP[x]_ACLKX

transmit edge to McASP[x]_AXR

output high impedance with Pad

Loopback

ACLKX ext

out 2 14 2.7 18

(1) ACLKR internal: ACLKRCTL.CLKRM = 1, PDIR.ACLKR = 1

ACLKR external input: ACLKRCTL.CLKRM = 0, PDIR.ACLKR = 0

ACLKR external output: ACLKRCTL.CLKRM = 0, PDIR.ACLKR = 1

ACLKX internal: ACLKXCTL.CLKXM = 1, PDIR.ACLKX = 1

ACLKX external input: ACLKXCTL.CLKXM = 0, PDIR.ACLKX = 0

ACLKX external output: ACLKXCTL.CLKXM = 0, PDIR.ACLKX = 1

(2) 50 MHz

(3) P = AHCLKR and AHCLKX period.

A0 A1 B0 B1A30 A31 B30 B31 C0 C1 C2 C3 C31

13 1313

McASP[x]_ACLKR/X (Falling Edge Polarity)

McASP[x]_AHCLKR/X (Rising Edge Polarity)

McASP[x]_AFSR/X (Bit Width, 0 Bit Delay)

McASP[x]_AFSR/X (Bit Width, 1 Bit Delay)

McASP[x]_AFSR/X (Bit Width, 2 Bit Delay)

McASP[x]_AFSR/X (Slot Width, 0 Bit Delay)

McASP[x]_AFSR/X (Slot Width, 1 Bit Delay)

McASP[x]_AFSR/X (Slot Width, 2 Bit Delay)

McASP[x]_AXR[x] (Data Out/Transmit)

McASP[x]_ACLKR/X (CLKRP = CLKXP = 1)(A)

McASP[x]_ACLKR/X (CLKRP = CLKXP = 0)(B)

225

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

A. For CLKRP = CLKXP = 1, the McASP transmitter is configured for falling edge (to shift data out) and the McASP

receiver is configured for rising edge (to shift data in).

B. For CLKRP = CLKXP = 0, the McASP transmitter is configured for rising edge (to shift data out) and the McASP

receiver is configured for falling edge (to shift data in).

Figure 5-105. McASP Output Timing

226

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.13 Multichannel Serial Port Interface (McSPI)

For more information, see the Multichannel Serial Port Interface (McSPI) section of the AM437x ARM

Cortex-A9 Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual.

5.13.13.1 McSPI Electrical Data and Timing

The following timings are applicable to the different configurations of McSPI in master or slave mode for

any McSPI and any channel (n).

5.13.13.1.1 McSPI—Slave Mode

Table 5-89. McSPI Timing Conditions—Slave Mode

TIMING CONDITION PARAMETER MIN MAX UNIT

Input Conditions

trInput signal rise time 5 ns

tfInput signal fall time 5 ns

Output Condition

Cload Output load capacitance 20 pF

Table 5-90. Timing Requirements for McSPI Input Timings—Slave Mode

(see Figure 5-106)

NO. OPP100 OPP50 UNIT

MIN MAX MIN MAX

1 tc(SPICLK) Cycle time, SPI_CLK 62.5 83.2 ns

2 tw(SPICLKL) Typical Pulse duration, SPI_CLK low 0.45P(1) 0.45P(1) 0.45P(1) 0.45P(1) ns

3 tw(SPICLKH) Typical Pulse duration, SPI_CLK high 0.45P(1) 0.45P(1) 0.45P(1) 0.45P(1) ns

4 tsu(SIMO-SPICLK) Setup time, SPI_D[x] (SIMO) valid before SPI_CLK

active edge(2)(3) 12 13 ns

5 th(SPICLK-SIMO) Hold time, SPI_D[x] (SIMO) valid after SPI_CLK

active edge(2)(3) 12 13 ns

8 tsu(CS-SPICLK) Setup time, SPI_CS valid before SPI_CLK first

edge(2) 12 13 ns

9 th(SPICLK-CS) Hold time, SPI_CS valid after SPI_CLK last edge(2) 12 13 ns

(1) P = SPI_CLK period.

(2) This timing applies to all configurations regardless of MCSPIX_CLK polarity and which clock edges are used to drive output data and

capture input data.

(3) Pins SPIx_D0 and SPIx_D1 can function as SIMO or SOMI.

Table 5-91. Switching Characteristics for McSPI Output Timings—Slave Mode

(see Figure 5-107)

NO. PARAMETER OPP100 OPP50 UNIT

MIN MAX MIN MAX

6 td(SPICLK-SOMI) Delay time, SPI_CLK active edge to

SPI_D[x] (SOMI) transition(1)(2) 17 0 19 ns

7 td(CS-SOMI) Delay time, SPI_CS active edge to SPI_D[x]

(SOMI) transition(2) 26 29 ns

(1) This timing applies to all configurations regardless of MCSPIX_CLK polarity and which clock edges are used to drive output data and

capture input data.

(2) Pins SPIx_D0 and SPIx_D1 can function as SIMO or SOMI.

SPI_CS[x] (In)

SPI_SCLK (In)

SPI_D[x] (SIMO, In) Bit n-1 Bit n-2 Bit n-3 Bit n-4

Bit 0

PHA=0

EPOL=1

POL=0

POL=1

SPI_CS[x] (In)

SPI_SCLK (In)

SPI_D[x] ( )SIMO, In Bit n-1 Bit n-2 Bit n-3 Bit 1 Bit 0

PHA=1

EPOL=1

POL=0

POL=1

5 5

227

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Figure 5-106. SPI Slave Mode Receive Timing

SPI_CS[x] (In)

SPI_SCLK (In)

SPI_D[x] (SOMI, Out)

Bit n-1 Bit n-2 Bit n-3 Bit n-4 Bit 0

PHA=0

EPOL=1

POL=0

POL=1

SPI_CS[x] (In)

SPI_SCLK (In)

SPI_D[x] (SOMI, Out) Bit n-1 Bit n-2 Bit n-3 Bit 1 Bit 0

PHA=1

EPOL=1

POL=0

POL=1

6 6

228

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Figure 5-107. SPI Slave Mode Transmit Timing

229

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.13.1.2 McSPI—Master Mode

Table 5-92. McSPI Timing Conditions—Master Mode

TIMING CONDITION PARAMETER LOW LOAD HIGH LOAD UNIT

MIN MAX MIN MAX

Input Conditions

trInput signal rise time 4 8 ns

tfInput signal fall time 4 8 ns

Output Condition

Cload Output load capacitance 5 25 pF

Table 5-93. Timing Requirements for McSPI Input Timings—Master Mode

(see Figure 5-108)

NO.

OPP100 OPP50

UNITLOW LOAD HIGH LOAD LOW LOAD HIGH LOAD

MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX

4 tsu(SOMI-SPICLK)(1) Setup time, SPI_D[x]

(SOMI) valid before

SPI_CLK active edge(2) 3 4.5 4.5 4.5 ns

5 th(SPICLK-SOMI)(1) Hold time, SPI_D[x]

(SOMI) valid after

SPI_CLK active edge(2) 6 6 6 6 ns

(1) This timing applies to all configurations regardless of MCSPIX_CLK polarity and which clock edges are used to capture input data.

(2) Pins SPIx_D0 and SPIx_D1 can function as SIMO or SOMI.

Table 5-94. Switching Characteristics for McSPI Output Timings—Master Mode

(see Figure 5-109)

NO. PARAMETER

OPP100 OPP50

UNITLOW LOAD HIGH LOAD LOW LOAD HIGH LOAD

MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX

1 tc(SPICLK) Cycle time, SPI_CLK 20.8 41.6 41.6 41.6 ns

2 tw(SPICLKL) Typical Pulse duration,

SPI_CLK low 0.45P(1) 0.45P(1) 0.45P(1) 0.55P(1) 0.45P(1) 0.45P(1) 0.45P(1) 0.45P(1) ns

tw(SPICLKH) Typical Pulse duration,

SPI_CLK high 0.45P(1) 0.45P(1) 0.45P(1) 0.55P(1) 0.45P(1) 0.45P(1) 0.45P(1) 0.45P(1) ns

tr(SPICLK) Rising time, SPI_CLK 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.82 ns

tf(SPICLK) Falling time, SPI_CLK 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.44 ns

6td(SPICLK-

SIMO)

Delay time, SPI_CLK active

edge to SPI_D[x] (SIMO)

transition(2) -1 4.5 -1 6.5 0 6.5 0 6.5 ns

7 td(CS-SIMO) Delay time, SPI_CS active

edge to SPI_D[x] (SIMO)

transition(2) 4.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 ns

8 td(CS-SPICLK) Delay time, SPI_CS

active to SPI_CLK

first edge

Mode 1

and 3(3) A - 4.2(4) A - 4.2(4) A - 5.2(4) A - 5.2(4) ns

Mode 0

and 2(3) B - 4.2(5) B - 4.2(5) B - 5.2(5) B - 5.2(5) ns

9 td(SPICLK-CS) Delay time,

SPI_CLK last edge

to SPI_CS inactive

Mode 1

and 3(3) B - 4.2(5) B - 4.2(5) B - 5.2(5) B - 5.2(5) ns

Mode 0

and 2(3) A - 4.2(4) A - 4.2(4) A - 5.2(4) A - 5.2(4) ns

(1) P = SPI_CLK period.

(2) Pins SPIx_D0 and SPIx_D1 can function as SIMO or SOMI.

(3) The polarity of SPIx_CLK and the active edge (rising or falling) on which mcspix_simo is driven and mcspix_somi is latched is all

software configurable:

– SPIx_CLK(1) phase programmable with the bit PHA of MCSPI_CH(i)CONF register: PHA = 1 (Modes 1 and 3).

– SPIx_CLK(1) phase programmable with the bit PHA of MCSPI_CH(i)CONF register: PHA = 0 (Modes 0 and 2).

SPI_CS[x] (Out)

SPI_SCLK (Out)

SPI_D[x] (SOMI, In) Bit n-1 Bit n-2 Bit n-3 Bit n-4 Bit 0

PHA=0

EPOL=1

POL=0

POL=1

8 9

SPI_CS[x] (Out)

SPI_SCLK (Out)

SPI_D[x] (SOMI, In) Bit n-1 Bit n-2 Bit n-3 Bit 1 Bit 0

PHA=1

EPOL=1

POL=0

POL=1

8 9

5 5

230

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

(4) Case P = 20.8 ns, A = (TCS+1)*TSPICLKREF (TCS is a bit field of MCSPI_CH(i)CONF register).

Case P > 20.8 ns, A = (TCS+0.5)*Fratio*TSPICLKREF (TCS is a bit field of MCSPI_CH(i)CONF register).

Note: P = SPI_CLK clock period.

(5) B = (TCS+0.5)*TSPICLKREF*Fratio (TCS is a bit field of MCSPI_CH(i)CONF register, Fratio: Even≥2).

Figure 5-108. SPI Master Mode Receive Timing

SPI_CS[x] (Out)

SPI_SCLK (Out)

SPI_D[x] (SIMO, Out) Bit n-1 Bit n-2 Bit n-3 Bit n-4 Bit 0

PHA=0

EPOL=1

POL=0

POL=1

8 9

SPI_CS[x] (Out)

SPI_SCLK (Out)

SPI_D[x] (SIMO, Out) Bit n-1 Bit n-2 Bit n-3 Bit 1 Bit 0

PHA=1

EPOL=1

POL=0

POL=1

8 9

6 6

231

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Figure 5-109. SPI Master Mode Transmit Timing

QSPI_CSn

QSPI_CLK

QSPI_D[3:0] n-1 n-2

Command Command

Read Data Read Data

maxmin

232

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

(1) Maximum supported frequency is 48 MHz.

(2) P = QSPI_CLK period.

(3) M = Programmable via Data Delay Zero (DD0) register.

5.13.14 Quad Serial Port Interface (QSPI)

The Quad SPI (QSPI) module allows single, dual or quad read access to external SPI devices. This

module provides a memory mapped register interface, which provides a direct interface to access data

from external SPI devices and to simplify software requirements. It functions as a master only. There is

one QSPI module in the device and it is primary intended for fast booting from quad-SPI flash

memories.

General SPI features:

• Programmable clock divider

• Six pin interface (QSPI_CLK, QSPI_D0, QSPI_D1,QSPI_D2,QSPI_D3, QSPI_CS0)

• One external chip select signal

• Support for 3-, 4- or 6-pin SPI interface

• Programmable CS0 to DATA_OUT delay from 0 to 3 QSPI_CLKs

• Only supports SPI MODE 3

NOTE

For more information, see the Quad Serial Port Interface section of the AM437x ARM

Cortex-A9 Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual.

Table 5-95 displays the switching characteristics for the Quad SPI module.

Table 5-95. QSPI Switching Characteristics

(see Figure 5-110 and Figure 5-111)

NO. PARAMETER OPP100 OPP50

MIN MAX MIN MAX UNIT

1 tc(QSPI_CLK) Cycle time, QSPI_CLK 20.8(1) 20.8(1) ns

2 tw(QSPI_CLKL) Pulse duration, QSPI_CLK low 9.77(1) 9.77(1) ns

3 tw(QSPI_CLKH) Pulse duration, QSPI_CLK high 9.77(1) 9.77(1) ns

4 td(CS-QSPI_CLK) Delay time, QSPI_CSn active edge to

QSPI_CLK transition M*P+5(2)(3) M*P+5(2)(3) ns

5 td(QSPI_CLK-

QSPI_CSn) Delay time, QSPI_CLK transition to

QSPI_CSn inactive edge M*P+5(2)(3) M*P+5(2)(3) ns

6 td(QSPI_CLK-D1) Delay time, QSPI_CLK active edge to

QSPI_D[0] transition 0 5.5 0 5.5 ns

7 tsu(D-QSPI_CLK) Setup time, QSPI_D[3:0] valid before active

QSPI_CLK edge 8.5 8.5 ns

8 th(QSPI_CLK-D) Hold time, QSPI_D[3:0] valid after active

QSPI_CLK edge 0 0 ns

Figure 5-110. QSPI Read Active High Polarity

QSPI_CS

QSPI_CLK

QSPI_D[0] n-1 n-2

Command Command

Write Data Write Data

QSPI_D[3:1]

min max

233

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Figure 5-111. QSPI Write Active High Polarity

HDQ

tCYCD

tDW0

tDW1

HDQ

tHW0

tCYCH

tHW1

HDQ

tBtBR

234

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.15 HDQ/1-Wire Interface (HDQ/1-Wire)

NOTE

For more information, see HDQ/1-Wire Interface chapter of the AM437x ARM Cortex-A9

Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual.

The module is intended to work with both HDQ and 1-Wire protocols. The protocols use one wire to

communicate between the master and the slave. The protocols employ an asynchronous return to one

mechanism where, after any command, the line is pulled high.

5.13.15.1 HDQ Protocol

Table 5-96 and Table 5-97 assume testing over the recommended operating conditions (see Figure 5-112,

Figure 5-113,Figure 5-114, and Figure 5-115).

Table 5-96. HDQ Timing Requirements

PARAMETER MIN MAX UNIT

tCYCD Bit window 190 μs

tHW1 Reads 1 32 66 μs

tHW0 Reads 0 70 145 μs

tRSPS Command to host respond time(1) 190 320 μs

(1) Defined by software

Table 5-97. HDQ Switching Characteristics

PARAMETER DESCRIPTION MIN MAX UNIT

tBBreak timing 190 μs

tBR Break recovery 40 μs

tCYCH Bit window 190 250 μs

tDW1 Sends 1 (write) 0.5 50 μs

tDW0 Sends 0 (write) 86 145 μs

Figure 5-112. HDQ Break (Reset) Timing

Figure 5-113. HDQ Read Bit Timing (Data)

Figure 5-114. HDQ Write Bit Timing (Command/Address or Data)

1-WIRE tLOW1

tLOW0

t _and_t

SLOT REC

1-WIRE

t _and_t

SLOT REC

t _and_t

RDV REL

tLOWR

1-WIRE tRTSL tPDH

tRSTH

tPDL

HDQ

Break

0_(LSB)

7_(MSB) 0_(LSB)

Command_byte_written Data_byte_received

tRSPS

235

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Figure 5-115. HDQ Communication Timing

5.13.15.2 1-Wire Protocol

Table 5-98 and Table 5-99 assume testing over the recommended operating conditions (see Figure 5-116,

Figure 5-117, and Figure 5-118).

Table 5-98. HDQ/1-Wire Timing Requirements—1-Wire Mode

PARAMETER MIN MAX UNIT

tPDH Presence pulse delay high 15 60 μs

tPDL Presence pulse delay low 60 240 μs

tRDV + tREL Read bit-zero time 60 μs

Table 5-99. HDQ/1-Wire Switching Characteristics—1-Wire Mode

PARAMETER DESCRIPTION MIN MAX UNIT

tRSTL Reset time low 480 960 μs

tRSTH Reset time high 480 μs

tSLOT Bit cycle time 60 120 μs

tLOW1 Write bit-one time 1 15 μs

tLOW0 Write bit-zero time 60 120 μs

tREC Recovery time 1 μs

tLOWR Read bit strobe time 1 15 μs

Figure 5-116. 1-Wire Break (Reset) Timing

Figure 5-117. 1-Wire Read Bit Timing (Data)

Figure 5-118. 1-Wire Write Bit Timing (Command/Address or Data)

GPO[n:0]

GPI[m:0]

236

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.16 Programmable Real-Time Unit Subsystem and Industrial Communication

Subsystem (PRU-ICSS)

For more information, see the Programmable Real-Time Unit Subsystem and Industrial Communication

Subsystem Interface (PRU-ICSS) section of the AM437x Sitara Processors Technical Reference Manual.

5.13.16.1 Programmable Real-Time Unit (PRU-ICSS PRU)

Table 5-100. PRU-ICSS PRU Timing Conditions

TIMING CONDITION PARAMETER MIN MAX UNIT

Output Condition

Cload Capacitive load for each bus line 3 30 pF

5.13.16.1.1 PRU-ICSS PRU Direct Input/Output Mode Electrical Data and Timing

(1) P = L3_CLK (PRU-ICSS ocp clock) period.

(2) n = 16, 11 for PRU-ICSS1 and 19 for PRU-ICSS0

Table 5-101. PRU-ICSS PRU Timing Requirements - Direct Input Mode

(see Figure 5-119)

NO. MIN MAX UNIT

1 tw(GPI) Pulse width, GPI 2*P(1) ns

2tr(GPI) Rise time, GPI 1.00 3.00 ns

tf(GPI) Fall time, GPI 1.00 3.00

3 tsk(GPI) Internal skew between GPI[n:0] signals(2) 5.00 ns

(1) P = L3_CLK (PRU-ICSS ocp clock) period.

(2) n = 11 for PRU-ICSS1 and 19 for PRU-ICSS0

Figure 5-119. PRU-ICSS PRU Direct Input Timing

Table 5-102. PRU-ICSS PRU Switching Requirements - Direct Output Mode

(see Figure 5-120)

NO. MIN MAX UNIT

1 tw(GPO) Pulse width, GPO 2*P(1) ns

2tr(GPO) Rise time, GPO 1.00 3.00 ns

tf(GPO) Fall time, GPO 1.00 3.00

3 tsk(GPO) Internal skew between GPO[n:0] signals(2) 5.00 ns

Figure 5-120. PRU-ICSS PRU Direct Output Timing

CLOCKIN

DATAIN

678

CLOCKIN

DATAIN

678

237

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.16.1.2 PRU-ICSS PRU Parallel Capture Mode Electrical Data and Timing

Table 5-103. PRU-ICSS PRU Timing Requirements - Parallel Capture Mode

(see Figure 5-121 and Figure 5-122)

NO. MIN MAX UNIT

1 tc(CLOCKIN) Cycle time, CLOCKIN 20.00 ns

2 tw(CLOCKIN_L) Pulse duration, CLOCKIN low 10.00 ns

3 tw(CLOCKIN_H) Pulse duration, CLOCKIN high 10.00 ns

4 tr(CLOCKIN) Rising time, CLOCKIN 1.00 3.00 ns

5 tf(CLOCKIN) Falling time, CLOCKIN 1.00 3.00 ns

6 tsu(DATAIN-CLOCKIN) Setup time, DATAIN valid before CLOCKIN 4.00 ns

7 th(CLOCKIN-DATAIN) Hold time, DATAIN valid after CLOCKIN 0 ns

8tr(DATAIN) Rising time, DATAIN 1.00 3.00 ns

tf(DATAIN) Falling time, DATAIN 1.00 3.00

Figure 5-121. PRU-ICSS PRU Parallel Capture Timing - Rising Edge Mode

Figure 5-122. PRU-ICSS PRU Parallel Capture Timing - Falling Edge Mode

5.13.16.1.3 PRU-ICSS PRU Shift Mode Electrical Data and Timing

(1) P = L3_CLK (PRU-ICSS ocp clock) period.

Table 5-104. PRU-ICSS PRU Timing Requirements - Shift In Mode

(see Figure 5-123)

NO. MIN MAX UNIT

1 tc(DATAIN) Cycle time, DATAIN 10.00 ns

2 tw(DATAIN) Pulse width, DATAIN 0.45*P(1) 0.55*P(1) ns

3 tr(DATAIN) Rising time, DATAIN 1.00 3.00 ns

4 tf(DATAIN) Falling time, DATAIN 1.00 3.00 ns

CLOCKOUT

DATAOUT

DATAIN

238

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

(1) P = L3_CLK (PRU-ICSS ocp clock) period.

Figure 5-123. PRU-ICSS PRU Shift In Timing

Table 5-105. PRU-ICSS PRU Switching Requirements - Shift Out Mode

(see Figure 5-124)

NO. MIN MAX UNIT

1 tc(CLOCKOUT) Cycle time, CLOCKOUT 10.00 ns

2 tw(CLOCKOUT) Pulse width, CLOCKOUT 0.45*P(1) 0.55*P(1) ns

3 tr(CLOCKOUT) Rising time, CLOCKOUT 1.00 3.00 ns

4 tf(CLOCKOUT) Falling time, CLOCKOUT 1.00 3.00 ns

5 td(CLOCKOUT-

DATAOUT) Delay time, CLOCKOUT to DATAOUT Valid -1.50 3.00 ns

6tr(DATAOUT) Rising time, DATAOUT 1.00 3.00 ns

tf(DATAOUT) Falling time, DATAOUT 1.00 3.00

Figure 5-124. PRU-ICSS PRU Shift Out Timing

5.13.16.1.4 PRU-ICSS Sigma Delta Electrical Data and Timing

Table 5-106. PRU-ICSS Timing Requirements - Sigma Delta Mode

(see Figure 5-125 and Figure 5-126)

NO. MIN MAX UNIT

1 tw(SDx_CLK) Pulse width, SDx_CLK 20.00 ns

2 tr(SDx_CLK) Rising time, SDx_CLK 1.00 3.00 ns

3 tf(SDx_CLK) Falling time, SDx_CLK 1.00 3.00 ns

4 tsu(SDx_D-SDx_CLK) Setup time, SDx_D valid before SDx_CLK active edge 10.00 ns

5 th(SDx_CLK-SDx_D) Hold time, SDx_D valid before SDx_CLK active edge 5.00 ns

6tr(SDx_D) Rising time, SDx_D 1.00 3.00 ns

tf(SDx_D) Falling time, SDx_D 1.00 3.00

SDx_CLK

SDx_D

4 5

SDx_CLK

SDx_D

4 5

239

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Figure 5-125. PRU-ICSS Sigma Delta Timing - SD_CLK Rising Active Edge

Figure 5-126. PRU-ICSS Sigma Delta Timing - SD_CLK Falling Active Edge

5.13.16.1.5 PRU-ICSS ENDAT Electrical Data and Timing

Table 5-107. PRU-ICSS Timing Requirements - ENDAT Mode

(see Figure 5-127)

NO. MIN MAX UNIT

1 tw(ENDATx_IN) Pulse width, ENDATx_IN 40.00 ns

2 tr(ENDATx_IN) Rising time, ENDATx_IN 1.00 10.00 ns

3 tf(ENDATx_IN) Falling time, ENDATx_IN 1.00 10.00 ns

Table 5-108. PRU-ICSS Switching Requirements - ENDAT Mode

(see Figure 5-127)

NO. MIN MAX UNIT

4 tw(ENDATx_CLK) Pulse width, ENDATx_CLK 20.00 ns

5 tr(ENDATx_CLK) Rising time, ENDATx_CLK 1.00 3.00 ns

6 tf(ENDATx_CLK) Falling time, ENDATx_CLK 1.00 3.00 ns

7 td(ENDATx_OUT-

ENDATx_CLK) Delay time, ENDATx_CLK fall to ENDATx_OUT -10.00 10.00 ns

8tr(ENDATx_OUT) Rising time, ENDATx_OUT 1.00 3.00 ns

tf(ENDATx_OUT) Falling time, ENDATx_OUT 1.00 3.00

9 td(ENDATx_OUT_EN-

ENDATx_CLK) Delay time, ENDATx_CLK Fall to ENDATx_OUT_EN -10.00 10.00 ns

ENDATx_IN

ENDATx_CLK

ENDATx_OUT

ENDATx_OUT_EN

240

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Figure 5-127. PRU-ICSS ENDAT Timing

5.13.16.2 PRU-ICSS EtherCAT (PRU-ICSS ECAT)

Table 5-109. PRU-ICSS ECAT Timing Conditions

TIMING CONDITION PARAMETER MIN MAX UNIT

Output Condition

Cload Capacitive load for each bus line 30 pF

5.13.16.2.1 PRU-ICSS ECAT Electrical Data and Timing

Table 5-110. PRU-ICSS ECAT Timing Requirements - Input Validated With LATCH_IN

(see Figure 5-128)

NO. MIN MAX UNIT

1 tw(EDIO_LATCH_IN) Pulse width, EDIO_LATCH_IN 100.00 ns

2 tr(EDIO_LATCH_IN) Rising time, EDIO_LATCH_IN 1.00 3.00 ns

3 tf(EDIO_LATCH_IN) Falling time, EDIO_LATCH_IN 1.00 3.00 ns

4 tsu(EDIO_DATA_IN-

EDIO_LATCH_IN) Setup time, EDIO_DATA_IN valid before

EDIO_LATCH_IN active edge 20.00 ns

5 th(EDIO_LATCH_IN-

EDIO_DATA_IN) Hold time, EDIO_DATA_IN valid after EDIO_LATCH_IN

active edge 20.00 ns

6tr(EDIO_DATA_IN) Rising time, EDIO_DATA_IN 1.00 3.00 ns

tf(EDIO_DATA_IN) Falling time, EDIO_DATA_IN 1.00 3.00

EDC_SYNCx_OUT

EDIO_DATA_IN[7:0]

EDIO_LATCH_IN

EDIO_DATA_IN[7:0]

241

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Figure 5-128. PRU-ICSS ECAT Input Validated With LATCH_IN Timing

Table 5-111. PRU-ICSS ECAT Timing Requirements - Input Validated With SYNCx

(see Figure 5-129)

NO. MIN MAX UNIT

1 tw(EDC_SYNCx_OUT) Pulse width, EDC_SYNCx_OUT 100.00 ns

2 tr(EDC_SYNCx_OUT) Rising time, EDC_SYNCx_OUT 1.00 3.00 ns

3 tf(EDC_SYNCx_OUT) Falling time, EDC_SYNCx_OUT 1.00 3.00 ns

4 tsu(EDIO_DATA_IN-

EDC_SYNCx_OUT) Setup time, EDIO_DATA_IN valid before

EDC_SYNCx_OUT active edge 24.50 ns

5 th(EDC_SYNCx_OUT-

EDIO_DATA_IN) Hold time, EDIO_DATA_IN valid after EDC_SYNCx_OUT

active edge 22.00 ns

6tr(EDIO_DATA_IN) Rising time, EDIO_DATA_IN 1.00 3.00 ns

tf(EDIO_DATA_IN) Falling time, EDIO_DATA_IN 1.00 3.00

Figure 5-129. PRU-ICSS ECAT Input Validated With SYNCx Timing

EDC_LATCHx_IN

EDIO_SOF

EDIO_DATA_IN[7:0]

242

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

(1) P = PRU-ICSS IEP clock source period.

Table 5-112. PRU-ICSS ECAT Timing Requirements - Input Validated With Start of Frame (SOF)

(see Figure 5-130)

NO. MIN MAX UNIT

1 tw(EDIO_SOF) Pulse duration, EDIO_SOF 4*P(1) 5*P(1) ns

2 tr(EDIO_SOF) Rising time, EDIO_SOF 1.00 3.00 ns

3 tf(EDIO_SOF) Falling time, EDIO_SOF 1.00 3.00 ns

4 tsu(EDIO_DATA_IN-

EDIO_SOF) Setup time, EDIO_DATA_IN valid before EDIO_SOF

active edge 20.00 ns

5 th(EDIO_SOF-EDIO_DATA_IN) Hold time, EDIO_DATA_IN valid after EDIO_SOF active

edge 20.00 ns

6tr(EDIO_DATA_IN) Rising time, EDIO_DATA_IN 1.00 3.00 ns

tf(EDIO_DATA_IN) Falling time, EDIO_DATA_IN 1.00 3.00

Figure 5-130. PRU-ICSS ECAT Input Validated With SOF

(1) P = PRU-ICSS IEP clock source period.

Table 5-113. PRU-ICSS ECAT Timing Requirements - LATCHx_IN

(see Figure 5-131)

NO. MIN MAX UNIT

1 tw(EDC_LATCHx_IN) Pulse duration, EDC_LATCHx_IN 3*P(1) ns

2 tr(EDC_LATCHx_IN) Rising time, EDC_LATCHx_IN 1.00 3.00 ns

3 tf(EDC_LATCHx_IN) Falling time, EDC_LATCHx_IN 1.00 3.00 ns

Figure 5-131. PRU-ICSS ECAT LATCHx_IN Timing

MDIO_CLK (Output)

MDIO_DATA (Input)

243

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

(1) P = PRU-ICSS IEP clock source period.

Table 5-114. PRU-ICSS ECAT Switching Requirements - Digital IOs

NO. MIN MAX UNIT

1 tw(EDIO_OUTVALID) Pulse duration, EDIO_OUTVALID 14*P(1) 32*P(1) ns

2 tr(EDIO_OUTVALID) Rising time, EDIO_OUTVALID 1.00 3.00 ns

3 tf(EDIO_OUTVALID) Falling time, EDIO_OUTVALID 1.00 3.00 ns

4 td(EDIO_OUTVALID-

EDIO_DATA_OUT) Delay time, EDIO_OUTVALID to EDIO_DATA_OUT 0.00 18*P(1) ns

5 tr(EDIO_DATA_OUT) Rising time, EDIO_DATA_OUT 1.00 3.00 ns

6 tf(EDIO_DATA_OUT) Falling time, EDIO_DATA_OUT 1.00 3.00 ns

7 tsk(EDIO_DATA_OUT) EDIO_DATA_OUT skew 8.00 ns

5.13.16.3 PRU-ICSS MII_RT and Switch

(1) Except when specified otherwise.

Table 5-115. PRU-ICSS MII_RT Switch Timing Conditions

TIMING CONDITION PARAMETER MIN TYP MAX UNIT

Input Conditions

trInput signal rise time 1(1) 5(1) ns

tfInput signal fall time 1(1) 5(1) ns

Output Condition

CLOAD Output load capacitance 20 pF

5.13.16.3.1 PRU-ICSS MDIO Electrical Data and Timing

Table 5-116. PRU-ICSS MDIO Timing Requirements - MDIO_DATA

(see Figure 5-132)

NO. MIN TYP MAX UNIT

1 tsu(MDIO-MDC) Setup time, MDIO valid before MDC high 90 ns

2 th(MDIO-MDC) Hold time, MDIO valid from MDC high 0 ns

Figure 5-132. PRU-ICSS MDIO_DATA Timing - Input Mode

Table 5-117. PRU-ICSS MDIO Switching Characteristics - MDIO_CLK

(see Figure 5-133)

NO. MIN TYP MAX UNIT

1 tc(MDC) Cycle time, MDC 400 ns

2 tw(MDCH) Pulse duration, MDC high 160 ns

3 tw(MDCL) Pulse duration, MDC low 160 ns

4 tt(MDC) Transition time, MDC 5 ns

MII_RXCLK

MDIO_CLK (Output)

MDIO_DATA (Output)

MDIO_CLK

244

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Figure 5-133. PRU-ICSS MDIO_CLK Timing

Table 5-118. PRU-ICSS MDIO Switching Characteristics - MDIO_DATA

(see Figure 5-134)

NO. MIN TYP MAX UNIT

1 td(MDC-MDIO) Delay time, MDC high to MDIO valid 10 390 ns

Figure 5-134. PRU-ICSS MDIO_DATA Timing - Output Mode

5.13.16.3.2 PRU-ICSS MII_RT Electrical Data and Timing

Table 5-119. PRU-ICSS MII_RT Timing Requirements - MII_RXCLK

(see Figure 5-135)

NO. 10 Mbps 100 Mbps UNIT

MIN TYP MAX MIN TYP MAX

1 tc(RX_CLK) Cycle time, RX_CLK 399.96 400.04 39.996 40.004 ns

2 tw(RX_CLKH) Pulse Duration, RX_CLK high 140 260 14 26 ns

3 tw(RX_CLKL) Pulse Duration, RX_CLK low 140 260 14 26 ns

4 tt(RX_CLK) Transition time, RX_CLK 3 3 ns

Figure 5-135. PRU-ICSS MII_RXCLK Timing

MII_MRCLK (Input)

MII_RXD[3:0],

MII_RXDV,

MII_RXER (Inputs)

MII_TXCLK

245

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 5-120. PRU-ICSS MII_RT Timing Requirements - MII[x]_TXCLK

(see Figure 5-136)

NO. 10 Mbps 100 Mbps UNIT

MIN TYP MAX MIN TYP MAX

1 tc(TX_CLK) Cycle time, TX_CLK 399.96 400.04 39.996 40.004 ns

2 tw(TX_CLKH) Pulse Duration, TX_CLK high 140 260 14 26 ns

3 tw(TX_CLKL) Pulse Duration, TX_CLK low 140 260 14 26 ns

4 tt(TX_CLK) Transition time, TX_CLK 3 3 ns

Figure 5-136. PRU-ICSS MII_TXCLK Timing

Table 5-121. PRU-ICSS MII_RT Timing Requirements - MII_RXD[3:0], MII_RXDV, and MII_RXER

(see Figure 5-137)

NO. 10 Mbps 100 Mbps UNIT

MIN TYP MAX MIN TYP MAX

1tsu(RXD-RX_CLK) Setup time, RXD[3:0] valid before RX_CLK 8 8 nstsu(RX_DV-RX_CLK) Setup time, RX_DV valid before RX_CLK

tsu(RX_ER-RX_CLK) Setup time, RX_ER valid before RX_CLK

2th(RX_CLK-RXD) Hold time RXD[3:0] valid after RX_CLK 8 8 nsth(RX_CLK-RX_DV) Hold time RX_DV valid after RX_CLK

th(RX_CLK-RX_ER) Hold time RX_ER valid after RX_CLK

Figure 5-137. PRU-ICSS MII_RXD[3:0], MII_RXDV, and MII_RXER Timing

Start

Bit

Data Bits

UART_TXD

Data Bits

Bit

Start

UART_RXD

MII_TXCLK (input)

MII_TXD[3:0],

MII_TXEN (outputs)

246

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 5-122. PRU-ICSS MII_RT Switching Characteristics - MII_TXD[3:0] and MII_TXEN

(see Figure 5-138)

NO. 10 Mbps 100 Mbps UNIT

MIN TYP MAX MIN TYP MAX

1td(TX_CLK-TXD) Delay time, TX_CLK high to TXD[3:0] valid 5 25 5 25 ns

td(TX_CLK-TX_EN) Delay time, TX_CLK to TX_EN valid

Figure 5-138. PRU-ICSS MII_TXD[3:0], MII_TXEN Timing

5.13.16.4 PRU-ICSS Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter (PRU-ICSS UART)

(1) U = UART baud time = 1/programmed baud rate.

Table 5-123. Timing Requirements for PRU-ICSS UART Receive

(see Figure 5-139)

NO. MIN MAX UNIT

3 tw(RX) Pulse width, receive start, stop, data bit 0.96U(1) 1.05U(1) ns

(1) U = UART baud time = 1/programmed baud rate.

Table 5-124. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for PRU-ICSS UART

Transmit

(see Figure 5-139)

NO. MIN MAX UNIT

1 fbaud(baud) Maximum programmable baud rate 0 12 MHz

2 tw(TX) Pulse width, transmit start, stop, data bit U - 2(1) U + 2(1) ns

Figure 5-139. PRU-ICSS UART Timing

247

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.17 Multimedia Card (MMC) Interface

For more information, see the Multimedia Card (MMC) section of the AM437x ARM Cortex-A9

Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual.

5.13.17.1 MMC Electrical Data and Timing

Table 5-125. MMC Timing Conditions

TIMING CONDITION PARAMETER MIN TYP MAX UNIT

Input Conditions

trInput signal rise time 1 5 ns

tfInput signal fall time 1 5 ns

Output Condition

Cload Output load capacitance 3 30 pF

Table 5-126. Timing Requirements for MMC[0]_CMD and MMC[0]_DAT[7:0]

(see Figure 5-140)

NO.

OPP50/OPP100

UNIT1.8 V 3.3 V

MIN TYP MAX MIN TYP MAX

1 tsu(CMDV-CLKH) Setup time, MMC_CMD valid before

MMC_CLK rising clock edge 4.1 4.1 ns

2 th(CLKH-CMDV) Hold time, MMC_CMD valid after

MMC_CLK rising clock edge 1.5 1.5 ns

3 tsu(DATV-CLKH) Setup time, MMC_DATx valid before

MMC_CLK rising clock edge 4.1 4.1 ns

4 th(CLKH-DATV) Hold time, MMC_DATx valid after

MMC_CLK rising clock edge 1.5 1.5 ns

Table 5-127. Timing Requirements for MMC[1/2]_CMD and MMC[1/2]_DAT[7:0]

(see Figure 5-140)

NO.

OPP50/OPP100

UNIT1.8 V 3.3 V

MIN TYP MAX MIN TYP MAX

1 tsu(CMDV-CLKH) Setup time, MMC_CMD valid before

MMC_CLK rising clock edge 4.1 4.1 ns

2 th(CLKH-CMDV) Hold time, MMC_CMD valid after

MMC_CLK rising clock edge 2.55 3.76 ns

3 tsu(DATV-CLKH) Setup time, MMC_DATx valid before

MMC_CLK rising clock edge 4.1 4.1 ns

4 th(CLKH-DATV) Hold time, MMC_DATx valid after

MMC_CLK rising clock edge 2.55 3.76 ns

MMC[x]_CLK (Output)

MMC[x]_CMD (Input)

MMC[x]_DAT[7:0] (Inputs)

248

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Figure 5-140. MMC[x]_CMD and MMC[x]_DAT[7:0] Input Timing

MMC[x]_CLK (Output)

MMC[x]_CMD (Output)

MMC[x]_DAT[7:0] (Outputs)

MMC[x]_CLK (Output)

249

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 5-128. Switching Characteristics for MMC[x]_CLK

(see Figure 5-141)

NO. PARAMETER STANDARD MODE HIGH-SPEED MODE UNIT

MIN TYP MAX MIN TYP MAX

fop(CLK) Operating frequency, MMC_CLK 24 48 MHz

tcop(CLK) Operating period: MMC_CLK 41.7 20.8 ns

fid(CLK) Identification mode frequency, MMC_CLK 400 400 kHz

tcid(CLK) Identification mode period: MMC_CLK 2500 2500 ns

6 tw(CLKL) Pulse duration, MMC_CLK low (0.5*P) - tf(CLK)(1) (0.5*P) - tf(CLK)(1) ns

7 tw(CLKH) Pulse duration, MMC_CLK high (0.5*P) - tr(CLK)(1) (0.5*P) - tr(CLK)(1) ns

8 tr(CLK) Rise time, All Signals (10% to 90%) 2.2 2.2 ns

9 tf(CLK) Fall time, All Signals (10% to 90%) 2.2 2.2 ns

(1) P = MMC_CLK period.

Figure 5-141. MMC[x]_CLK Timing

Table 5-129. Switching Characteristics for MMC[x]_CMD and MMC[x]_DAT[7:0]—HSPE=0

(see Figure 5-142)

NO. PARAMETER

OPP50/OPP100

UNIT1.8 V 3.3 V

MIN TYP MAX MIN TYP MAX

10 td(CLKL-CMD) Delay time, MMC_CLK falling clock

edge to MMC_CMD transition -4 14 -4 17.5 ns

11 td(CLKL-DAT) Delay time, MMC_CLK falling clock

edge to MMC_DATx transition -4 14 -4 17.5 ns

Figure 5-142. MMC[x]_CMD and MMC[x]_DAT[7:0] Output Timing—HSPE=0

MMC[x]_CLK (Output)

MMC[x]_CMD (Output)

MMC[x]_DAT[7:0] (Outputs)

250

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 5-130. Switching Characteristics for MMC[x]_CMD and MMC[x]_DAT[7:0]—HSPE=1

(see Figure 5-143)OPP50/OPP100

NO. PARAMETER 1.8 V 3.3 V UNIT

MIN TYP MAX MIN TYP MAX

12 td(CLKL-CMD) Delay time, MMC_CLK rising clock

edge to MMC_CMD transition 0.8 7.4 0.8 7.4 ns

13 td(CLKL-DAT) Delay time, MMC_CLK rising clock

edge to MMC_DATx transition 0.8 7.4 0.8 7.4 ns

Figure 5-143. MMC[x]_CMD and MMC[x]_DAT[7:0] Output Timing—HSPE=1

Start

Bit

Data Bits

UARTx_TXD

Data Bits

Bit

Start

UARTx_RXD

Stop Bit

251

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.18 Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART)

For more information, see the Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART) section of the

AM437x ARM Cortex-A9 Microprocessors (MPUs) Technical Reference Manual.

5.13.18.1 UART Electrical Data and Timing

Table 5-131. Timing Requirements for UARTx Receive

(see Figure 5-144)

NO. MIN MAX UNIT

3 tw(RX) Pulse width, receive start, stop, data bit 0.96U(1) 1.05U(1) ns

(1) U = UART baud time = 1/programmed baud rate.

Table 5-132. Switching Characteristics for UARTx Transmit

(see Figure 5-144)

NO. PARAMETER MIN MAX UNIT

1 fbaud(baud) Maximum programmable baud rate 3.6864 MHz

2 tw(TX) Pulse width, transmit start, stop, data bit U - 2(1) U + 2(1) ns

(1) U = UART baud time = 1/programmed baud rate.

Figure 5-144. UART Timings

Pulse Duration

50%

50% 50%

Pulse Duration

252

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.13.18.2 UART IrDA Interface

The IrDA module operates in three different modes:

• Slow infrared (SIR) (≤115.2 kbps)

• Medium infrared (MIR) (0.576 Mbps and 1.152 Mbps)

• Fast infrared (FIR) (4 Mbps).

Figure 5-145 shows the UART IrDA pulse parameters. Table 5-133 and Table 5-134 list the signaling

rates and pulse durations for UART IrDA receive and transmit modes.

Figure 5-145. UART IrDA Pulse Parameters

Table 5-133. UART IrDA—Signaling Rate and Pulse Duration—Receive Mode

SIGNALING RATE ELECTRICAL PULSE DURATION UNIT

MIN MAX

SIR

2.4 kbps 1.41 88.55 µs

9.6 kbps 1.41 22.13 µs

19.2 kbps 1.41 11.07 µs

38.4 kbps 1.41 5.96 µs

57.6 kbps 1.41 4.34 µs

115.2 kbps 1.41 2.23 µs

MIR

0.576 Mbps 297.2 518.8 ns

1.152 Mbps 149.6 258.4 ns

FIR

4 Mbps (Single pulse) 67 164 ns

4 Mbps (Double pulse) 190 289 ns

253

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Table 5-134. UART IrDA—Signaling Rate and Pulse Duration—Transmit Mode

SIGNALING RATE ELECTRICAL PULSE DURATION UNIT

MIN MAX

SIR

2.4 kbps 78.1 78.1 µs

9.6 kbps 19.5 19.5 µs

19.2 kbps 9.75 9.75 µs

38.4 kbps 4.87 4.87 µs

57.6 kbps 3.25 3.25 µs

115.2 kbps 1.62 1.62 µs

MIR

0.576 Mbps 414 419 ns

1.152 Mbps 206 211 ns

FIR

4 Mbps (Single pulse) 123 128 ns

4 Mbps (Double pulse) 248 253 ns

TCK

TDO

TDI/TMS

1a 1b

254

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

5.14 Emulation and Debug

5.14.1 IEEE 1149.1 JTAG

5.14.1.1 JTAG Electrical Data and Timing

Table 5-135. Timing Requirements for JTAG

(see Figure 5-146)

NO. OPP100 OPP50 UNIT

MIN MAX MIN MAX

1 tc(TCK) Cycle time, TCK 60 60 ns

1a tw(TCKH) Pulse duration, TCK high (40% of tc) 24 24 ns

1b tw(TCKL) Pulse duration, TCK low (40% of tc) 24 24 ns

3tsu(TDI-TCKH) Input setup time, TDI valid to TCK high 3 3 ns

tsu(TMS-TCKH) Input setup time, TMS valid to TCK high 3 3 ns

4th(TCKH-TDI) Input hold time, TDI valid from TCK high 8 8 ns

th(TCKH-TMS) Input hold time, TMS valid from TCK high 8 8 ns

Table 5-136. Switching Characteristics for JTAG

(see Figure 5-146)

NO. PARAMETER OPP100 OPP50 UNIT

MIN MAX MIN MAX

2 td(TCKL-TDO) Delay time, TCK low to TDO valid 0 23 0 23 ns

Figure 5-146. JTAG Timing

255

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

6 Device and Documentation Support

6.1 Device Nomenclature

To designate the stages in the product development cycle, TI assigns prefixes to the part numbers of all

processors and support tools. Each device has one of three prefixes: X, P, or null (no prefix) (for example,

XAM4379xZDN). Texas Instruments recommends two of three possible prefix designators for its support

tools: TMDX and TMDS. These prefixes represent evolutionary stages of product development from

engineering prototypes (TMDX) through fully qualified production devices and tools (TMDS).

Device development evolutionary flow:

XExperimental device that is not necessarily representative of the final device's electrical

specifications and may not use production assembly flow.

PPrototype device that is not necessarily the final silicon die and may not necessarily meet

final electrical specifications.

null Production version of the silicon die that is fully qualified.

Support tool development evolutionary flow:

TMDX Development-support product that has not yet completed Texas Instruments internal

qualification testing.

TMDS Fully-qualified development-support product.

X and P devices and TMDX development-support tools are shipped against the following disclaimer:

"Developmental product is intended for internal evaluation purposes."

Production devices and TMDS development-support tools have been characterized fully, and the quality

and reliability of the device have been demonstrated fully. TI's standard warranty applies.

Predictions show that prototype devices (X or P) have a greater failure rate than the standard production

devices. Texas Instruments recommends that these devices not be used in any production system

because their expected end-use failure rate still is undefined. Only qualified production devices are to be

used.

TI device nomenclature also includes a suffix with the device family name. This suffix indicates the

package type (for example, ZDN), the temperature range (for example, blank is the default commercial

temperature range), and the device speed range, in megahertz (for example, 80 is 800 MHz). Figure 6-1

provides a legend for reading the complete device name for any device.

For orderable part numbers of AM437x devices in the ZDN package type, see the Package Option

Addendum of this document, the TI website, or contact your TI sales representative.

For additional description of the device nomenclature markings on the die, see the AM437x Sitara

Processors Silicon Errata.

ARM Cortex-A9 MPU:

AM4372

AM4376

AM4379

AM4377

AM4378

DEVICE(A)

PREFIX

AM4379

X = Experimental device

Blank = Qualified device

ZDN

PACKAGE TYPE(B)

ZDN = 491-pin plastic BGA, with Pb-free solder balls

DEVICE SPEED RANGE

30 = 300-MHZ Cortex-A9

80 = 800-MHz

60 = 600-MHz Cortex-A9

Cortex-A9

100 = 1000-MHz Cortex-A9

( )

TEMPERATURE RANGE

Blank = 0°C to 90°C (commercial junction temperature)

A = –40 extended junction temperature)

D = –40 industrial junction temperature)

°C to 105°C (

°C to 90°C (

( )

DEVICE REVISION CODE

A = silicon revision 1.1

B = silicon revision 1.2

SUFFIX

Blank = Only Public Boot Supported

S = High-Security (AM437xHS) device, Secure Boot Supported

256

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

A. The device shown in this device nomenclature example is one of several valid part numbers for this family of devices.

For orderable device part numbers, see the Package Option Addendum of this document.

B. BGA = Ball Grid Array.

Figure 6-1. Device Nomenclature

6.2 Tools and Software

TI offers an extensive line of development tools. Tools and software to evaluate the performance of the

device, generate code, and develop solutions are listed below.

Models

AM437x BSDL Model ZDN package BSDL model.

AM437x IBIS Model ZDN package IBIS model.

Design Kits and Evaluation Modules

AM437x Evaluation Module Enables developers to immediately start evaluating the AM437x processor

family (AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378 and AM4379 ) and begin building applications

such as portable navigation, patient monitoring, home/building automation, barcode

scanners, portable data terminals and others.

AM437x Industrial Development Kit (IDK) An application development platform for evaluating the

industrial communication and control capabilities of Sitara AM4379 and AM4377 processors

for industrial applications.

AM437x Starter Kit Provides a stable and affordable platform to quickly start evaluation of Sitara ARM

Cortex-A9 AM437x Processors (AM4372, AM4376, AM4378) and accelerate development

for HMI, industrial and networking applications. It is a low-cost development platform based

on the ARM Cortex-A9 processor that is integrated with options such as Dual Gigabit

Ethernet, DDR3L, Camera and Capacitive Touch Screen LCD.

TI Designs

ARM MPU with Integrated BiSS C Master Interface Reference Design Impelementation of BiSS C

Master protocol on Industrial Communication Sub-System (PRU-ICSS). The design provides

full documentation and source code for Programmable Realtime Unit (PRU).

Sercos III Slave For AM437x Communication Development Platform Reference Design Combines

the AM437x Sitara processor family from Texas Instruments (TI) and the Sercos III media

access control (MAC) layer into a single system-on-chip (SoC) solution. Targeted for Sercos

III slave communications, the TIDEP0039 allows designers to implement the real-time

Sercos III communication standard for a broad range of industrial automation equipment.

EnDat 2.2 System Reference Design Implements the EnDat 2.2 Master protocol stack and hardware

interface solution based on the HEIDENHAIN EnDat 2.2 standard for position or rotary

encoders. The design is composed of the EnDat 2.2 Master protocol stack, half-duplex

communications using RS485 transceivers and the line termination implemented on the

Sitara AM437x Industrial Development Kit.

257

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Acontis EtherCAT Master Stack Reference Design A highly portable software stack that can be used

on various embedded platforms. The EC-Master supports the high performane TI Sitara

MPUs, it provides a sophisticated EtherCAT Master solution which customers can use to

implement EtherCAT communication interface boards, EtherCAT based PLC or motion

control applications.

SPI Master with Signal Path Delay Compensation Reference Design Describes the implementation of

the SPI master protocol with signal path delay compensation on PRU-ICSS. It supports the

32-bit communication protocol of ADS8688 with a SPI clock frequency of up to 16.7MHz.

Isolated Current Shunt and Voltage Measurement Reference Design for Motor Drives Using

AM437x

Uses the AMC130x reinforced isolated delta-sigma modulators along with AM437x Sitara

ARM Cortex-A9 Processor, which implements Sinc filters on PRU-ICSS. The design

provides an ability to evaluate the performance of these measurements: three motor

currents, three inverter voltages, and the DC Link voltage.

Single Chip Drive for Industrial Communications and Motor Control Implements a hardware interface

solution based on the HEIDENHAIN EnDat 2.2 standard for position or rotary encoders. The

platform also allows designers to implement real-time EtherCAT communications standards

in a broad range of industrial automation equipment.

AM437x Low Power Suspend Mode with LPDDR2 Realizes processor power consumption less than 0.1

mW while keeping LPDDR2 memory in self refresh consuming ~ 1.6 mW. The system

solution is comprised of AM437x Sitara processor, LPDDR2 memory and TPS65218 power

management IC and optimized for new low power mode along with support for legacy low

power modes.

AM437x Discrete Power Reference Design Provides flexibility to power designers. This reference

design implementation is a BOM-optimized discrete power solution for the AM437x

processor with a minimal number of discrete ICs and basic feature set. T

Embedded USB 2.0 Reference Design The USB 2.0 reference design guidelines are extremely

important for designers considering USB2.0 electrical compliance testing. The guidelines are

applicable to AM335x and AM437x but also generic to other processors. The approach taken

for these guidelines is highly practical, without complex formulas or theory.

ARM MPU with Integrated HIPERFACE DSL Master Interface Reference Design Implementation of

HIPERFACE DSL Master protocol on Industrial Communication Sub-System (PRU-ICSS).

The two wire interface allows for integration of position feedback wires into motor cable.

Complete solution consists of AM437x PRU-ICSS firmware and TIDA-00177 transceiver

reference design.

Software

Processor SDK for AM437X Sitara Processors - Linux and TI-RTOS Support A unified software

platform for TI embedded processors providing easy setup and fast out-of-the-box access to

benchmarks and demos. All releases of Processor SDK are consistent across TI’s broad

portfolio, allowing developers to seamlessly reuse and migrate software across devices.

Programmable Real-time Unit (PRU) Software Support Package An add-on package that provides a

framework and examples for developing software for the Programmable Real-time Unit sub-

system and Industrial Communication Sub-System (PRU-ICSS) in the supported TI

processors.

SYS/BIOS Industrial Software Development Kit (SDK) for Sitara Processors Gives customers the

ability to easily add real-time industrial communications to their design so they can focus on

differentiating their application code.

TI Dual-Mode Bluetooth®Stack Comprised of Single-Mode and Dual-Mode offerings implementing the

Bluetooth 4.0 specification. The Bluetooth stack is fully Bluetooth Special Interest Group

(SIG) qualified, certified and royalty-free, provides simple command line sample applications

to speed development, and upon request has MFI capability.

258

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

www.ti.com

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

Development Tools

Clock Tree Tool for Sitara ARM Processors Interactive clock tree configuration software that provides

information about the clocks and modules in Sitara devices.

Pin Mux Tool Provides a Graphical User Interface for configuring pin multiplexing settings, resolving

conflicts and specifying I/O cell characteristics for TI MPUs. Results are output as C

header/code files that can be imported into software development kits (SDK) or used to

configure customer's custom software. Version 3 of the Pin Mux utility adds the capability of

automatically selecting a mux configuration that satisfies the entered requirements.

Power Estimation Tool (PET) Provides users the ability to gain insight in to the power consumption of

select TI processors. The tool includes the ability for the user to choose multiple application

scenarios and understand the power consumption as well as how advanced power saving

techniques can be applied to further reduce overall power consumption.

XDS200 USB Debug Probe Connects to the target board via a TI 20-pin connector (with multiple

adapters for TI 14-pin, ARM 10-pin and ARM 20-pin) and to the host PC via USB2.0 High

Speed (480Mbps). It also requires a license of Code Composer Studio IDE running on the

host PC.

XDS560v2 System Trace USB and Ethernet Debug Probe Adds system pin trace in its large external

memory buffer. Available for selected TI devices, this external memory buffer captures

device-level information that allows obtaining accurate bus performance activity and

throughput, as well as power management of core and peripherals. Also, all XDS debug

probes support Core and System Trace in all ARM and DSP processors that feature an

Embedded Trace Buffer (ETB).

XDS560v2 System Trace USB Debug Probe Adds system pin trace in its large external memory buffer.

Available for selected TI devices, this external memory buffer captures device-level

information that allows obtaining accurate bus performance activity and throughput, as well

as power management of core and peripherals. Also, all XDS debug probes support Core

and System Trace in all ARM and DSP processors that feature an Embedded Trace Buffer

(ETB).

6.3 Documentation Support

To receive notification of documentation updates, navigate to the device product folder on ti.com. In the

upper right corner, click on Alert me to register and receive a weekly digest of any product information that

has changed. For change details, review the revision history included in any revised document.

The current documentation that describes the processor, related peripherals, and other technical collateral

is listed below.

Errata

AM437x Sitara Processors Silicon Errata Describes the known exceptions to the functional

specifications for this microprocessor.

Application Reports

High-Speed Interface Layout Guidelines As modern bus interface frequencies scale higher, care must

be taken in the printed circuit board (PCB) layout phase of a design to ensure a robust

solution.

User's Guides

AM437x Sitara Processors Technical Reference Manual Collection of documents providing detailed

information on the device including power, reset, and clock control, interrupts, memory map,

and switch fabric interconnect. Detailed information on the microprocessor unit (MPU)

subsystem as well as a functional description of the peripherals supported is also included.

Discrete Power Solution for AM437x Details the implementation of a BOM-optimized discrete power

solution for the AM437x processor with a minimal number of discrete ICs and basic feature

set. The solution represents a baseline for a discrete power solution that can be extended for

additional features of the AM437x processor.

Powering the AM335x/AM437x with TPS65218 A reference for connectivity between the TPS65218

power management IC and the AM335x or AM437x processor.

259

AM4372, AM4376, AM4377, AM4378, AM4379

www.ti.com

SPRS851D –JUNE 2014–REVISED SEPTEMBER 2016

Submit Documentation Feedback

Product Folder Links: AM4372 AM4376 AM4377 AM4378 AM4379

AM437x GP EVM Hardware User's Guide Describes the hardware architecture of the AM437x

Evaluation Module (EVM) (part number TMDXEVM437X), which is based on the Texas

Instruments (TI) AM437x processor. This EVM is also commonly known as the AM437x

General Purpose (GP) EVM.

White Papers

Highly Integrated industrial Drive to Connect, Control and Communicate Discusses the overall drive

architecture with emphasis on the highly integrated industrial drive solution by Texas

Instruments.

Ensuring Real-Time Predictability High-performance processors like ARM Cortex-A cores have an

entirely different set of resources and pro- cessing capabilities than those of real-time

processing cores, like the Programmable Real-Time Unit (PRU) coprocessor in TI’s Sitara

processors.

Mainline Linux Ensures Stability and Innovation Enabling and empowering the rapid development of

new functionality starts at the foundational level of the system’s software environment – that

is, at the level of the Linux kernel – and builds upward from there.

Scalable Solutions for HMI A well designed HMI system decreases that gap between the production

process and operator through an intuitive visualization system, layers of detail to allow for a

bird’s eye view down to the minute details, as well as training material and documentation at

the operators’ fingertips.

Linaro Speeds Development in TI Linux SDKs Linaro’s software is not a Linux distribution; in fact, it is

distribution neutral. The focus of the organization’s 120 engineers is on optimizing base-level

open-source software in areas that interact directly with the silicon such as multimedia,

graphics, power management, the Linux kernel and booting processes.

Getting Started on TI ARM Embedded Processor Development Beginning with an overview of ARM

technology and available processor platforms, this paper will then explore the fundamentals

of embedded design that influence a system’s architecture and, consequently, impact

processor selection.

The Yocto Project: Changing the Way Embedded Linux Software Solutions are Developed Enabling

complex silicon devices such as SoC with operating firmware and application software can

be a challenge for equipment manufacturers who often are more comfortable with hardware

than software issues.